ML102640724: Difference between revisions
StriderTol (talk | contribs) (Created page by program invented by StriderTol) |
StriderTol (talk | contribs) (StriderTol Bot change) |
||
Line 33: | Line 33: | ||
ES-301 Control Room/In-Plant Systems Outline Form ES-301-2 FINAL | ES-301 Control Room/In-Plant Systems Outline Form ES-301-2 FINAL | ||
@ All RO and SRO-l control room (and in-plant) systems must be different and serve different safety functions; all 5 SRO-U systems must serve different safety functions; in-plant systems and functions may overlap those tested in the control room. | @ All RO and SRO-l control room (and in-plant) systems must be different and serve different safety functions; all 5 SRO-U systems must serve different safety functions; in-plant systems and functions may overlap those tested in the control room. | ||
Type Codes Criteria for RO I SRO-l I SRO-U (A)lternate path 4-6 (5) /4-6 (4) I 2-3 (3) | |||
(C)ontrol room (D)irect from bank 9 (6) / 8 (6) I 4 (4) | (C)ontrol room (D)irect from bank 9 (6) / 8 (6) I 4 (4) | ||
(E)mergency or abnormal in-plant 1 (3) I 1 (3) I 1 (2) | (E)mergency or abnormal in-plant 1 (3) I 1 (3) I 1 (2) | ||
Line 73: | Line 73: | ||
==Title:== | ==Title:== | ||
Transfer the NI Pumps from Cold JPM No.: 2010 Systems Control | Transfer the NI Pumps from Cold JPM No.: 2010 Systems Control Leg Recirc to Hot Leg Recirc Room JPM A K/A | ||
Leg Recirc to Hot Leg Recirc Room JPM A K/A | |||
==Reference:== | ==Reference:== | ||
Line 114: | Line 112: | ||
: 3. Momentarily place Simulator in Run to acknowledge alarms/Reset SLIMS. | : 3. Momentarily place Simulator in Run to acknowledge alarms/Reset SLIMS. | ||
: 4. Leave Simulator in FREEZE until operator is ready to begin. | : 4. Leave Simulator in FREEZE until operator is ready to begin. | ||
2010 Systems Control Room JPM A | 2010 Systems Control Room JPM A NUREG 1021, Revision 9 | ||
NUREG 1021, Revision 9 | |||
Appendix C Page 4 of 9 Form ES-C-i PERFORMANCE INFORMATION (Denote Critical Steps with an asterisk*) | Appendix C Page 4 of 9 Form ES-C-i PERFORMANCE INFORMATION (Denote Critical Steps with an asterisk*) | ||
Line 129: | Line 125: | ||
5 (Step i.e) Check 1NI-i2iA The operator observes the (Train A NI to B &C Hot iNl-i2lA Red status light Leg) OPEN. | 5 (Step i.e) Check 1NI-i2iA The operator observes the (Train A NI to B &C Hot iNl-i2lA Red status light Leg) OPEN. | ||
LIT, Green status light OFF. | LIT, Green status light OFF. | ||
2010 Systems Control Room JPM A | 2010 Systems Control Room JPM A NUREG 1021, Revision 9 | ||
NUREG 1021, Revision 9 | |||
Appendix C Page 5 of 9 Form ES-C-i PERFORMANCE INFORMATION STEPS ELEMENTS STANDARD S/U COMMENTS REQUIRED FOR UNSAT | Appendix C Page 5 of 9 Form ES-C-i PERFORMANCE INFORMATION STEPS ELEMENTS STANDARD S/U COMMENTS REQUIRED FOR UNSAT | ||
Line 148: | Line 142: | ||
. 1NI-150B (Train B NI to 1NJ-150B Green status light Cold Leg lsol) - LIT, Red status light OFF. | . 1NI-150B (Train B NI to 1NJ-150B Green status light Cold Leg lsol) - LIT, Red status light OFF. | ||
CLOSED The operator observes the | CLOSED The operator observes the | ||
. I NI-152B (Train B NI to INI-152B Red status light A & D Hot Leg ) OPEN | . I NI-152B (Train B NI to INI-152B Red status light A & D Hot Leg ) OPEN LIT, Green status light OFF. | ||
LIT, Green status light OFF. | |||
*12 (Step 1.1) Start NI Pump lB. The operator depresses the lB NI Pump START pushbutton and observes the Red status light LIT, Green status light OFF. | *12 (Step 1.1) Start NI Pump lB. The operator depresses the lB NI Pump START pushbutton and observes the Red status light LIT, Green status light OFF. | ||
The operator observes motor amps rise, peak and stabilize, and pump flow (1NIP-5120) rise to 45O. | The operator observes motor amps rise, peak and stabilize, and pump flow (1NIP-5120) rise to 45O. | ||
Line 170: | Line 162: | ||
- NUREG 1021, Revision 9 | - NUREG 1021, Revision 9 | ||
Appendix C Page 8 of 9 Form ES-C-i VERIFICATION OF COMPLETION Job Performance Measure No.: 2010 Systems Control Room JPM A | Appendix C Page 8 of 9 Form ES-C-i VERIFICATION OF COMPLETION Job Performance Measure No.: 2010 Systems Control Room JPM A Examinees Name: | ||
Examinees Name: | |||
Date Performed: | Date Performed: | ||
Facility Evaluator: | Facility Evaluator: | ||
Line 194: | Line 184: | ||
Transfer to Hot Leg Recirc may be required, eventually, after transferring to Cold Leg Recirc during the implementation of: | Transfer to Hot Leg Recirc may be required, eventually, after transferring to Cold Leg Recirc during the implementation of: | ||
: a. EP/1/A/5000/ES-1.2 (Post LOCA Cooldown And Depressurization). | : a. EP/1/A/5000/ES-1.2 (Post LOCA Cooldown And Depressurization). | ||
: b. EP/1/A/5000/ECA-3.1 (SGTR With Loss Of Reactor Coolant Subcooled Recovery | : b. EP/1/A/5000/ECA-3.1 (SGTR With Loss Of Reactor Coolant Subcooled Recovery Desired). | ||
: c. EP/1/A/5000/ECA-3.2 (SGTR With Loss Of Reactor Coolant Saturated Recovery Desired). | |||
Desired). | |||
: c. EP/1/A/5000/ECA-3.2 (SGTR With Loss Of Reactor Coolant Saturated Recovery | |||
Desired). | |||
MNS TRANSFER TO HOT LEG RECIRC PAGE NO. | MNS TRANSFER TO HOT LEG RECIRC PAGE NO. | ||
Line 207: | Line 193: | ||
: c. Check 1 NI-I 1 8A (Train A NI To Cold c. Perform the following: | : c. Check 1 NI-I 1 8A (Train A NI To Cold c. Perform the following: | ||
Leg Isol) CLOSED. | Leg Isol) CLOSED. | ||
: 1) IF 1NI-118A is in intermediate position, THEN wait up to 30 seconds for valve to complete valve movement. | : 1) IF 1NI-118A is in intermediate position, THEN wait up to 30 seconds for valve to complete valve movement. | ||
: 2) IF 1 NI-i 1 8A is closed, THEN GO JQ.Step id. | : 2) IF 1 NI-i 1 8A is closed, THEN GO JQ.Step id. | ||
Line 214: | Line 199: | ||
: e. Check iNl-i2iA (Train A NI To B & C e. Perform the following: | : e. Check iNl-i2iA (Train A NI To B & C e. Perform the following: | ||
Hot Leg) OPEN. | Hot Leg) OPEN. | ||
I) IF iNl-121A is in intermediate position, THEN wait up to 30 seconds for valve to complete valve movement. | I) IF iNl-121A is in intermediate position, THEN wait up to 30 seconds for valve to complete valve movement. | ||
: 2) IF INI-i2iA is open, THEN IQ Step i.f. | : 2) IF INI-i2iA is open, THEN IQ Step i.f. | ||
Line 228: | Line 212: | ||
: j. Open 1NI-152B (Train B NI To A & D Hot Leg). | : j. Open 1NI-152B (Train B NI To A & D Hot Leg). | ||
: k. Check if 1 B NI Pump should be started: k. Perform the following: | : k. Check if 1 B NI Pump should be started: k. Perform the following: | ||
. 1NI-150B (Train B NI To Cold Leg 1) if valve(s) in intermediate position, Isol) CLOSED | . 1NI-150B (Train B NI To Cold Leg 1) if valve(s) in intermediate position, Isol) CLOSED | ||
- THEN wait up to 30 seconds to allow valves to complete valve | - THEN wait up to 30 seconds to allow valves to complete valve | ||
. 1NI-152B (Train B NI To A & D Hot movement. | . 1NI-152B (Train B NI To A & D Hot movement. | ||
Leg) OPEN. | Leg) OPEN. | ||
: 2) IF valves are properly aligned, THEN çQ] Step 1.1. | : 2) IF valves are properly aligned, THEN çQ] Step 1.1. | ||
: 3) if either valve fails to go to its required position, THEN GOTO Step i.m. | : 3) if either valve fails to go to its required position, THEN GOTO Step i.m. | ||
Line 266: | Line 248: | ||
_1) Check 1NS-43A(lANDHxOutlet 1) GOjStep4.d. | _1) Check 1NS-43A(lANDHxOutlet 1) GOjStep4.d. | ||
to NS Cont Outside lsol) CLOSED. | to NS Cont Outside lsol) CLOSED. | ||
_2) Close INI-i73A(1ANDt0A&B _2) QjQStep4.d. | _2) Close INI-i73A(1ANDt0A&B _2) QjQStep4.d. | ||
Cold Legs Cont Outside Isol). | Cold Legs Cont Outside Isol). | ||
Line 282: | Line 263: | ||
: 1) Check 1 NS-38B (1 B ND Hx Outlet 1) Q j Step 5. | : 1) Check 1 NS-38B (1 B ND Hx Outlet 1) Q j Step 5. | ||
to NS Cont Outside Isol) CLOSED. | to NS Cont Outside Isol) CLOSED. | ||
_2) Close 1NI-178B (lB ND to C & D _2) TQ Step 5. | _2) Close 1NI-178B (lB ND to C & D _2) TQ Step 5. | ||
Cold Legs Outside Isol). | Cold Legs Outside Isol). | ||
Line 303: | Line 283: | ||
==Title:== | ==Title:== | ||
Respond to ND System Malfunction JPM No.: 2010 Systems Control | Respond to ND System Malfunction JPM No.: 2010 Systems Control While at Mid Loop Room JPM B (Alternate Path) | ||
While at Mid Loop Room JPM B (Alternate Path) | |||
K/A | K/A | ||
Line 322: | Line 300: | ||
OP/1/A/6100/SD-20 (Draining the NC System) | OP/1/A/6100/SD-20 (Draining the NC System) | ||
AP/l/A/5500/19 (Loss of ND or ND System Leakage) | AP/l/A/5500/19 (Loss of ND or ND System Leakage) | ||
Handouts: AP/I/A/5500/19 (Loss of ND or ND System Leakage) 2010 Systems Control Room JPM B | Handouts: AP/I/A/5500/19 (Loss of ND or ND System Leakage) 2010 Systems Control Room JPM B NUREG 1021, Revision 9 | ||
NUREG 1021, Revision 9 | |||
Appendix C Page 3 of I I Form ES-C-i Job Performance Measure Worksheet Initiating Cue: The CRS has directed you to implement AP!11A15500119 (Loss of ND or ND System Leakage) AND control ND flow so that NC Temperature is maintained at its present temperature Time Critical Task: NO Validation Time: 8 minutes 2010 Systems Control Room JPM B | Appendix C Page 3 of I I Form ES-C-i Job Performance Measure Worksheet Initiating Cue: The CRS has directed you to implement AP!11A15500119 (Loss of ND or ND System Leakage) AND control ND flow so that NC Temperature is maintained at its present temperature Time Critical Task: NO Validation Time: 8 minutes 2010 Systems Control Room JPM B NUREG 1021, Revision 9 | ||
NUREG 1021, Revision 9 | |||
Appendix C Page 4 of 1 1 Form ES-C-I Job Performance Measure Worksheet SIMULATOR OPERATIONAL GUIDELINES | Appendix C Page 4 of 1 1 Form ES-C-I Job Performance Measure Worksheet SIMULATOR OPERATIONAL GUIDELINES | ||
Line 386: | Line 360: | ||
A common air line failure has caused both 1ND29 (ND Heat Exchanger Outlet Or Bypass Valve) and 1ND34 (ND Heat Exchanger Outlet Or Bypass Valve) to fail open. | A common air line failure has caused both 1ND29 (ND Heat Exchanger Outlet Or Bypass Valve) and 1ND34 (ND Heat Exchanger Outlet Or Bypass Valve) to fail open. | ||
8 (Step 4) Check ND Flow The operator observes total control: ND system flow by observing INDP-519i(C & | 8 (Step 4) Check ND Flow The operator observes total control: ND system flow by observing INDP-519i(C & | ||
(Step 4.a) Check total ND D Cold Leg) to be 2i75 system flow GREATER | (Step 4.a) Check total ND D Cold Leg) to be 2i75 system flow GREATER gpm, and i NDP-5i 81 (A & | ||
gpm, and i NDP-5i 81 (A & | |||
THAN 3000 GPM. B Cold Leg) to be 2325 gpm; and determines that ND system flow is 4500 gpm. | THAN 3000 GPM. B Cold Leg) to be 2325 gpm; and determines that ND system flow is 4500 gpm. | ||
(Step 4.b) Throttle the The operator attempts to following valves as adjust the position of both necessary to reduce ND I ND-29 and I ND-34 by System to less than 3000 adjusting the controller. | (Step 4.b) Throttle the The operator attempts to following valves as adjust the position of both necessary to reduce ND I ND-29 and I ND-34 by System to less than 3000 adjusting the controller. | ||
Line 422: | Line 394: | ||
- NUREG 1021, Revision 9 | - NUREG 1021, Revision 9 | ||
Appendix C Page 10 of I I Form ES-C-I VERIFICATION OF COMPLETION Job Performance Measure No.: 2010 Systems Control Room JPM B | Appendix C Page 10 of I I Form ES-C-I VERIFICATION OF COMPLETION Job Performance Measure No.: 2010 Systems Control Room JPM B Examinees Name: | ||
Examinees Name: | |||
Date Performed: | Date Performed: | ||
Facility Evaluator: | Facility Evaluator: | ||
Line 475: | Line 445: | ||
: b. Check NC subcooling based on core b. Perform the following: | : b. Check NC subcooling based on core b. Perform the following: | ||
exit T/Cs GREATER THAN 0°F. | exit T/Cs GREATER THAN 0°F. | ||
: 1) Stop ND pump(s). | : 1) Stop ND pump(s). | ||
: 2) Ensure all NC pumps off. | : 2) Ensure all NC pumps off. | ||
Line 528: | Line 497: | ||
: 3) Place the following manual loaders in the full OPEN position: | : 3) Place the following manual loaders in the full OPEN position: | ||
* 1ND-29 (1A ND Hx Outlet Isol) | * 1ND-29 (1A ND Hx Outlet Isol) | ||
. IND-14 (lB ND Hx Outlet Isol). | . IND-14 (lB ND Hx Outlet Isol). | ||
_4) QjQStep4.f. | _4) QjQStep4.f. | ||
Line 539: | Line 507: | ||
==Title:== | ==Title:== | ||
Swap Hotwell/CM Booster Pumps JPM No.: 2010 Systems Control | Swap Hotwell/CM Booster Pumps JPM No.: 2010 Systems Control Room JPM C (Alternate Path) | ||
Room JPM C (Alternate Path) | |||
K/A | K/A | ||
Line 555: | Line 521: | ||
Task Standard: The operator will start the C Hotwell Pump, and place the A Hotwell Pump in standby. Then, the operator will start the C Condensate Booster Pump, and place the A Condensate Booster Pump in standby. | Task Standard: The operator will start the C Hotwell Pump, and place the A Hotwell Pump in standby. Then, the operator will start the C Condensate Booster Pump, and place the A Condensate Booster Pump in standby. | ||
The operator will then respond to an ARP, requiring that the A Hotwell Pump be restarted and the C Hotwell Pump removed from service. | The operator will then respond to an ARP, requiring that the A Hotwell Pump be restarted and the C Hotwell Pump removed from service. | ||
Required Materials: None 2010 Systems Control Room JPM C | Required Materials: None 2010 Systems Control Room JPM C NUREG 1021, Revision 9 | ||
NUREG 1021, Revision 9 | |||
Appendix C Page 3 of 14 Form ES-C-i Job Performance Measure Worksheet General | Appendix C Page 3 of 14 Form ES-C-i Job Performance Measure Worksheet General | ||
Line 581: | Line 545: | ||
: 2. Place Simulator in Run and acknowledge alarms/Reset SLIMS. | : 2. Place Simulator in Run and acknowledge alarms/Reset SLIMS. | ||
NOTE: During the performance of this JPM, the simulator operator will need to operate Trigger #1 at the end of Step 14 of this JPM, after switch has been placed in AUTO, and then clear this malfunction at Step 16. | NOTE: During the performance of this JPM, the simulator operator will need to operate Trigger #1 at the end of Step 14 of this JPM, after switch has been placed in AUTO, and then clear this malfunction at Step 16. | ||
2010 Systems Control Room JPM C | 2010 Systems Control Room JPM C NUREG 1021, Revision 9 | ||
NUREG 1021, Revision 9 | |||
Appendix C Page 5 of 14 Form ES-C-i PERFORMANCE INFORMATION (Denote Critical Steps with an asterisk*) | Appendix C Page 5 of 14 Form ES-C-i PERFORMANCE INFORMATION (Denote Critical Steps with an asterisk*) | ||
Line 605: | Line 567: | ||
. 1 C Hotwell Pump The operator observes motor amps rise, peak, and then stabilize at 45 amps. | . 1 C Hotwell Pump The operator observes motor amps rise, peak, and then stabilize at 45 amps. | ||
Booth Cue: | Booth Cue: | ||
If the operator contacts the NEO to check pump status, as NEO, report The IC Hotwell Pump is operating properly all | If the operator contacts the NEO to check pump status, as NEO, report The IC Hotwell Pump is operating properly all operating parameters normal. | ||
operating parameters normal. | |||
(Note prior to Step 3.3.2) The operator reads the Securing an operating Note and proceeds. | (Note prior to Step 3.3.2) The operator reads the Securing an operating Note and proceeds. | ||
Hotwell pump will cause a decrease in condensate flow to the Steam Generators and result in an NC System temperature increase (R.M) 2010 Systems Control Room JPM C | Hotwell pump will cause a decrease in condensate flow to the Steam Generators and result in an NC System temperature increase (R.M) 2010 Systems Control Room JPM C | ||
Line 636: | Line 596: | ||
Cue: | Cue: | ||
The CRS acknowledges and initials Step 3.42. | The CRS acknowledges and initials Step 3.42. | ||
2010 Systems Control Room JPM C | 2010 Systems Control Room JPM C NUREG 1021, Revision 9 | ||
NUREG 1021, Revision 9 | |||
Appendix C Page 9 of 14 Form ES-C-I PERFORMANCE INFORMATION STEPS ELEMENTS STANDARD S/U COMMENTS REQUIRED FOR UNSAT (Step 3.4.3) Ensure The operator contacts the Auxiliary Oil Pump NEO to check the Auxiliary operating on CM Booster Oil Pump running. | Appendix C Page 9 of 14 Form ES-C-I PERFORMANCE INFORMATION STEPS ELEMENTS STANDARD S/U COMMENTS REQUIRED FOR UNSAT (Step 3.4.3) Ensure The operator contacts the Auxiliary Oil Pump NEO to check the Auxiliary operating on CM Booster Oil Pump running. | ||
Line 659: | Line 617: | ||
The operator observes motor amps rise, peak, and then stabilize at 90 amps. | The operator observes motor amps rise, peak, and then stabilize at 90 amps. | ||
Cue: | Cue: | ||
If the operator contacts the NEO to check pump status, as NEO, report The IC CM Booster Pump is operating properly all operating | If the operator contacts the NEO to check pump status, as NEO, report The IC CM Booster Pump is operating properly all operating parameters normaL 12 (Note prior to Step 3.4.5) The operator reads the Securing an operating CM Note and proceeds. | ||
parameters normaL 12 (Note prior to Step 3.4.5) The operator reads the Securing an operating CM Note and proceeds. | |||
Booster Pump will cause a decrease in condensate flow to the Steam Generators and result in an NC System temperature increase. (R.M.) | Booster Pump will cause a decrease in condensate flow to the Steam Generators and result in an NC System temperature increase. (R.M.) | ||
2010 Systems Control Room JPM C | 2010 Systems Control Room JPM C NUREG 1021, Revision 9 | ||
NUREG 1021, Revision 9 | |||
Appendix Q Page 11 of 14 Form ES-C-I PERFORMANCE INFORMATION STEPS ELEMENTS STANDARD S/U COMMENTS REQUIRED FOR UNSAT | Appendix Q Page 11 of 14 Form ES-C-I PERFORMANCE INFORMATION STEPS ELEMENTS STANDARD S/U COMMENTS REQUIRED FOR UNSAT | ||
*13 (Step 3.4.5) WHEN desired, The operator rotates the IA place the desired CM CM Booster Pump control Booster Pump in STOP | *13 (Step 3.4.5) WHEN desired, The operator rotates the IA place the desired CM CM Booster Pump control Booster Pump in STOP switch to the STOP position and observes the Green | ||
switch to the STOP position and observes the Green | |||
. 1A CM Booster Pump status light LIT, and Red | . 1A CM Booster Pump status light LIT, and Red | ||
. lB CM Booster Pump status light OFF. | . lB CM Booster Pump status light OFF. | ||
Line 678: | Line 630: | ||
. IA CM Booster Pump position. | . IA CM Booster Pump position. | ||
. lB CM Booster Pump | . lB CM Booster Pump | ||
. IC CM Booster Pump The operator addresses | . IC CM Booster Pump The operator addresses Annunciator Response Procedure for Panel 1AD-8, A3, HTWL PUMP C STRNR HI D/P (Alternate Path). | ||
Simulator Instructor Note: Just after the operator places the IA CM Booster Pump Control Switch to STOP, operate Trigger #1. | Simulator Instructor Note: Just after the operator places the IA CM Booster Pump Control Switch to STOP, operate Trigger #1. | ||
2010 Systems Control Room JPM C | 2010 Systems Control Room JPM C | ||
Line 697: | Line 648: | ||
- NUREG 1021, Revision 9 | - NUREG 1021, Revision 9 | ||
Appendix C Page 13 of 14 Form ES-C-i VERlFICATON OF COMPLETION Job Performance Measure No.: 2010 Systems Control Room JPM C | Appendix C Page 13 of 14 Form ES-C-i VERlFICATON OF COMPLETION Job Performance Measure No.: 2010 Systems Control Room JPM C Examinees Name: | ||
Examinees Name: | |||
Date Performed: | Date Performed: | ||
Facility Evaluator: | Facility Evaluator: | ||
Line 815: | Line 764: | ||
==Title:== | ==Title:== | ||
Manually Actuate Containment JPM No.: 2010 Systems Control | Manually Actuate Containment JPM No.: 2010 Systems Control Spray System Room JPM D (Alternate Path) | ||
Spray System Room JPM D (Alternate Path) | |||
K/A | K/A | ||
Line 867: | Line 814: | ||
(Step i0.a) Check The operator recognizes EP/i/A/5000/ECA1.1 (Loss from Initial Conditions that Of Emergency Coolant ECA-1 .1 is NOT in effect. | (Step i0.a) Check The operator recognizes EP/i/A/5000/ECA1.1 (Loss from Initial Conditions that Of Emergency Coolant ECA-1 .1 is NOT in effect. | ||
Recirc) IN EFFECT. | Recirc) IN EFFECT. | ||
(Step 10.a RNO) GO TO The operator proceeds to Step 10.d. Step 10.d. | (Step 10.a RNO) GO TO The operator proceeds to Step 10.d. Step 10.d. | ||
2 (Step 10.d) Check NS suction ALIGNED TO | 2 (Step 10.d) Check NS suction ALIGNED TO FWST AS FOLLOWS: | ||
FWST AS FOLLOWS: | |||
. Check 1NS-18A (IA NS Pump Suction From The operator observes the Cont Sump Isol) Green status light LIT. | . Check 1NS-18A (IA NS Pump Suction From The operator observes the Cont Sump Isol) Green status light LIT. | ||
CLOSED | CLOSED | ||
. Check 1NS-20A (1A NS Pump Suction From The operator observes the FWST Isol) OPEN | . Check 1NS-20A (1A NS Pump Suction From The operator observes the FWST Isol) OPEN Red status light LIT. | ||
Red status light LIT. | |||
. Check 1NS-1B(1B NS Pump Suction From The operator observes the Cont Sump Isol) - Green status light LIT. | . Check 1NS-1B(1B NS Pump Suction From The operator observes the Cont Sump Isol) - Green status light LIT. | ||
CLOSED | CLOSED | ||
. Check INS-3B(IB NS Pump Suction From The operator observes the FWST Isol) OPEN. | . Check INS-3B(IB NS Pump Suction From The operator observes the FWST Isol) OPEN. | ||
Red status light LIT. | Red status light LIT. | ||
2010 Systems Control Room JPM D | 2010 Systems Control Room JPM D | ||
Line 888: | Line 829: | ||
9 PSIG. | 9 PSIG. | ||
(Step I 0.f) Check the following NS pump discharge valves OPEN: | (Step I 0.f) Check the following NS pump discharge valves OPEN: | ||
1 NS-32A (1A NS Hx Outlet The operator observes the Cont Outside Isol). Green status light LIT. | 1 NS-32A (1A NS Hx Outlet The operator observes the Cont Outside Isol). Green status light LIT. | ||
The operator observes the 1NS-29A (1A NS Hx Outlet Cont Outside Isol). Green status light LIT. | The operator observes the 1NS-29A (1A NS Hx Outlet Cont Outside Isol). Green status light LIT. | ||
Line 906: | Line 846: | ||
6 (Step 10.f RNO 1)b) IF all The operator recognizes four valves are closed, that two of four valves have THEN opened and that the step does NOT apply. | 6 (Step 10.f RNO 1)b) IF all The operator recognizes four valves are closed, that two of four valves have THEN opened and that the step does NOT apply. | ||
(Step 10.f RNO 1)c) GO TO The operator proceeds to Step lOg. step 10.g. | (Step 10.f RNO 1)c) GO TO The operator proceeds to Step lOg. step 10.g. | ||
2010 Systems Control Room JPM D | 2010 Systems Control Room JPM D NUREG 1021, Revision 9 | ||
NUREG 1021, Revision 9 | |||
Appendix C Page 8 of 10 Form ES-C-I PERFORMANCE INFORMATION STEPS ELEMENTS STANDARD S/U COMMENTS REQUIRED FOR UNSAT 8 (Step lOg) Check NS The operator observes the pumps ON. | Appendix C Page 8 of 10 Form ES-C-I PERFORMANCE INFORMATION STEPS ELEMENTS STANDARD S/U COMMENTS REQUIRED FOR UNSAT 8 (Step lOg) Check NS The operator observes the pumps ON. | ||
Green status lights LIT for each NS pump, and proceeds to RNO. | Green status lights LIT for each NS pump, and proceeds to RNO. | ||
*9 (Step 10.g RNO 1) IF both trains aligned to the FWST, THEN perform the following: The operator recognizes that the I B NS Pump is the (Step 1 0.g RNO 1)a) Start only pump with a suction pump(s) with available and discharge flowpath and suction and discharge starts ONLY the 1 B NS flowpaths. Pump by pressing the START pushbutton. | *9 (Step 10.g RNO 1) IF both trains aligned to the FWST, THEN perform the following: The operator recognizes that the I B NS Pump is the (Step 1 0.g RNO 1)a) Start only pump with a suction pump(s) with available and discharge flowpath and suction and discharge starts ONLY the 1 B NS flowpaths. Pump by pressing the START pushbutton. | ||
Line 923: | Line 860: | ||
- NUREG 1021, Revision 9 | - NUREG 1021, Revision 9 | ||
Appendix C Page 9 of 10 Form ES-C-i VERIFICATION OF COMPLETION Job Performance Measure No.: 2010 Systems Control Room JPM D | Appendix C Page 9 of 10 Form ES-C-i VERIFICATION OF COMPLETION Job Performance Measure No.: 2010 Systems Control Room JPM D Examinees Name: | ||
Examinees Name: | |||
Date Performed: | Date Performed: | ||
Facility Evaluator: | Facility Evaluator: | ||
Line 932: | Line 867: | ||
Question Documentation: | Question Documentation: | ||
Result: SAT UNSAT Examiners Signature: Date: | Result: SAT UNSAT Examiners Signature: Date: | ||
2010 Systems Control Room JPM D | 2010 Systems Control Room JPM D NUREG 1021, Revision 9 | ||
NUREG 1021, Revision 9 | |||
Appendix C Form ES-C-i JPM CUE SHEET INITIAL CONDITIONS: With Unit I at 100% power a Reactor Trip occurs. | Appendix C Form ES-C-i JPM CUE SHEET INITIAL CONDITIONS: With Unit I at 100% power a Reactor Trip occurs. | ||
Line 974: | Line 907: | ||
* Ensure Group 1 Phase A valves are dark. | * Ensure Group 1 Phase A valves are dark. | ||
NOTE OAC driven summary lights in Group 4 will not work. Only valves with individual windows need to be checked in next step. | NOTE OAC driven summary lights in Group 4 will not work. Only valves with individual windows need to be checked in next step. | ||
. Ensure Group 4 Phase A valves are lit. | . Ensure Group 4 Phase A valves are lit. | ||
: 3) Ensure Phase A valves in EPI1 IAI5000IG-1 (Generic Enclosures), Enclosure 11 (Phase A Valve Checklist) are closed. | : 3) Ensure Phase A valves in EPI1 IAI5000IG-1 (Generic Enclosures), Enclosure 11 (Phase A Valve Checklist) are closed. | ||
Line 1,010: | Line 942: | ||
. Check iNS-lB (lB NS Pump Suction From Cont Sump lsol) CLOSED | . Check iNS-lB (lB NS Pump Suction From Cont Sump lsol) CLOSED | ||
- 2) if NS pump suction has been aligned in EPI1!A15000/ES-1.3 | - 2) if NS pump suction has been aligned in EPI1!A15000/ES-1.3 | ||
. Check 1NS-3B (lB NS Pump Suction (Transfer To Cold Leg Recirc), | . Check 1NS-3B (lB NS Pump Suction (Transfer To Cold Leg Recirc), | ||
From FWST Isol) OPEN. | From FWST Isol) OPEN. | ||
Line 1,018: | Line 949: | ||
CLOSED. | CLOSED. | ||
(2) INS-18A (IA NS Pump Suction From Cont Sump Isol) OPEN. | (2) INS-18A (IA NS Pump Suction From Cont Sump Isol) OPEN. | ||
(3) IRN-134A (A NS Hx Inlet Isol) OPEN. | (3) IRN-134A (A NS Hx Inlet Isol) OPEN. | ||
(4) IRN-137A (A NS Hx Outlet Isol) THROTTLED TO 3600 GPM. | |||
(4) IRN-137A (A NS Hx Outlet Isol) THROTTLED TO | |||
3600 GPM. | |||
b) i lNl-184B (lB ND Pump Suction From Cont Sump lsol) is open, THEN ensure the following: | b) i lNl-184B (lB ND Pump Suction From Cont Sump lsol) is open, THEN ensure the following: | ||
(1) 1NS-3B (lB NS Pump Suction From FWST Isol) - | (1) 1NS-3B (lB NS Pump Suction From FWST Isol) - | ||
CLOSED. | CLOSED. | ||
(2) iNS-lB (lB NS Pump Suction From Cont Sump Isol) OPEN. | (2) iNS-lB (lB NS Pump Suction From Cont Sump Isol) OPEN. | ||
(3) 1RN-235B (B NS HX Inlet Isol) OPEN. | (3) 1RN-235B (B NS HX Inlet Isol) OPEN. | ||
(4) 1 RN-238B (B NS Hx Outlet Isol) THROTTLED TO 3600 GPM. | |||
(4) 1 RN-238B (B NS Hx Outlet Isol) THROTTLED TO | |||
3600 GPM. | |||
MNS RESPONSE TO HIGH CONTAINMENT PRESSURE PAGE NO. | MNS RESPONSE TO HIGH CONTAINMENT PRESSURE PAGE NO. | ||
Line 1,041: | Line 964: | ||
: f. Check the following NS pump discharge f. Perform the following: | : f. Check the following NS pump discharge f. Perform the following: | ||
valves OPEN: | valves OPEN: | ||
: 1) if both NS trains aligned to FWST, | : 1) if both NS trains aligned to FWST, | ||
. I NS-32A (IA NS Hx Outlet Cont THEN perform the following: | . I NS-32A (IA NS Hx Outlet Cont THEN perform the following: | ||
Line 1,076: | Line 998: | ||
- depressurized, THEN isolate any faulted UP S!G(s) ER Enclosure 5 (Faulted SIG Isolation). | - depressurized, THEN isolate any faulted UP S!G(s) ER Enclosure 5 (Faulted SIG Isolation). | ||
. All S/Gs PRESSURIZED. | . All S/Gs PRESSURIZED. | ||
Appendix C Job Performance Measure Form ESC-1 Worksheet SIM JPM E 2010 Systems Control Room JPM E | Appendix C Job Performance Measure Form ESC-1 Worksheet SIM JPM E 2010 Systems Control Room JPM E | ||
Line 1,085: | Line 1,006: | ||
==Title:== | ==Title:== | ||
Separate from the Electrical Grid JPM No.: 2010 Systems Control | Separate from the Electrical Grid JPM No.: 2010 Systems Control due to Low Grid Frequency Room JPM E (Alternate Path) | ||
due to Low Grid Frequency Room JPM E (Alternate Path) | |||
K/A | K/A | ||
Line 1,175: | Line 1,094: | ||
*15 (Step 15.j) Do not continue The operator lowers load until the following conditions until Channel 2 Turbine are met: Impulse Pressure (1SMP-5220) is less than 340 psig, | *15 (Step 15.j) Do not continue The operator lowers load until the following conditions until Channel 2 Turbine are met: Impulse Pressure (1SMP-5220) is less than 340 psig, | ||
. TURB IMP PRESS CH AND the Power Range 2 LESS THAN 340 Meters indicate less than PSIG 60%. | . TURB IMP PRESS CH AND the Power Range 2 LESS THAN 340 Meters indicate less than PSIG 60%. | ||
. P/R meters LESS | . P/R meters LESS THAN 60%. | ||
THAN 60%. | |||
*16 (Step 15k) Notify Unit 2 The operator notifies the Operator that Unit 1 is Unit 2 RO that Unit I is separating from the Grid, ready to be separated from the Grid. | *16 (Step 15k) Notify Unit 2 The operator notifies the Operator that Unit 1 is Unit 2 RO that Unit I is separating from the Grid, ready to be separated from the Grid. | ||
Cue: | Cue: | ||
Line 1,196: | Line 1,113: | ||
- NUREG 1021, Revision 9 | - NUREG 1021, Revision 9 | ||
Appendix C Page 10 of 1 1 Form ES-C-I VERIFICATION OF COMPLETION Job Performance Measure No.: 2010 Systems Control Room JPM E | Appendix C Page 10 of 1 1 Form ES-C-I VERIFICATION OF COMPLETION Job Performance Measure No.: 2010 Systems Control Room JPM E Examinees Name: | ||
Examinees Name: | |||
Date Performed: | Date Performed: | ||
Facility Evaluator: | Facility Evaluator: | ||
Line 1,226: | Line 1,141: | ||
/3. Notify Unit 2 to evaluate implementing API2!A!5500105 (Generator Voltage and Electric Grid Disturbances). | /3. Notify Unit 2 to evaluate implementing API2!A!5500105 (Generator Voltage and Electric Grid Disturbances). | ||
Check Unit I Generator TIED TO GRID. | Check Unit I Generator TIED TO GRID. | ||
TQ Step 20. | TQ Step 20. | ||
: 5. IFAT TIME reactor power is greater than 100%, THEN reduce turbine load to maintain reactor power less than 100%. | : 5. IFAT TIME reactor power is greater than 100%, THEN reduce turbine load to maintain reactor power less than 100%. | ||
Line 1,238: | Line 1,152: | ||
24 Ky. | 24 Ky. | ||
: 1) Monitor Generator Capability Curve PER Enclosure I (Generator Capability Curve 24 Ky). | : 1) Monitor Generator Capability Curve PER Enclosure I (Generator Capability Curve 24 Ky). | ||
_2) GOIQStep8. | _2) GOIQStep8. | ||
: b. Check OAC - IN SERVICE. b. Perform the following: | : b. Check OAC - IN SERVICE. b. Perform the following: | ||
: 1) Monitor Generator Capability Curve PER Enclosure 2 (Generator Capability Curve 22.8 Ky). | : 1) Monitor Generator Capability Curve PER Enclosure 2 (Generator Capability Curve 22.8 Ky). | ||
_2) GOIQStep8. | _2) GOIQStep8. | ||
: c. Monitor Generator Capability Curve PER OAC turn on code GENCAP. | : c. Monitor Generator Capability Curve PER OAC turn on code GENCAP. | ||
Line 1,298: | Line 1,210: | ||
: j. Do not continue until the following conditions are met: | : j. Do not continue until the following conditions are met: | ||
TURB IMP PRESS CH 2- LESS THAN 340 PSIG P/R meters LESS THAN 60%. | TURB IMP PRESS CH 2- LESS THAN 340 PSIG P/R meters LESS THAN 60%. | ||
: k. Notify Unit 2 Operator that Unit I is separating from the Grid. | : k. Notify Unit 2 Operator that Unit I is separating from the Grid. | ||
I. Open the following Switchyard PCBs: | I. Open the following Switchyard PCBs: | ||
Line 1,314: | Line 1,225: | ||
==Title:== | ==Title:== | ||
Restore Repaired Power Range JPM No.: 2010 Systems Control | Restore Repaired Power Range JPM No.: 2010 Systems Control Channel to Service Room JPM F K/A | ||
Channel to Service Room JPM F K/A | |||
==Reference:== | ==Reference:== | ||
Line 1,351: | Line 1,260: | ||
: 1. Reset to IC-246 (April, 2010). | : 1. Reset to IC-246 (April, 2010). | ||
: 2. Place Simulator in Run and acknowledge alarms/Reset SLIMS. | : 2. Place Simulator in Run and acknowledge alarms/Reset SLIMS. | ||
2010 Systems Control Room JPM F | 2010 Systems Control Room JPM F NUREG 1021, Revision 9 | ||
NUREG 1021, Revision 9 | |||
Appendix C Page 5 of 9 Form ES-C-i PERFORMANCE INFORMATION (Denote Critical Steps with an asterisk*) | Appendix C Page 5 of 9 Form ES-C-i PERFORMANCE INFORMATION (Denote Critical Steps with an asterisk*) | ||
Line 1,368: | Line 1,275: | ||
- NUREG 1021, Revision 9 | - NUREG 1021, Revision 9 | ||
Appendix C Page 6 of 9 Form ES-C-i PERFORMANCE INFORMATION STEPS ELEMENTS STANDARD S/U COMMENTS REQUIRED FOR UNSAT 4 (Step 21.d) Check reactor The operator observes power GREATER THAN | Appendix C Page 6 of 9 Form ES-C-i PERFORMANCE INFORMATION STEPS ELEMENTS STANDARD S/U COMMENTS REQUIRED FOR UNSAT 4 (Step 21.d) Check reactor The operator observes power GREATER THAN other Power Range 25% Channels and determines that the plant is at 100% | ||
other Power Range 25% Channels and determines that the plant is at 100% | |||
power. | power. | ||
(Step 21 .e) Check the The operator observes that following bistable LIT: | (Step 21 .e) Check the The operator observes that following bistable LIT: | ||
the PIR HI FLUX LO STPT Bistable light is LIT (1 Sl2-PIR HI FLUX LO STPT C12). | the PIR HI FLUX LO STPT Bistable light is LIT (1 Sl2-PIR HI FLUX LO STPT C12). | ||
(1SI-2). | (1SI-2). | ||
6 (Step 21 .f) Check the The operator observes that following bistables DARK: | 6 (Step 21 .f) Check the The operator observes that following bistables DARK: | ||
the PIR HI FLUX HI STPT Bistable light is DARK FIR HI FLUX HI STPT (1SI2-C13). | the PIR HI FLUX HI STPT Bistable light is DARK FIR HI FLUX HI STPT (1SI2-C13). | ||
(1 SI-2) | (1 SI-2) | ||
,, The operator observes that | ,, The operator observes that PIR HI FLUX RATE (1S1 the PIR HI FLUX HI RATE | ||
PIR HI FLUX RATE (1S1 the PIR HI FLUX HI RATE | |||
: 3) Bistable light is DARK (1S13-C1). | : 3) Bistable light is DARK (1S13-C1). | ||
*7 (Step 21 .g) Place At Comparator and Rate COMPARATOR Drawer, The operator CHANNEL DEFEAT switch places the COMPARATOR to NORMAL. CHANNEL DEFEAT switch to NORMAL. | *7 (Step 21 .g) Place At Comparator and Rate COMPARATOR Drawer, The operator CHANNEL DEFEAT switch places the COMPARATOR to NORMAL. CHANNEL DEFEAT switch to NORMAL. | ||
The operator observes the Comparator Defeat light extinguishes. | The operator observes the Comparator Defeat light extinguishes. | ||
*8 (Step 21 .h) Place POWER At Detector Current MISMATCH BYPASS Comparator Drawer, The switch to OPERATE. operator places the POWER MISMATCH BYPASS switch to OPERATE. | *8 (Step 21 .h) Place POWER At Detector Current MISMATCH BYPASS Comparator Drawer, The switch to OPERATE. operator places the POWER MISMATCH BYPASS switch to OPERATE. | ||
2010 Systems Control Room JPM F | 2010 Systems Control Room JPM F NUREG 1021, Revision 9 | ||
NUREG 1021, Revision 9 | |||
Appendix C Page 7 of 9 Form ES-C-i PERFORMANCE INFORMATION STEPS ELEMENTS STANDARD S/U COMMENTS REQUIRED FOR UNSAT | Appendix C Page 7 of 9 Form ES-C-i PERFORMANCE INFORMATION STEPS ELEMENTS STANDARD S/U COMMENTS REQUIRED FOR UNSAT | ||
Line 1,405: | Line 1,304: | ||
* OTDT Terminating Cue: Evaluation on this JPM is complete. | * OTDT Terminating Cue: Evaluation on this JPM is complete. | ||
STOP TIME: | STOP TIME: | ||
2010 Systems Control Room JPM F | 2010 Systems Control Room JPM F NUREG 1021, Revision 9 | ||
NUREG 1021, Revision 9 | |||
Appendix C Page 8 of 9 Form ES-C-i VERIFICATION OF COMPLETION Job Performance Measure No.: 2010 Systems Control Room JPM F | Appendix C Page 8 of 9 Form ES-C-i VERIFICATION OF COMPLETION Job Performance Measure No.: 2010 Systems Control Room JPM F Examinees Name: | ||
Examinees Name: | |||
Date Performed: | Date Performed: | ||
Facility Evaluator: | Facility Evaluator: | ||
Line 1,454: | Line 1,349: | ||
: b. REFER JQ. RPIOIAI5700IO1O (NRC Immediate Notification Requirements). | : b. REFER JQ. RPIOIAI5700IO1O (NRC Immediate Notification Requirements). | ||
: c. Ensure the following interlocks are in their required state for existing plant conditions: | : c. Ensure the following interlocks are in their required state for existing plant conditions: | ||
. P-7 Lo Power Rx Trips Blocked | . P-7 Lo Power Rx Trips Blocked | ||
* P-8 Hi Pwr La Flo Rx Trip Blocked | * P-8 Hi Pwr La Flo Rx Trip Blocked | ||
Line 1,475: | Line 1,369: | ||
a/a. Place the UPPER SECTION switch to the failed channel position. | a/a. Place the UPPER SECTION switch to the failed channel position. | ||
Check the CHANNEL DEFEAT light for the upper section LIT. | Check the CHANNEL DEFEAT light for the upper section LIT. | ||
/c. Place the LOWER SECTION switch to the failed channel position. | /c. Place the LOWER SECTION switch to the failed channel position. | ||
/ | / | ||
/ d. Check the CHANNEL DEFEAT light for the lower section LIT. | / d. Check the CHANNEL DEFEAT light for the lower section LIT. | ||
: 9. Perform the following actions at the Notify IAE. | : 9. Perform the following actions at the Notify IAE. | ||
COMPARATOR AND RATE drawer: | COMPARATOR AND RATE drawer: | ||
Line 1,485: | Line 1,377: | ||
/ | / | ||
/ b. Check the COMPARATOR DEFEAT light LIT. | / b. Check the COMPARATOR DEFEAT light LIT. | ||
NOTE Removing fuses from power range drawers may cause associated NIS annunciators to alarm. | NOTE Removing fuses from power range drawers may cause associated NIS annunciators to alarm. | ||
: 10. Trip bistables of failed channel as follows: | : 10. Trip bistables of failed channel as follows: | ||
Line 1,505: | Line 1,396: | ||
: 13. Check the following status lights on Perform the following: | : 13. Check the following status lights on Perform the following: | ||
ISI-18 LIT: | ISI-18 LIT: | ||
/ a. Check P/R HI FLUX LO STPT ALERT V. P/R LO SETPOINT TRAIN A TRIP alarm (IAD-2, A-2) LIT. | / a. Check P/R HI FLUX LO STPT ALERT V. P/R LO SETPOINT TRAIN A TRIP alarm (IAD-2, A-2) LIT. | ||
BLOCKED V | BLOCKED V | ||
/* PIR LO SETPOINT TRAIN B TRIP | /* PIR LO SETPOINT TRAIN B TRIP | ||
Line 1,527: | Line 1,416: | ||
: 20. ffiA]Jf TIME IAE completes Step 18, Notify IAE. | : 20. ffiA]Jf TIME IAE completes Step 18, Notify IAE. | ||
THEN check the following status lights for affected P!R LIT: | THEN check the following status lights for affected P!R LIT: | ||
* ForP/RN-41: | * ForP/RN-41: | ||
* NC LOOP A OPDT RX TRIP (1 Sl-7) | * NC LOOP A OPDT RX TRIP (1 Sl-7) | ||
Line 1,598: | Line 1,486: | ||
==Title:== | ==Title:== | ||
Isolate the Circulating Water System JPM No.: 2010 Systems Control | Isolate the Circulating Water System JPM No.: 2010 Systems Control During Turbine Building Flooding Room JPM G K/A | ||
During Turbine Building Flooding Room JPM G K/A | |||
==Reference:== | ==Reference:== | ||
Line 1,621: | Line 1,507: | ||
EP/1 /A15000/ES-0. 1 (Reactor Trip Response) | EP/1 /A15000/ES-0. 1 (Reactor Trip Response) | ||
Handouts: Enclosure 1 (Unit 1 Turbine Bldg Flooding) of AP/0/A/5500/44 (Plant Flooding) marked upfor place-keeping through Step 6.c RNO c.2. | Handouts: Enclosure 1 (Unit 1 Turbine Bldg Flooding) of AP/0/A/5500/44 (Plant Flooding) marked upfor place-keeping through Step 6.c RNO c.2. | ||
2010 Systems Control Room JPM G | 2010 Systems Control Room JPM G NUREG 1021, Revision 9 | ||
NUREG 1021, Revision 9 | |||
Appendix C Page 3 of 14 Form ES-C-i Job Performance Measure Worksheet Initiating Cue: The CRS has directed you to isolate the RC System by continuing with Enclosure I (Unit I Turbine Bldg Flooding) of AP/O/A15500/44 (Plant Flooding), step 6.d, and completing all Step 6 substeps, while the crew continues with EPI1IAJ5000/E-O (Reactor Trip and/or Safety Injection). | Appendix C Page 3 of 14 Form ES-C-i Job Performance Measure Worksheet Initiating Cue: The CRS has directed you to isolate the RC System by continuing with Enclosure I (Unit I Turbine Bldg Flooding) of AP/O/A15500/44 (Plant Flooding), step 6.d, and completing all Step 6 substeps, while the crew continues with EPI1IAJ5000/E-O (Reactor Trip and/or Safety Injection). | ||
This is a Time Critical JPM Time Critical Task: YES 40 minutes. | This is a Time Critical JPM Time Critical Task: YES 40 minutes. | ||
Validation Time: 15 minutes 2010 Systems Control Room JPM G | Validation Time: 15 minutes 2010 Systems Control Room JPM G NUREG 1021, Revision 9 | ||
NUREG 1021, Revision 9 | |||
Appendix C Page 4 of 14 Form ES-C-i Job Performance Measure Worksheet SIMULATOR OPERATIONAL GUIDELINES | Appendix C Page 4 of 14 Form ES-C-i Job Performance Measure Worksheet SIMULATOR OPERATIONAL GUIDELINES | ||
Line 1,657: | Line 1,539: | ||
. lCRCpump 1CRCPumpSTOP pushbutton and observes the Green status light LIT, and Red status light OFF (Amps indicate 0). | . lCRCpump 1CRCPumpSTOP pushbutton and observes the Green status light LIT, and Red status light OFF (Amps indicate 0). | ||
. 1 D RC pump The operator depresses the ID RC Pump STOP pushbutton and observes the Green status light LIT, and Red status light OFF (Amps indicate 0). | . 1 D RC pump The operator depresses the ID RC Pump STOP pushbutton and observes the Green status light LIT, and Red status light OFF (Amps indicate 0). | ||
2010 Systems Control Room JPM G | 2010 Systems Control Room JPM G NUREG 1021, Revision 9 | ||
NUREG 1021, Revision 9 | |||
Appendix C Page 6 of 14 Form ES-C-i PERFORMANCE INFORMATION STEPS ELEMENTS STANDARD S/U COMMENTS REQUIRED FOR UNSAT | Appendix C Page 6 of 14 Form ES-C-i PERFORMANCE INFORMATION STEPS ELEMENTS STANDARD S/U COMMENTS REQUIRED FOR UNSAT | ||
Line 1,671: | Line 1,551: | ||
* 1 RC-12 (1 B2 Main The operator depresses the Condenser Waterbox 1RC-12 CLOSE pushbutton Inlet Iso!) and observes the Green status light LIT, and Red status light OFF. | * 1 RC-12 (1 B2 Main The operator depresses the Condenser Waterbox 1RC-12 CLOSE pushbutton Inlet Iso!) and observes the Green status light LIT, and Red status light OFF. | ||
* 1RC-13 (IC1 Main The operator depresses the Condenser Waterbox 1RC-i3 CLOSE pushbutton In let Iso!) and observes the Green status light LIT, and Red Continued status light OFF. | * 1RC-13 (IC1 Main The operator depresses the Condenser Waterbox 1RC-i3 CLOSE pushbutton In let Iso!) and observes the Green status light LIT, and Red Continued status light OFF. | ||
NEXT PAGE 2010 Systems Control Room JPM G | NEXT PAGE 2010 Systems Control Room JPM G NUREG 1021, Revision 9 | ||
NUREG 1021, Revision 9 | |||
Appendix C Page 7 of 14 Form ES-C-i PERFORMANCE INFORMATION STEPS ELEMENTS STANDARD S/U COMMENTS REQUIRED FOR UNSAT | Appendix C Page 7 of 14 Form ES-C-i PERFORMANCE INFORMATION STEPS ELEMENTS STANDARD S/U COMMENTS REQUIRED FOR UNSAT | ||
Line 1,681: | Line 1,559: | ||
discharge valve indications are on Unit I OAC (RC graphic). | discharge valve indications are on Unit I OAC (RC graphic). | ||
5 (Step 6.g) Check 1 RC-22 The operator observes the (Ui RC Crossover To U2 OAC (RC Graphic) 1RC-22 RC Disch Isol) OPEN. | 5 (Step 6.g) Check 1 RC-22 The operator observes the (Ui RC Crossover To U2 OAC (RC Graphic) 1RC-22 RC Disch Isol) OPEN. | ||
is RED. | is RED. | ||
Examiner Cue: | Examiner Cue: | ||
Line 1,689: | Line 1,566: | ||
Afterwards, Call as NEO, and report that the breaker for I RC-21 has been closed. | Afterwards, Call as NEO, and report that the breaker for I RC-21 has been closed. | ||
6 (Step 6.h) Check 1 RC-7 The operator observes the (Ui RC Crossover To U2 1RC7 Red status light LIT, RC Supply Isol) OPEN. | 6 (Step 6.h) Check 1 RC-7 The operator observes the (Ui RC Crossover To U2 1RC7 Red status light LIT, RC Supply Isol) OPEN. | ||
and Green status light OFF. | and Green status light OFF. | ||
*7 (Step 6.i) Press close The operator depresses the pushbutton for 1RC-5 (Ui 1RC-5 CLOSE pushbutton RC Crossover Supply Iso). and observes the Green status light LIT, and Red status light OFF. | *7 (Step 6.i) Press close The operator depresses the pushbutton for 1RC-5 (Ui 1RC-5 CLOSE pushbutton RC Crossover Supply Iso). and observes the Green status light LIT, and Red status light OFF. | ||
2010 Systems Control Room JPM G | 2010 Systems Control Room JPM G NUREG 1021, Revision 9 | ||
NUREG 1021, Revision 9 | |||
Appendix C Page 8 of 14 Form ES-C-i PERFORMANCE INFORMATION STEPS ELEMENTS STANDARD S/U COMMENTS REQUIRED FOR UNSAT | Appendix C Page 8 of 14 Form ES-C-i PERFORMANCE INFORMATION STEPS ELEMENTS STANDARD S/U COMMENTS REQUIRED FOR UNSAT | ||
Line 1,709: | Line 1,583: | ||
11 (Note prior to Step 6.m) The operator reads the Waterbox isolation valves Note and proceeds. | 11 (Note prior to Step 6.m) The operator reads the Waterbox isolation valves Note and proceeds. | ||
take 1-2 minutes to close. | take 1-2 minutes to close. | ||
2010 Systems Control Room JPM G | 2010 Systems Control Room JPM G NUREG 1021, Revision 9 | ||
NUREG 1021, Revision 9 | |||
Appendix C Page 9 of 14 Form ES-C-i PERFORMANCE INFORMATION STEPS ELEMENTS STANDARD S/U COMMENTS REQUIRED FOR UNSAT | Appendix C Page 9 of 14 Form ES-C-i PERFORMANCE INFORMATION STEPS ELEMENTS STANDARD S/U COMMENTS REQUIRED FOR UNSAT | ||
Line 1,722: | Line 1,594: | ||
* WHEN 1RC-i4is closed, THEN close 1RC-20 (1C2 Main Condenser Waterbox Outlet Isol). | * WHEN 1RC-i4is closed, THEN close 1RC-20 (1C2 Main Condenser Waterbox Outlet Isol). | ||
13 (Step 6.n) Check 1RC-5 The operator observes the (Ui RC Crossover Supply I RC-5 Green status light Isol) CLOSED. | 13 (Step 6.n) Check 1RC-5 The operator observes the (Ui RC Crossover Supply I RC-5 Green status light Isol) CLOSED. | ||
LIT, and Red status light OFF. | LIT, and Red status light OFF. | ||
14 (Step 6.0) Check 1RC-21 The operator observes the (Ui RC Crossover Disch 1RC-2i Green status light Isol) CLOSED. | 14 (Step 6.0) Check 1RC-21 The operator observes the (Ui RC Crossover Disch 1RC-2i Green status light Isol) CLOSED. | ||
LIT, and Red status light OFF. | LIT, and Red status light OFF. | ||
2010 Systems Control Room JPM G | 2010 Systems Control Room JPM G | ||
Line 1,738: | Line 1,608: | ||
Close 1RL-15 (lB LT Cooler Inlet Isol) (Unit I turbine bldg, 739+5 1G-33 | Close 1RL-15 (lB LT Cooler Inlet Isol) (Unit I turbine bldg, 739+5 1G-33 | ||
& 1 FF-33, bottom of stairway). | & 1 FF-33, bottom of stairway). | ||
17 (Step 6.r) Check The operator contacts the Unwatering pump OUT OF | 17 (Step 6.r) Check The operator contacts the Unwatering pump OUT OF NEO (or WCC) in the Unit 1 SERVICE. Turbine Building. | ||
NEO (or WCC) in the Unit 1 SERVICE. Turbine Building. | |||
Booth CUE: | Booth CUE: | ||
As NEO (0rWCCS) in UI TB, the Unwatering Pump is NOT in service. | As NEO (0rWCCS) in UI TB, the Unwatering Pump is NOT in service. | ||
18 (Note prior to Step 6.s) RC The operator reads the pump discharge valve Note and proceeds. | 18 (Note prior to Step 6.s) RC The operator reads the pump discharge valve Note and proceeds. | ||
indications are on RCPMPS graphic. These valves should automatically close when their respective RC pump is stopped. | indications are on RCPMPS graphic. These valves should automatically close when their respective RC pump is stopped. | ||
2010 Systems Control Room JPM G | 2010 Systems Control Room JPM G NUREG 1021, Revision 9 | ||
NUREG 1021, Revision 9 | |||
Appendix C Page 11 of 14 Form ES-C-I PERFORMANCE INFORMATION STEPS ELEMENTS STANDARD S/U COMMENTS REQUIRED FOR UNSAT 19 (Step 6.s) Check the following RC Inlet valves - | Appendix C Page 11 of 14 Form ES-C-I PERFORMANCE INFORMATION STEPS ELEMENTS STANDARD S/U COMMENTS REQUIRED FOR UNSAT 19 (Step 6.s) Check the following RC Inlet valves - | ||
Line 1,759: | Line 1,625: | ||
20 (Note prior to Step 6.t) The operator reads the Discharge gates can take Note and proceeds. | 20 (Note prior to Step 6.t) The operator reads the Discharge gates can take Note and proceeds. | ||
up to 1 1 minutes to close from time recorded in Step 6.1. | up to 1 1 minutes to close from time recorded in Step 6.1. | ||
2010 Systems Control Room JPM G | 2010 Systems Control Room JPM G NUREG 1021, Revision 9 | ||
NUREG 1021, Revision 9 | |||
Appendix C Page 12 of 14 Form ES-C-i PERFORMANCE INFORMATION STEPS ELEMENTS STANDARD S/U COMMENTS REQUIRED FOR UNSAT 21 (Step 6.t) Check the following RC discharge gates on Unit 1 CLOSED: | Appendix C Page 12 of 14 Form ES-C-i PERFORMANCE INFORMATION STEPS ELEMENTS STANDARD S/U COMMENTS REQUIRED FOR UNSAT 21 (Step 6.t) Check the following RC discharge gates on Unit 1 CLOSED: | ||
. 1RC-79 (IA Main The operator observes the Condenser Discharge I RC-79 Green and Red Gate) status light LIT. | . 1RC-79 (IA Main The operator observes the Condenser Discharge I RC-79 Green and Red Gate) status light LIT. | ||
. I RC-80 (1 B Main The operator observes the Condenser Discharge 1RC-80 Green and Red Gate) status light LIT. | . I RC-80 (1 B Main The operator observes the Condenser Discharge 1RC-80 Green and Red Gate) status light LIT. | ||
Line 1,774: | Line 1,637: | ||
Terminating Cue: Evaluation on this JPM is complete. | Terminating Cue: Evaluation on this JPM is complete. | ||
STOP TIME: | STOP TIME: | ||
2010 Systems Control Room JPM G | 2010 Systems Control Room JPM G NUREG 1021, Revision 9 | ||
NUREG 1021, Revision 9 | |||
Appendix C Page 13 of 14 Form ES-C-I VERIFICATION OF COMPLETION Job Performance Measure No.: 2010 Systems Control Room JPM G | Appendix C Page 13 of 14 Form ES-C-I VERIFICATION OF COMPLETION Job Performance Measure No.: 2010 Systems Control Room JPM G Examinees Name: | ||
Examinees Name: | |||
Date Performed: | Date Performed: | ||
Facility Evaluator: | Facility Evaluator: | ||
Line 1,787: | Line 1,646: | ||
Question Documentation: | Question Documentation: | ||
Result: SAT UNSAT Examiners Signature: Date: | Result: SAT UNSAT Examiners Signature: Date: | ||
2010 Systems Control Room JPM G | 2010 Systems Control Room JPM G NUREG 1021, Revision 9 | ||
NUREG 1021, Revision 9 | |||
Appendix C Form ES-C-i JPM CUE SHEET INITIAL CONDITIONS: With Unit I at 100% power, massive RC System Flooding occurred in the Unit I Turbine Building. | Appendix C Form ES-C-i JPM CUE SHEET INITIAL CONDITIONS: With Unit I at 100% power, massive RC System Flooding occurred in the Unit I Turbine Building. | ||
Line 1,801: | Line 1,658: | ||
MNS PLANT FLOODING PAGE NO. | MNS PLANT FLOODING PAGE NO. | ||
AP/01A15500144 5 of 293 Enclosure 1 Page 1 of 17 | AP/01A15500144 5 of 293 Enclosure 1 Page 1 of 17 UNIT 0 Unit I Turbine Bldg Flooding Rev. 9 1 ACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSE RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED j/1. Announce occurrence over page. | ||
UNIT 0 Unit I Turbine Bldg Flooding Rev. 9 1 ACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSE RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED j/1. Announce occurrence over page. | |||
: 2. if PJ ANY TIME flooding has been reduced to a manageable leak, THEN GO TO Step 10. | : 2. if PJ ANY TIME flooding has been reduced to a manageable leak, THEN GO TO Step 10. | ||
Dispatch operator to locally monitor status of flood PER Enclosure 8 (Unit I Turbine Bldg Flood Monitoring). | Dispatch operator to locally monitor status of flood PER Enclosure 8 (Unit I Turbine Bldg Flood Monitoring). | ||
Line 1,817: | Line 1,672: | ||
r L | r L | ||
MNS AP101A15500144 PLANT FLOODING Enclosure 1 Page 2 of 17 | MNS AP101A15500144 PLANT FLOODING Enclosure 1 Page 2 of 17 PAGE NO. | ||
PAGE NO. | |||
6 of 293 Rev. 9 UNIT 0 Unit I Turbihe Bldg Flooding ACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSE RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED | 6 of 293 Rev. 9 UNIT 0 Unit I Turbihe Bldg Flooding ACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSE RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED | ||
: 5. To isolate a single waterbox section, perform the following: | : 5. To isolate a single waterbox section, perform the following: | ||
Line 1,837: | Line 1,690: | ||
MNS PLANT FLOODING PAGE NO. | MNS PLANT FLOODING PAGE NO. | ||
AP101A15500144 of 293 Enclosure 1 Page 3 of 17 | AP101A15500144 of 293 Enclosure 1 Page 3 of 17 Rev. 9 UNIT 0 Unit I Turbine Bldg Flooding ACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSE RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED 1 | ||
Rev. 9 UNIT 0 Unit I Turbine Bldg Flooding ACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSE RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED 1 | |||
: 5. (Continued) | : 5. (Continued) | ||
: 4) For 1 B2 waterbox: 4) IF either waterbox isolation valve fails to close, THEN QQ[QStep 6. | : 4) For 1 B2 waterbox: 4) IF either waterbox isolation valve fails to close, THEN QQ[QStep 6. | ||
Line 1,853: | Line 1,703: | ||
: c. Reduce turbine load as necessary to maintain T-Avg at T-Ref. | : c. Reduce turbine load as necessary to maintain T-Avg at T-Ref. | ||
: d. Check flooding REDUCED TO A | : d. Check flooding REDUCED TO A | ||
: d. Perform the following: | : d. Perform the following: | ||
MANAGEABLE LEAK. | MANAGEABLE LEAK. | ||
Line 1,861: | Line 1,710: | ||
MNS PLANT FLOODING PAGE NO. | MNS PLANT FLOODING PAGE NO. | ||
APIOIAI5500/44 8 of 293 Enclosure 1 Page 4 of 17 Rev. 9 | APIOIAI5500/44 8 of 293 Enclosure 1 Page 4 of 17 Rev. 9 UNIT 0 Unit I Turbine Bldg Flooding ACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSE RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED | ||
UNIT 0 Unit I Turbine Bldg Flooding ACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSE RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED | |||
: 6. To isolate for massive RC system flooding in Unit I Turbine Building, perform the following: | : 6. To isolate for massive RC system flooding in Unit I Turbine Building, perform the following: | ||
/a. Check Enclosure 10 (Flood Doors) - a. Dispatch operator to check flood doors HAS BEEN IMPLEMENTED. closed PER Enclosure 10 (Flood Doors). | /a. Check Enclosure 10 (Flood Doors) - a. Dispatch operator to check flood doors HAS BEEN IMPLEMENTED. closed PER Enclosure 10 (Flood Doors). | ||
Q Dispatch operator to remove white tag and close 1 MXA R8C (RC Crossover | Q Dispatch operator to remove white tag and close 1 MXA R8C (RC Crossover Disch Isol Motor (1RC-21)) (Unit 1 TB basement, at 1 B2 Feedwater Heater). | ||
Disch Isol Motor (1RC-21)) (Unit 1 TB basement, at 1 B2 Feedwater Heater). | |||
Vc. Check Unit 1 reactor TRIPPED. | Vc. Check Unit 1 reactor TRIPPED. | ||
- c. Peorm the following: | - c. Peorm the following: | ||
Line 1,882: | Line 1,727: | ||
MNS PLANT FLOODING PAGE NO. | MNS PLANT FLOODING PAGE NO. | ||
AP101A15500144 9 of 293 Enclosure 1 Page 5 of 17 | AP101A15500144 9 of 293 Enclosure 1 Page 5 of 17 Rev. 9 UNIT 0 Unit I Turbine Bldg Flooding ACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSE RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED | ||
Rev. 9 UNIT 0 Unit I Turbine Bldg Flooding ACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSE RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED | |||
: 6. (Continued) | : 6. (Continued) | ||
: f. Press close pushbutton on the following valves: | : f. Press close pushbutton on the following valves: | ||
. 1RC-9 (1A1 Main Condenser Waterbox Inlet Isol) | . 1RC-9 (1A1 Main Condenser Waterbox Inlet Isol) | ||
. 1RC-1O (1A2 Main Condenser Waterbox Inlet Iso!) | . 1RC-1O (1A2 Main Condenser Waterbox Inlet Iso!) | ||
. 1RC-11 (1B1 Main Condenser Waterbox Inlet Isol) | . 1RC-11 (1B1 Main Condenser Waterbox Inlet Isol) | ||
. 1RC-12 (1B2 Main Condenser Waterbox Inlet Iso!) | . 1RC-12 (1B2 Main Condenser Waterbox Inlet Iso!) | ||
. 1RC-13 (1C1 Main Condenser Waterbox Inlet Iso!) | . 1RC-13 (1C1 Main Condenser Waterbox Inlet Iso!) | ||
. 1RC-14 (1C2 Main Condenser Waterbox Inlet Isol). | . 1RC-14 (1C2 Main Condenser Waterbox Inlet Isol). | ||
Line 1,908: | Line 1,748: | ||
MNS PLANT FLOODING PAGE NO. | MNS PLANT FLOODING PAGE NO. | ||
AP/01A15500144 10 of 293 Enclosure 1 Page 6 of 17 Rev. 9 | AP/01A15500144 10 of 293 Enclosure 1 Page 6 of 17 Rev. 9 UNIT 0 Unit I Turbine Bldg Flooding ACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSE RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED 1 | ||
UNIT 0 Unit I Turbine Bldg Flooding ACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSE RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED 1 | |||
: 6. (Continued) | : 6. (Continued) | ||
: k. Press close pushbutton on the following Unit 1 RC discharge gates: | : k. Press close pushbutton on the following Unit 1 RC discharge gates: | ||
. 1RC-79 (1A Main Condenser Discharge Gate) | . 1RC-79 (1A Main Condenser Discharge Gate) | ||
. 1RC-80 (lB Main Condenser Discharge Gate) | . 1RC-80 (lB Main Condenser Discharge Gate) | ||
. 1RC-81 (1C Main Condenser Discharge Gate). | . 1RC-81 (1C Main Condenser Discharge Gate). | ||
I. Record time NOTE Waterbox isolation valves take 1-2 minutes to close. | I. Record time NOTE Waterbox isolation valves take 1-2 minutes to close. | ||
Line 1,927: | Line 1,764: | ||
MNS PLANT FLOODING PAGE NO. | MNS PLANT FLOODING PAGE NO. | ||
APIO/A15500144 11 of 293 Enclosure 1 Page 7 of 17 | APIO/A15500144 11 of 293 Enclosure 1 Page 7 of 17 Rev. 9 UNIT 0 Unit I Turbine Bldg Flooding ACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSE RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED | ||
Rev. 9 UNIT 0 Unit I Turbine Bldg Flooding ACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSE RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED | |||
: 6. (Continued) | : 6. (Continued) | ||
: n. Check 1RC-5 (Ui RC Crossover Supply n. Dispatch operator to close 1RC-5 (Ui lsol) CLOSED. | : n. Check 1RC-5 (Ui RC Crossover Supply n. Dispatch operator to close 1RC-5 (Ui lsol) CLOSED. | ||
RC Crossover Supply Isol) (Unit 1 turbine bldg, 737, 1C-25 & 1C-26, west of 1C2 waterbox inlet in pit). | RC Crossover Supply Isol) (Unit 1 turbine bldg, 737, 1C-25 & 1C-26, west of 1C2 waterbox inlet in pit). | ||
: o. Check 1RC-21 (Ui RC Crossover Disch o. Perform the following: | : o. Check 1RC-21 (Ui RC Crossover Disch o. Perform the following: | ||
Isol) CLOSED. | Isol) CLOSED. | ||
: 1) Contact security to provide access to Alarm Door 3230. | : 1) Contact security to provide access to Alarm Door 3230. | ||
: 2) Dispatch operator to unlock and close 1RC-21 (Ui RC Crossover Disch Iso!) (Unit 1 turbine bldg, 7391J-31, bunker between 1A2 and 1 C2 feedwater heaters). | : 2) Dispatch operator to unlock and close 1RC-21 (Ui RC Crossover Disch Iso!) (Unit 1 turbine bldg, 7391J-31, bunker between 1A2 and 1 C2 feedwater heaters). | ||
: p. Place 1 RL-1 8 (Unit 1 LT Coolers Control) in manual and close. | : p. Place 1 RL-1 8 (Unit 1 LT Coolers Control) in manual and close. | ||
: q. Dispatch operator to perform the following: | : q. Dispatch operator to perform the following: | ||
. Close 1RL-13 (1A LI Cooler Inlet Iso!) (Unit 1 turbine bldg, 760+/-10, 1 GG-33 & 1 F-33, north of MTOT room) | . Close 1RL-13 (1A LI Cooler Inlet Iso!) (Unit 1 turbine bldg, 760+/-10, 1 GG-33 & 1 F-33, north of MTOT room) | ||
. Close 1RL-15 (lB LT Cooler Inlet Iso!) (Unit 1 turbine bldg, 739+5 1G-33 & 1FF-33, bottom of stairway). | . Close 1RL-15 (lB LT Cooler Inlet Iso!) (Unit 1 turbine bldg, 739+5 1G-33 & 1FF-33, bottom of stairway). | ||
: r. Check Unwatering pump OUT OF- r. Contact station management to SERVICE, evaluate securing Unwatering pump. | : r. Check Unwatering pump OUT OF- r. Contact station management to SERVICE, evaluate securing Unwatering pump. | ||
MNS PLANT FLOODING PAGE NO. | MNS PLANT FLOODING PAGE NO. | ||
AP101A15500144 12 of 293 Enclosure 1 Page 8 of 17 Rev. 9 | AP101A15500144 12 of 293 Enclosure 1 Page 8 of 17 Rev. 9 UNIT 0 Unit I Turbine Bldg Flooding ACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSE RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED | ||
UNIT 0 Unit I Turbine Bldg Flooding ACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSE RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED | |||
: 6. (Continued) | : 6. (Continued) | ||
NOTE RC pump discharge valve indications are on RCPMPS graphic. These valves should automatically close when their respective RC pump is stopped. | NOTE RC pump discharge valve indications are on RCPMPS graphic. These valves should automatically close when their respective RC pump is stopped. | ||
Line 1,961: | Line 1,790: | ||
: t. Check the following RC discharge gates t. Perform the following: | : t. Check the following RC discharge gates t. Perform the following: | ||
on Unit 1 CLOSED: | on Unit 1 CLOSED: | ||
: 1) Do not continue until discharge | : 1) Do not continue until discharge | ||
. 1RC-79 (1A Main Condenser gates have had a chance to fully Discharge Gate) close. | . 1RC-79 (1A Main Condenser gates have had a chance to fully Discharge Gate) close. | ||
. 1 RC-80 (1 B Main Condenser 2) IF any discharge gate will not close, Discharge Gate) THEN perform the following: | . 1 RC-80 (1 B Main Condenser 2) IF any discharge gate will not close, Discharge Gate) THEN perform the following: | ||
. 1RC-81 (1C Main Condenser . Contact Security (2688) and have Discharge Gate). them meet operator at protected area gate 27 (intake structure) and escort them through the Zone and out gate 31 (discharge structure). | . 1RC-81 (1C Main Condenser . Contact Security (2688) and have Discharge Gate). them meet operator at protected area gate 27 (intake structure) and escort them through the Zone and out gate 31 (discharge structure). | ||
. Dispatch operator to meet security at protected area gate 27 (intake structure) and close Unit 1 RC Discharge Gates. | . Dispatch operator to meet security at protected area gate 27 (intake structure) and close Unit 1 RC Discharge Gates. | ||
: u. Check flooding REDUCED TO A | : u. Check flooding REDUCED TO A | ||
: u. Reevaluate source of flooding and MANAGEABLE LEAK. RETURN TO Step 4. | : u. Reevaluate source of flooding and MANAGEABLE LEAK. RETURN TO Step 4. | ||
: v. GOTO Step 10. | : v. GOTO Step 10. | ||
Line 1,983: | Line 1,806: | ||
==Title:== | ==Title:== | ||
Remove Pressurizer Heaters from JPM No.: 2010 Systems Control | Remove Pressurizer Heaters from JPM No.: 2010 Systems Control Service Room JPM H KJA | ||
Service Room JPM H KJA | |||
==Reference:== | ==Reference:== | ||
Line 2,019: | Line 1,840: | ||
: 3. Leave Simulator in FREEZE until operator is ready to begin. | : 3. Leave Simulator in FREEZE until operator is ready to begin. | ||
NOTE: During the performance of this JPM, the simulator operator will need to Operate Trigger # I at Step 20 of the JPM. | NOTE: During the performance of this JPM, the simulator operator will need to Operate Trigger # I at Step 20 of the JPM. | ||
2010 Systems Control Room JPM H | 2010 Systems Control Room JPM H NUREG 1021, Revision 9 | ||
NUREG 1021, Revision 9 | |||
Appendix C Page 5 of 15 Form ES-C-i PERFORMANCE INFORMATION (Denote Critical Steps with an asterisk*) | Appendix C Page 5 of 15 Form ES-C-i PERFORMANCE INFORMATION (Denote Critical Steps with an asterisk*) | ||
Line 2,064: | Line 1,883: | ||
Examiner Cue: | Examiner Cue: | ||
2 minutes has elapsed. | 2 minutes has elapsed. | ||
13 (Note prior to Step 3.4.4.7) The operator reads the Steps 3.4.4.7 3.4.4.10 C | 13 (Note prior to Step 3.4.4.7) The operator reads the Steps 3.4.4.7 3.4.4.10 C Note and proceeds. | ||
Note and proceeds. | |||
should be performed without delay. | should be performed without delay. | ||
*14 (Step 3.4.4.7) Place third The operator rotates either Pzr Htr Mode Select Switch the A, B or D Pzr Htr Mode in AUTO: Select Switch counter clockwise to AUTO. | *14 (Step 3.4.4.7) Place third The operator rotates either Pzr Htr Mode Select Switch the A, B or D Pzr Htr Mode in AUTO: Select Switch counter clockwise to AUTO. | ||
Line 2,126: | Line 1,943: | ||
- NUREG 1021, Revision 9 | - NUREG 1021, Revision 9 | ||
Appendix C Page 14 of 15 Form ES-C-i VERIFICATION OF COMPLETION Job Performance Measure No.: 2010 Systems Control Room JPM H | Appendix C Page 14 of 15 Form ES-C-i VERIFICATION OF COMPLETION Job Performance Measure No.: 2010 Systems Control Room JPM H Examinees Name: | ||
Examinees Name: | |||
Date Performed: | Date Performed: | ||
Facility Evaluator: | Facility Evaluator: | ||
Line 2,203: | Line 2,018: | ||
El A Pzr Htr Group El B Pzr Htr Group El D Pzr Htr Group El 3.4.4.6 Monitor Pzr pressure for 2 minutes. | El A Pzr Htr Group El B Pzr Htr Group El D Pzr Htr Group El 3.4.4.6 Monitor Pzr pressure for 2 minutes. | ||
NOTE: Steps 3.4.4.7 3.4.4.1OC should be performed without delay. | NOTE: Steps 3.4.4.7 3.4.4.1OC should be performed without delay. | ||
El 3.4.4.7 Place third Pzr Htr Mode Select in AUTO: | El 3.4.4.7 Place third Pzr Htr Mode Select in AUTO: | ||
El A Pzr Htr Mode Select El B Pzr Htr Mode Select El D Pzr Htr Mode Select 3.4.4.8 Check associated Pzr Htr Group in OFF: | El A Pzr Htr Mode Select El B Pzr Htr Mode Select El D Pzr Htr Mode Select 3.4.4.8 Check associated Pzr Htr Group in OFF: | ||
Line 2,227: | Line 2,041: | ||
U A Pzr Htr Group U B Pzr Htr Group U D Pzr Htr Group U 3.4.6.3 Monitor Pzr pressure for 2 minutes. | U A Pzr Htr Group U B Pzr Htr Group U D Pzr Htr Group U 3.4.6.3 Monitor Pzr pressure for 2 minutes. | ||
NOTE: Steps 3.4.6.4 3.4.6.7C should be perfomed without delay. | NOTE: Steps 3.4.6.4 3.4.6.7C should be perfomed without delay. | ||
U 3.4.6.4 Place second Pzr Htr Mode Select in AUTO: | U 3.4.6.4 Place second Pzr Htr Mode Select in AUTO: | ||
U A Pzr Htr Mode Select U B Pzr Htr Mode Select U D Pzr Htr Mode Select 3.4.6.5 Check associated Pzr Htr Group in OFF: | U A Pzr Htr Mode Select U B Pzr Htr Mode Select U D Pzr Htr Mode Select 3.4.6.5 Check associated Pzr Htr Group in OFF: | ||
Line 2,524: | Line 2,337: | ||
MNS LOSS OF KC OR KC SYSTEM LEAKAGE PAGE NO. | MNS LOSS OF KC OR KC SYSTEM LEAKAGE PAGE NO. | ||
AP111A15500121 32 of 78 Enclosure 3 Page 1 of 2 | AP111A15500121 32 of 78 Enclosure 3 Page 1 of 2 Rev. 9 UNIT 1 Aligning RN Makeup to KC Surge Tank ACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSE RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED CAUTION RN pump must be running while RN to KC emergency makeup is open, to prevent draining KC surge tank back to RN. | ||
Rev. 9 UNIT 1 Aligning RN Makeup to KC Surge Tank ACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSE RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED CAUTION RN pump must be running while RN to KC emergency makeup is open, to prevent draining KC surge tank back to RN. | |||
Align one or both of the following flowpaths (Step l.a or l.b) as required: | Align one or both of the following flowpaths (Step l.a or l.b) as required: | ||
: a. if 1A RN Train to IA KC Surge Tank makeup is desired, THEN: | : a. if 1A RN Train to IA KC Surge Tank makeup is desired, THEN: | ||
: 1) Ensure IA RN pump is on. 1) GOTO Step lb. | : 1) Ensure IA RN pump is on. 1) GOTO Step lb. | ||
: 2) Dispatch operator to perform the following: | : 2) Dispatch operator to perform the following: | ||
. Unlock and open 1KC-494 (Unit 1 RN Assured Supply to 1A KC S urge Tank Compartment Isol) | . Unlock and open 1KC-494 (Unit 1 RN Assured Supply to 1A KC S urge Tank Compartment Isol) | ||
(aux bldg, 733+10, HH-56, in corner west of 1 Bi KC Pump). | (aux bldg, 733+10, HH-56, in corner west of 1 Bi KC Pump). | ||
Line 2,537: | Line 2,347: | ||
MNS LOSS OF KC OR KC SYSTEM LEAKAGE PAGE NO. | MNS LOSS OF KC OR KC SYSTEM LEAKAGE PAGE NO. | ||
AP/1/A15500/21 33 of 78 Enclosure 3 Page 2 of 2 | AP/1/A15500/21 33 of 78 Enclosure 3 Page 2 of 2 Rev. 9 UNIT 1 Aligning RN Makeup to KC Surge Tank I ACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSE I RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED | ||
Rev. 9 UNIT 1 Aligning RN Makeup to KC Surge Tank I ACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSE I RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED | |||
: 1. (Continued) | : 1. (Continued) | ||
: b. 1 B RN Train to 1 B KC Surge Tank makeup is desired, THEN: | : b. 1 B RN Train to 1 B KC Surge Tank makeup is desired, THEN: | ||
Line 2,605: | Line 2,413: | ||
(Step 3.a) On SKX Breaker Cue: | (Step 3.a) On SKX Breaker Cue: | ||
Alignment Panel, check the following breakers OPEN: | Alignment Panel, check the following breakers OPEN: | ||
Breaker is as you see it. | Breaker is as you see it. | ||
SKXBAPBkr1 (SKXAC Output to KXA) The operator observes the SKX BAP Bkr 2. | SKXBAPBkr1 (SKXAC Output to KXA) The operator observes the SKX BAP Bkr 2. | ||
Line 2,645: | Line 2,452: | ||
9 (Step 3.f) Check kirk key in The operator observes DCB-i D (Static lnverter No. DCB-i D. | 9 (Step 3.f) Check kirk key in The operator observes DCB-i D (Static lnverter No. DCB-i D. | ||
SKX) INSTALLED. | SKX) INSTALLED. | ||
Cue: | Cue: | ||
The Kirk Key is installed. | The Kirk Key is installed. | ||
Line 2,672: | Line 2,478: | ||
INVERTER OUTPUT Cue: | INVERTER OUTPUT Cue: | ||
VOLTAGE 116 -124 VOLTS Meter indicates 120 INVERTER OUTPUT volts. | VOLTAGE 116 -124 VOLTS Meter indicates 120 INVERTER OUTPUT volts. | ||
FREQUENCY 59.7-60.3 HZ | FREQUENCY 59.7-60.3 HZ The operator observes the lnverter Output Frequency. | ||
The operator observes the lnverter Output Frequency. | |||
Cue: | Cue: | ||
Meter indicates 60 Hz. | Meter indicates 60 Hz. | ||
Line 2,705: | Line 2,509: | ||
SYSTEM OUTPUT Cue: | SYSTEM OUTPUT Cue: | ||
VOLTAGE 116 -124 VOLTS Meter indicates 120 SYSTEM OUTPUT volts. | VOLTAGE 116 -124 VOLTS Meter indicates 120 SYSTEM OUTPUT volts. | ||
FREQUENCY 59.7-60.3 HZ | FREQUENCY 59.7-60.3 HZ SYSTEM OUTPUT CURRENT The operator observes the LESS THAN 292 AMPS System Output Frequency. | ||
SYSTEM OUTPUT CURRENT The operator observes the LESS THAN 292 AMPS System Output Frequency. | |||
Cue: | Cue: | ||
Meter indicates 60 Hz. | Meter indicates 60 Hz. | ||
Line 2,766: | Line 2,568: | ||
MNS LOSS OF VITAL OR AUX CONTROL POWER PAGE NO. | MNS LOSS OF VITAL OR AUX CONTROL POWER PAGE NO. | ||
AP111N5500115 279 Enclosure 24 Page 2 of 31 | AP111N5500115 279 Enclosure 24 Page 2 of 31 UNIT 1 Restoring Power To KXB Rev 21 LI DOD 000000W 0000 WW0 | ||
UNIT 1 Restoring Power To KXB Rev 21 LI DOD 000000W 0000 WW0 | |||
: 3. Align SKX Inverter to KXB panelboard as follows: | : 3. Align SKX Inverter to KXB panelboard as follows: | ||
: a. On SKX Breaker Alignment Panel, a. Perform the following: | : a. On SKX Breaker Alignment Panel, a. Perform the following: | ||
check the following breakers OPEN: | check the following breakers OPEN: | ||
: 1) Notify Control Room to evaluate LI SKX BAP Bkr 1 (SKX AC Output to swapping bus aligned to SKX to KXA) another source. | : 1) Notify Control Room to evaluate LI SKX BAP Bkr 1 (SKX AC Output to swapping bus aligned to SKX to KXA) another source. | ||
LI SKX BAP Bkr 2 (SKX AC Output to 2) if bus aligned to SKX cannot be 1 KU) swapped to another source, THEN RETURN TO Step 2. | LI SKX BAP Bkr 2 (SKX AC Output to 2) if bus aligned to SKX cannot be 1 KU) swapped to another source, THEN RETURN TO Step 2. | ||
LI SKX BAP Bkr 4 (SKX AC Output to 2KU). 3) if bus aligned to SKX can be swapped to another source, THEN perform the following: | LI SKX BAP Bkr 4 (SKX AC Output to 2KU). 3) if bus aligned to SKX can be swapped to another source, THEN perform the following: | ||
a) Swap OP!O!A163501001 B (125VDC 2401120VAC | a) Swap OP!O!A163501001 B (125VDC 2401120VAC Auxiliary Control Power System). | ||
Auxiliary Control Power System). | |||
b) Do not continue until swap complete. | b) Do not continue until swap complete. | ||
: b. On SKX Static Inverter, perform the following: | : b. On SKX Static Inverter, perform the following: | ||
Line 2,790: | Line 2,587: | ||
MNS AP111N5500115 LOSS OF VITAL OR AUX CONTROL POWER I I | MNS AP111N5500115 LOSS OF VITAL OR AUX CONTROL POWER I I | ||
PAGE NO. I Enclosure 24 Page 3 of 31 217 of 2791 UNIT 1 | PAGE NO. I Enclosure 24 Page 3 of 31 217 of 2791 UNIT 1 Restoring Power To KXB I Rev. 21 I I | ||
uornrnrnrnrnurn uuwrnrn | |||
Restoring Power To KXB I Rev. 21 I | |||
: 3. (Continued) | : 3. (Continued) | ||
: e. On SKX Breaker Alignment Panel, use Kirk key to close SKX BAP Bkr 3 (SKX AC Output to KXB). | : e. On SKX Breaker Alignment Panel, use Kirk key to close SKX BAP Bkr 3 (SKX AC Output to KXB). | ||
Line 2,800: | Line 2,594: | ||
- f. Perform the following: | - f. Perform the following: | ||
lnverter No. SKX) INSTALLED. | lnverter No. SKX) INSTALLED. | ||
: 1) Ensure DCA 1D (Static lnverter No. SKX) is open. | |||
: 1) Ensure DCA 1D (Static lnverter | |||
No. SKX) is open. | |||
: 2) Remove kirk key from DCA 1 D. - | : 2) Remove kirk key from DCA 1 D. - | ||
: 3) Insert kirk key in DCB - 1 D. | : 3) Insert kirk key in DCB - 1 D. | ||
Line 2,815: | Line 2,606: | ||
: 4) Check the following indications: 4) Perform the following: | : 4) Check the following indications: 4) Perform the following: | ||
LI INVERTER OUTPUT a) IF Inverter output voltage is less VOLTAGE - than 110 Volts, THEN RETURN 116-124 VOLTS TOStep2. | LI INVERTER OUTPUT a) IF Inverter output voltage is less VOLTAGE - than 110 Volts, THEN RETURN 116-124 VOLTS TOStep2. | ||
LI INVERTER OUTPUT b) if lnverter output voltage is FREQUENCY 59.7 60.3 HZ. | LI INVERTER OUTPUT b) if lnverter output voltage is FREQUENCY 59.7 60.3 HZ. | ||
- - greater than 110 Volts, THEN notify IAE to investigate abnormal indication as time allows. | - - greater than 110 Volts, THEN notify IAE to investigate abnormal indication as time allows. | ||
MNS LOSS OF VITAL OR AUX CONTROL POWER PAGE NO. | MNS LOSS OF VITAL OR AUX CONTROL POWER PAGE NO. | ||
AP111A15500115 279 Enclosure 24 Page 4 of 31 | AP111A15500115 279 Enclosure 24 Page 4 of 31 Rev 21 UNIT 1 Restoring Power To KXB unrnrnrnrnrnwrnww :unwornww | ||
Rev 21 UNIT 1 Restoring Power To KXB unrnrnrnrnrnwrnww :unwornww | |||
: 3. (Continued) | : 3. (Continued) | ||
: 5) Close SKX mv Bkr 3 (SKX lnv AC Output). | : 5) Close SKX mv Bkr 3 (SKX lnv AC Output). | ||
Line 2,845: | Line 2,633: | ||
NOTE With SKX Inverter in service, MKB is normally aligned to SKX Inverter as a backup power supply in case the inverter fails. If MKB is reliable, it should be aligned as a backup power source. | NOTE With SKX Inverter in service, MKB is normally aligned to SKX Inverter as a backup power supply in case the inverter fails. If MKB is reliable, it should be aligned as a backup power source. | ||
: m. Contact station management to evaluate closing the following breakers to restore backup power to SKX Static lnverter: | : m. Contact station management to evaluate closing the following breakers to restore backup power to SKX Static lnverter: | ||
D SKX Byp Pnl Bkr 5 (MKB Alt AC Source Supply) on SKX Static Inverter Bypass Panel LI MKB 2C (Inverter No. SKX Manual Bypass SW Alternate Supply). | |||
D SKX Byp Pnl Bkr 5 (MKB Alt AC Source Supply) on SKX Static Inverter Bypass Panel | |||
LI MKB 2C (Inverter No. SKX Manual | |||
Bypass SW Alternate Supply). | |||
: n. Exit this enclosure. | : n. Exit this enclosure. | ||
Line 2,860: | Line 2,643: | ||
: 2) Ensure KXB mv Bkr 1 (DCB to KXB DC Supply) is open. | : 2) Ensure KXB mv Bkr 1 (DCB to KXB DC Supply) is open. | ||
: b. On SKX Breaker Alignment Panel, ensure SKX BAP Bkr 3 (SKX AC Output to KXB) is open. | : b. On SKX Breaker Alignment Panel, ensure SKX BAP Bkr 3 (SKX AC Output to KXB) is open. | ||
: c. Ensure MKB lB (Inverter No. KXB | : c. Ensure MKB lB (Inverter No. KXB Manual Bypass SW Alternate Supply) is open. | ||
Manual Bypass SW Alternate Supply) is open. | |||
: d. Ensure DCB 2G (Static Inverter No. | : d. Ensure DCB 2G (Static Inverter No. | ||
KXB) is closed. | KXB) is closed. | ||
: e. Close KXB DISC SWITCH (Battery Room, column BB58). | : e. Close KXB DISC SWITCH (Battery Room, column BB58). | ||
MNS LOSS OF VITAL OR AUX CONTROL POWER jPAGE NO. | MNS LOSS OF VITAL OR AUX CONTROL POWER jPAGE NO. | ||
AP111N5500115 221 of 279 Enclosure 24 Page 7 of 31 | AP111N5500115 221 of 279 Enclosure 24 Page 7 of 31 UNIT 1 Restoring Power To KXB Rev. 21 rnwuwrnw urnrnrnw | ||
UNIT 1 Restoring Power To KXB Rev. 21 rnwuwrnw urnrnrnw | |||
: 4. (Continued) | : 4. (Continued) | ||
: f. Perform the following at KXB Static I nverter: | : f. Perform the following at KXB Static I nverter: | ||
Line 2,885: | Line 2,663: | ||
MNS LOSS OF VITAL OR AUX CONTROL POWER PAGE NO. | MNS LOSS OF VITAL OR AUX CONTROL POWER PAGE NO. | ||
AP111A15500115 279 Enclosure 24 Page 8 of 31 | AP111A15500115 279 Enclosure 24 Page 8 of 31 UNIT 1 Restoring Power To KXB Rev 21 rnuornrnrnrnrn | ||
UNIT 1 Restoring Power To KXB Rev 21 rnuornrnrnrnrn | |||
: 4. (Continued) | : 4. (Continued) | ||
: g. Perform the following at the KXB Static Inverter Bypass Panel: | : g. Perform the following at the KXB Static Inverter Bypass Panel: | ||
Line 2,893: | Line 2,669: | ||
: 2) Ensure MANUAL BYPASS SWITCH in NORMAL OPERATION. | : 2) Ensure MANUAL BYPASS SWITCH in NORMAL OPERATION. | ||
: 3) Check INVERTER SUPPLYING 3) Depress INVERTER TO LOAD LOAD light LIT. | : 3) Check INVERTER SUPPLYING 3) Depress INVERTER TO LOAD LOAD light LIT. | ||
pushbutton. | pushbutton. | ||
: 4) Check the following indications: 4) Perform the following: | : 4) Check the following indications: 4) Perform the following: | ||
Line 2,906: | Line 2,681: | ||
MNS LOSS OF VITAL OR AUX CONTROL POWER PAGE NO. | MNS LOSS OF VITAL OR AUX CONTROL POWER PAGE NO. | ||
AP111A15500115 279 Enclosure 24 Page 9 of 31 | AP111A15500115 279 Enclosure 24 Page 9 of 31 UNIT 1 Restoring Power To KXB ev. | ||
UNIT 1 Restoring Power To KXB ev. | |||
R21 nnnwrnrnrnrn nuoonrnrnrnw | R21 nnnwrnrnrnrn nuoonrnrnrnw | ||
: 4. (Continued) | : 4. (Continued) | ||
NOTE With KXB Inverter in service, MKB is normally aligned to KXB lnverter as a backup power supply in case the inverter fails. If MKB is reliable, it should be aligned as a backup power source. | NOTE With KXB Inverter in service, MKB is normally aligned to KXB lnverter as a backup power supply in case the inverter fails. If MKB is reliable, it should be aligned as a backup power source. | ||
: k. Contact station management to evaluate closing the following breaker to restore backup power to KXB Static I nverter: | : k. Contact station management to evaluate closing the following breaker to restore backup power to KXB Static I nverter: | ||
Li MKB lB (lnverter No. KXB Manual Bypass SW Alternate Supply). | |||
Li MKB lB (lnverter No. KXB Manual | |||
Bypass SW Alternate Supply). | |||
I. Exit this enclosure. | I. Exit this enclosure. | ||
Line 2,932: | Line 2,702: | ||
: 4) Do not continue until MKB is energized. | : 4) Do not continue until MKB is energized. | ||
: b. Check MKA 2C (Bus MKA Tie Bkr To | : b. Check MKA 2C (Bus MKA Tie Bkr To | ||
: b. Observe Note prior to Step 6 and G 240/1 20 VAC Bus MKB) OPEN. | : b. Observe Note prior to Step 6 and G 240/1 20 VAC Bus MKB) OPEN. | ||
T Step 6. | T Step 6. | ||
Line 2,943: | Line 2,711: | ||
: 1) On SKX Breaker Alignment Panel, 1) Step 5.e. | : 1) On SKX Breaker Alignment Panel, 1) Step 5.e. | ||
check SKX BAP Bkr 4 (SKX AC Output to 2KU) OPEN. | check SKX BAP Bkr 4 (SKX AC Output to 2KU) OPEN. | ||
: 2) On 2KU mv Byp Panel, check the 2) QTO.Step 5.g. | : 2) On 2KU mv Byp Panel, check the 2) QTO.Step 5.g. | ||
following indications: | following indications: | ||
LI INVERTER SUPPLYING LOAD light LIT. | LI INVERTER SUPPLYING LOAD light LIT. | ||
LI 2KU MAN BYP SW in - | LI 2KU MAN BYP SW in - | ||
NORMAL OPERATION. | NORMAL OPERATION. | ||
Line 2,954: | Line 2,720: | ||
Inverter as follows: | Inverter as follows: | ||
: 1) On SKX Static mnverter Bypass Panel, check INVERTER SUPPLYING LOAD light LIT.- | : 1) On SKX Static mnverter Bypass Panel, check INVERTER SUPPLYING LOAD light LIT.- | ||
: 2) On SKX Static mnverter Bypass Panel, check the MANUAL BYPASS SWmTCH in NORMAL | : 2) On SKX Static mnverter Bypass Panel, check the MANUAL BYPASS SWmTCH in NORMAL OPERATION. | ||
OPERATION. | |||
: f. ]QStep5.k. | : f. ]QStep5.k. | ||
I MNS I LOSS OF VITAL OR AUX CONTROL POWER I PAGE NO. I I API1IAI5500/15 j Enclosure 24 Page 12 of 31 I 226 of 279 UNIT 1 | I MNS I LOSS OF VITAL OR AUX CONTROL POWER I PAGE NO. I I API1IAI5500/15 j Enclosure 24 Page 12 of 31 I 226 of 279 UNIT 1 Restoring Power To KXB I Rev. 21 I I I oounrnrnuooornrn ouornnornu 1 | ||
Restoring Power To KXB I Rev. 21 I I I oounrnrnuooornrn ouornnornu 1 | |||
: 5. (Continued) | : 5. (Continued) | ||
: g. In Unit 2 MG Set Room, check 2KDCS1 panelboard aligned to its normal power source as follows: | : g. In Unit 2 MG Set Room, check 2KDCS1 panelboard aligned to its normal power source as follows: | ||
Line 2,976: | Line 2,738: | ||
MNS LOSS OF VITAL OR AUX CONTROL POWER PAGE NO. | MNS LOSS OF VITAL OR AUX CONTROL POWER PAGE NO. | ||
AP111A15500115 279 Enclosure 24 Page 13 of 31 | AP111A15500115 279 Enclosure 24 Page 13 of 31 UNIT 1 Restoring Power To KXB Re21 V. | ||
UNIT 1 Restoring Power To KXB Re21 V. | |||
nwrnrnurnrnrnornnrnrn nowrnrnrn | nwrnrnurnrnrnornnrnrn nowrnrnrn | ||
: 5. (Continued) | : 5. (Continued) | ||
Line 2,984: | Line 2,744: | ||
: i. Contact station management to perform the following prior to continuing: | : i. Contact station management to perform the following prior to continuing: | ||
D Evaluate reducing the number of loads on MKB. | D Evaluate reducing the number of loads on MKB. | ||
Evaluate the potential for transformer overload with KXB aligned to MKB. | Evaluate the potential for transformer overload with KXB aligned to MKB. | ||
Evaluate energizing KXB panelboard from another source Step 2. | Evaluate energizing KXB panelboard from another source Step 2. | ||
: j. Perform one of the following based on previous evaluation: | : j. Perform one of the following based on previous evaluation: | ||
Line 2,998: | Line 2,756: | ||
Room, column BB58). | Room, column BB58). | ||
: n. Close MKB 18 (Inverter No. KXB | : n. Close MKB 18 (Inverter No. KXB | ||
: n. RETURN TQ Step 2. | : n. RETURN TQ Step 2. | ||
Manual Bypass SW Alternate Supply). | Manual Bypass SW Alternate Supply). | ||
MNS LOSS OF VITAL OR AUX CONTROL POWER PAGE NO. | MNS LOSS OF VITAL OR AUX CONTROL POWER PAGE NO. | ||
AP111A15500115 279 Enclosure 24 Page 14 of 31 | AP111A15500115 279 Enclosure 24 Page 14 of 31 UNIT 1 Restoring Power To KXB Rev 21 mwwww rnrnwwurnrnwcrn | ||
UNIT 1 Restoring Power To KXB Rev 21 mwwww rnrnwwurnrnwcrn | |||
: 5. (Continued) | : 5. (Continued) | ||
: o. Perform the following at the KXB Static Inverter Bypass Panel: | : o. Perform the following at the KXB Static Inverter Bypass Panel: | ||
Line 3,014: | Line 2,769: | ||
Li SYSTEM OUTPUT CURRENT - a) if System output voltage is less LESS THAN 292 AMPS than 110 Volts, THEN RETURN Step 2. | Li SYSTEM OUTPUT CURRENT - a) if System output voltage is less LESS THAN 292 AMPS than 110 Volts, THEN RETURN Step 2. | ||
Li SYSTEM OUTPUT VOLTAGE - | Li SYSTEM OUTPUT VOLTAGE - | ||
116 124 VOLTS | 116 124 VOLTS b) if System output voltage is greater than 110 Volts, THEN LI SYSTEM OUTPUT notify IAE to investigate FREQUENCY 59.7 60.3 HZ. | ||
b) if System output voltage is greater than 110 Volts, THEN LI SYSTEM OUTPUT notify IAE to investigate FREQUENCY 59.7 60.3 HZ. | |||
- - abnormal indication as time allows. | - - abnormal indication as time allows. | ||
: p. IFSKX Static Inverter shutdown, THEN ensure ALARM CIRCUIT is OFF on SKX Static Inverter. | : p. IFSKX Static Inverter shutdown, THEN ensure ALARM CIRCUIT is OFF on SKX Static Inverter. | ||
Line 3,038: | Line 2,791: | ||
: e. On SKX Breaker Alignment Panel, e. Perform the following: | : e. On SKX Breaker Alignment Panel, e. Perform the following: | ||
check the following breakers OPEN: | check the following breakers OPEN: | ||
: 1) Record below which panelboard is LI SKX BAP Bkr 1 (SKX AC Output to associated with the closed breaker KXA) (i.e. KXA, 1KU, or2KU): | : 1) Record below which panelboard is LI SKX BAP Bkr 1 (SKX AC Output to associated with the closed breaker KXA) (i.e. KXA, 1KU, or2KU): | ||
LI SKX BAP Bkr 2 (SKX AC Output to 1 KU) | LI SKX BAP Bkr 2 (SKX AC Output to 1 KU) | ||
Line 3,045: | Line 2,797: | ||
MNS LOSS OF VITAL OR AUX CONTROL POWER PAGE NO. | MNS LOSS OF VITAL OR AUX CONTROL POWER PAGE NO. | ||
AP111A15500115 279 Enclosure 24 Page 16 of 31 | AP111A15500115 279 Enclosure 24 Page 16 of 31 UNIT 1 Restoring Power To KXB Rev 21 UUDflflflDflUWflUWfl nrnunuuouwrnurnrn | ||
UNIT 1 Restoring Power To KXB Rev 21 UUDflflflDflUWflUWfl nrnunuuouwrnurnrn | |||
: 6. (Continued) | : 6. (Continued) | ||
_f. IQStep6.h. | _f. IQStep6.h. | ||
: g. Check if SKX Inverter is in service as g. Circle the panelboard in the Note prior follows: to Step 6 that was recorded in Step 6.e. | : g. Check if SKX Inverter is in service as g. Circle the panelboard in the Note prior follows: to Step 6 that was recorded in Step 6.e. | ||
Li On SKX Static Inverter Bypass Panel, check INVE.RTER SUPPLYING LOAD light LIT. - | Li On SKX Static Inverter Bypass Panel, check INVE.RTER SUPPLYING LOAD light LIT. - | ||
LI On SKX Staticlnverter Bypass Panel, check the MANUAL BYPASS SWITCH in NORMAL | LI On SKX Staticlnverter Bypass Panel, check the MANUAL BYPASS SWITCH in NORMAL OPERATI ON. | ||
OPERATI ON. | |||
: h. Check if 1 KU Inverter is in service as follows: | : h. Check if 1 KU Inverter is in service as follows: | ||
: 1) Check iKU DISC SWITCH 1) Q]Q Step 6.i. | : 1) Check iKU DISC SWITCH 1) Q]Q Step 6.i. | ||
Line 3,061: | Line 2,809: | ||
: 2) Check the following indications: 2) Circle 1 KU in Note prior to Step 6. | : 2) Check the following indications: 2) Circle 1 KU in Note prior to Step 6. | ||
LI On 1KU Inv Byp Panel, check INVERTER SUPPLYING LOAD light LIT. | LI On 1KU Inv Byp Panel, check INVERTER SUPPLYING LOAD light LIT. | ||
LI On IKU Inv Byp Panel, check iKU MAN BYP SW in - | LI On IKU Inv Byp Panel, check iKU MAN BYP SW in - | ||
NORMAL OPERATION. | NORMAL OPERATION. | ||
MNS LOSS OF VITAL OR AUX CONTROL POWER PAGE NO. | MNS LOSS OF VITAL OR AUX CONTROL POWER PAGE NO. | ||
AP111A15500115 279 Enclosure 24 Page 17 of 31 | AP111A15500115 279 Enclosure 24 Page 17 of 31 UNIT 1 Restoring Power To KXB R ev. 21 rnunuowrnu wrnrnrnornrnrnurnu | ||
UNIT 1 Restoring Power To KXB R ev. 21 rnunuowrnu wrnrnrnornrnrnurnu | |||
: 6. (Continued) | : 6. (Continued) | ||
: i. Check if KXA Inverter is in service as follows: | : i. Check if KXA Inverter is in service as follows: | ||
Line 3,076: | Line 2,821: | ||
: 2) Check the following indications: 2) Circle KXA in Note prior to Step 6. | : 2) Check the following indications: 2) Circle KXA in Note prior to Step 6. | ||
ü On KXA Static Inverter Bypass Panel, check INVERTER SUPPLYING LOAD light LIT.- | ü On KXA Static Inverter Bypass Panel, check INVERTER SUPPLYING LOAD light LIT.- | ||
D On KXA Static Inverter Bypass Panel, check the MANUAL BYPASS SWITCH in NORMAL | D On KXA Static Inverter Bypass Panel, check the MANUAL BYPASS SWITCH in NORMAL OPERATIC N. | ||
OPERATIC N. | |||
: j. Check if 2KU Inverter is in service as follows: | : j. Check if 2KU Inverter is in service as follows: | ||
: 1) Check 2KU DISC SWITCH 1) ]Q Step 6.k. | : 1) Check 2KU DISC SWITCH 1) ]Q Step 6.k. | ||
Line 3,084: | Line 2,827: | ||
CLOSED. | CLOSED. | ||
: 2) Check the following indications: 2) Circle 2KU in Note prior to Step 6. | : 2) Check the following indications: 2) Circle 2KU in Note prior to Step 6. | ||
On 2KU Inv Byp Panel, check INVERTER SUPPLYING LOAD light LIT. | On 2KU Inv Byp Panel, check INVERTER SUPPLYING LOAD light LIT. | ||
On 2KU Inv Byp Panel, check 2KU MAN BYP SW in - | On 2KU Inv Byp Panel, check 2KU MAN BYP SW in - | ||
NORMAL OPERATION. | NORMAL OPERATION. | ||
MNS LOSS OF VITAL OR AUX CONTROL POWER PAGE NO. | MNS LOSS OF VITAL OR AUX CONTROL POWER PAGE NO. | ||
AP/1/A15500/15 232 of 279 Enclosure 24 Page 18 of 31 | AP/1/A15500/15 232 of 279 Enclosure 24 Page 18 of 31 UNIT 1 Restoring Power To KXB Rev. 21 uuononuwrnurnnrnrn ouwowwww | ||
UNIT 1 Restoring Power To KXB Rev. 21 uuononuwrnurnnrnrn ouwowwww | |||
: 6. (Continued) | : 6. (Continued) | ||
: k. In Unit 2 MG Set Room, check if 1 KDCS1 Inverter is in service as follows: | : k. In Unit 2 MG Set Room, check if 1 KDCS1 Inverter is in service as follows: | ||
Line 3,113: | Line 2,851: | ||
: 1) On SKDCS Alignment Panel 1) Perform the following: | : 1) On SKDCS Alignment Panel 1) Perform the following: | ||
(column CC-59), check SKDCS SELECTOR SWITCH in OFF. | (column CC-59), check SKDCS SELECTOR SWITCH in OFF. | ||
a) IF SKDCS SELECTOR SWITCH in MKA position, THEN GO TO Step 6.1.2). | a) IF SKDCS SELECTOR SWITCH in MKA position, THEN GO TO Step 6.1.2). | ||
b) IF SKDCS SELECTOR SWITCH in MKB position, THEN perform the following: | b) IF SKDCS SELECTOR SWITCH in MKB position, THEN perform the following: | ||
Line 3,122: | Line 2,859: | ||
Step 6. | Step 6. | ||
: m. Check the total number of panelboards m. Observe Caution prior to Step 6.o and circled in Note prior to Step 6 LESS | : m. Check the total number of panelboards m. Observe Caution prior to Step 6.o and circled in Note prior to Step 6 LESS | ||
]Q Step 6.o. | ]Q Step 6.o. | ||
THAN OR EQUAL TO TWO. | THAN OR EQUAL TO TWO. | ||
Line 3,128: | Line 2,864: | ||
MNS LOSS OF VITAL OR AIJX CONTROL POWER PAGE NO. | MNS LOSS OF VITAL OR AIJX CONTROL POWER PAGE NO. | ||
AP111A15500115 Enclosure 24 Page 20 of 31 | AP111A15500115 Enclosure 24 Page 20 of 31 UNIT 1 Restoring Power To KXB Rev 21 ounnnurnnnrni nrnrnncuurnwrnnnrnnc | ||
UNIT 1 Restoring Power To KXB Rev 21 ounnnurnnnrni nrnrnncuurnwrnnnrnnc | |||
: 6. (Continued) | : 6. (Continued) | ||
CAUTION If KXB panelboard is aligned to MKB in subsequent steps, the transformer supplying both MKA and MKB may become overloaded, depending on actual loads at that moment. | CAUTION If KXB panelboard is aligned to MKB in subsequent steps, the transformer supplying both MKA and MKB may become overloaded, depending on actual loads at that moment. | ||
: o. Contact station management to perform the following prior to continuing: | : o. Contact station management to perform the following prior to continuing: | ||
Li Evaluate reducing the number of loads on MKA and MKB. | Li Evaluate reducing the number of loads on MKA and MKB. | ||
El Evaluate the potential for transformer overload with KXB aligned to MKAIMKB. | El Evaluate the potential for transformer overload with KXB aligned to MKAIMKB. | ||
Line 3,142: | Line 2,875: | ||
OR LI if station management desires to align KXB panelboard to another source, THEN RETURN TO Step 2. | OR LI if station management desires to align KXB panelboard to another source, THEN RETURN TO Step 2. | ||
MNS I LOSS OF VITAL OR AUX CONTROL POWER PAGE NO. I AP111N5500115 I Enclosure 24 Page 21 of 31 I 235 of 2791 UNIT 1 | MNS I LOSS OF VITAL OR AUX CONTROL POWER PAGE NO. I AP111N5500115 I Enclosure 24 Page 21 of 31 I 235 of 2791 UNIT 1 Restoring Power To KXB I Rev. 21 I I | ||
Restoring Power To KXB I Rev. 21 I I | |||
oonnornrnrn uuuuonunrnrnrn | oonnornrnrn uuuuonunrnrnrn | ||
: 7. Align Distribution Center MKB to KXB panelboard through the SKX Static Inverter Bypass Panel as follows: | : 7. Align Distribution Center MKB to KXB panelboard through the SKX Static Inverter Bypass Panel as follows: | ||
: a. On SKX Breaker Alignment Panel, a. Perform the following: | : a. On SKX Breaker Alignment Panel, a. Perform the following: | ||
check the following breakers OPEN: | check the following breakers OPEN: | ||
: 1) Notify Control Room to evaluate Li SKX BAP Bkr 1 (SKX AC Output to swapping bus aligned to SKX to KXA) another source. | : 1) Notify Control Room to evaluate Li SKX BAP Bkr 1 (SKX AC Output to swapping bus aligned to SKX to KXA) another source. | ||
LI SKX BAP Bkr 2 (SKX AC Output to 2) if bus aligned to SKX cannot be I KU) swapped to another source, THEN RETURN IQ. Step 2. | LI SKX BAP Bkr 2 (SKX AC Output to 2) if bus aligned to SKX cannot be I KU) swapped to another source, THEN RETURN IQ. Step 2. | ||
Li SKX BAP Bkr 4 (SKX AC Output to 2KU). 3) if bus aligned to SKX can be swapped to another source, THEN perform the following: | Li SKX BAP Bkr 4 (SKX AC Output to 2KU). 3) if bus aligned to SKX can be swapped to another source, THEN perform the following: | ||
a) Swap OP/OIA/63501001 B (125VDC 240/12OVAC | a) Swap OP/OIA/63501001 B (125VDC 240/12OVAC Auxiliary Control Power System). | ||
Auxiliary Control Power System). | |||
b) Do not continue until swap complete. | b) Do not continue until swap complete. | ||
MNS LOSS OF VITAL OR AUX CONTROL POWER PAGE NO. | MNS LOSS OF VITAL OR AUX CONTROL POWER PAGE NO. | ||
AP111A15500115 236 of 279 Enclosure 24 Page 22 of 31 | AP111A15500115 236 of 279 Enclosure 24 Page 22 of 31 UNIT 1 Restoring Power To KXB Rev. 21 urnowrnurnrnoornrn urnrnrnrn | ||
UNIT 1 Restoring Power To KXB Rev. 21 urnowrnurnrnoornrn urnrnrnrn | |||
: 7. (Continued) | : 7. (Continued) | ||
: b. On 1LAMPI Panel Module 1LAM12 b. Perform the following: | : b. On 1LAMPI Panel Module 1LAM12 b. Perform the following: | ||
Line 3,173: | Line 2,899: | ||
: 4) Do not continue until MKB is energized. | : 4) Do not continue until MKB is energized. | ||
: c. Check MKA 2C (Bus MKA Tie Bkr To | : c. Check MKA 2C (Bus MKA Tie Bkr To | ||
: c. Observe Note prior to Step 8 and G 240/1 20 VAC Bus MKB) OPEN. | : c. Observe Note prior to Step 8 and G 240/1 20 VAC Bus MKB) OPEN. | ||
]Q Step 8. | ]Q Step 8. | ||
MNS LOSS OF VITAL OR AUX CONTROL POWER PAGE NO. | MNS LOSS OF VITAL OR AUX CONTROL POWER PAGE NO. | ||
AP111A15500115 Enclosure 24 Page 23 of 31 | AP111A15500115 Enclosure 24 Page 23 of 31 UNIT 1 Restoring Power To KXB Rev 21 rnrnuuurnuurnucuwu ocurnrnornuurnc | ||
UNIT 1 Restoring Power To KXB Rev 21 rnrnuuurnuurnucuwu ocurnrnornuurnc | |||
: 7. (Continued) | : 7. (Continued) | ||
: d. Check 2KU panelboard aligned to its d. GO TO Step 7.f. | : d. Check 2KU panelboard aligned to its d. GO TO Step 7.f. | ||
normal power source as follows: | normal power source as follows: | ||
D On 2KU lnv Byp Panel, check INVERTER SUPPLYING LOAD light LIT. | D On 2KU lnv Byp Panel, check INVERTER SUPPLYING LOAD light LIT. | ||
L3 On 2KU Inv Byp Panel, check 2KU MAN BYP SW in NORMAL OPERATION. | |||
L3 On 2KU Inv Byp Panel, check 2KU MAN BYP SW in NORMAL | |||
OPERATION. | |||
_e. GOTOStep7.j. | _e. GOTOStep7.j. | ||
: f. In Unit 2 MG Set Room, check 2KDCS1 panelboard aligned to its normal power source as follows: | : f. In Unit 2 MG Set Room, check 2KDCS1 panelboard aligned to its normal power source as follows: | ||
: 1) On SKDCS Alignment Panel 1) Perform the following: | : 1) On SKDCS Alignment Panel 1) Perform the following: | ||
(column CC-59), check SKDCS SELECTOR SWITCH in OFF. | (column CC-59), check SKDCS SELECTOR SWITCH in OFF. | ||
a) IF SKDCS SELECTOR SWITCH in MKA position, THEN GOTO Step 7.f.2). | a) IF SKDCS SELECTOR SWITCH in MKA position, THEN GOTO Step 7.f.2). | ||
b) IF SKDCS SELECTOR SWITCH in MKB position, THEN perform the following: | b) IF SKDCS SELECTOR SWITCH in MKB position, THEN perform the following: | ||
Line 3,201: | Line 2,919: | ||
_(3) IFLEDislit,THENGOTO Step 7.j. | _(3) IFLEDislit,THENGOTO Step 7.j. | ||
: 2) On 2KDCS UPS, check INVERTER 2) Observe Caution prior to Step 7.h TO LOAD pushbutton LED LIT. | : 2) On 2KDCS UPS, check INVERTER 2) Observe Caution prior to Step 7.h TO LOAD pushbutton LED LIT. | ||
and QQ Step 7.h. | and QQ Step 7.h. | ||
MNS API1/N5500115 II LOSS OF VITAL OR AUX CONTROL POWER PAGE NO. I Enclosure 24 Page 24 of 31 238 of 2791 UNIT 1 | MNS API1/N5500115 II LOSS OF VITAL OR AUX CONTROL POWER PAGE NO. I Enclosure 24 Page 24 of 31 238 of 2791 UNIT 1 Restoring Power To KXB Rev. 21 I I | ||
Restoring Power To KXB Rev. 21 I I | |||
rnrnrnurnouurnwnrnu ournrnrnrn | rnrnrnurnouurnwnrnu ournrnrnrn | ||
: 7. (Continued) | : 7. (Continued) | ||
Line 3,222: | Line 2,937: | ||
: k. Ensure KXB DISC SWITCH (Battery Room, column BB58) is open. | : k. Ensure KXB DISC SWITCH (Battery Room, column BB58) is open. | ||
MNS LOSS OF VITAL OR AUX CONTROL POWER II PAGE NO. I API1IN5500I1 5 I Enclosure 24 Page 25 of 31 239 of 279 I UNIT 1 | MNS LOSS OF VITAL OR AUX CONTROL POWER II PAGE NO. I API1IN5500I1 5 I Enclosure 24 Page 25 of 31 239 of 279 I UNIT 1 Restoring Power To KXB I 21 I I I rnnurnrnwrnnurn onnounrnrnw | ||
Restoring Power To KXB I 21 I I I rnnurnrnwrnnurn onnounrnrnw | |||
: 7. (Continued) | : 7. (Continued) | ||
I. Check kirk key in MKB 2C (Inverter | I. Check kirk key in MKB 2C (Inverter | ||
- I. Perform the following: | - I. Perform the following: | ||
No. SKX Manual Bypass SW Alternate Supply) INSTALLED. | No. SKX Manual Bypass SW Alternate Supply) INSTALLED. | ||
: 1) Ensure MKA-1, F1C (lnverter No. | : 1) Ensure MKA-1, F1C (lnverter No. | ||
SKX Manual Bypass SW Alternate Supply) is open. | SKX Manual Bypass SW Alternate Supply) is open. | ||
Line 3,247: | Line 2,959: | ||
SWITCH is selected to ALTERNATE AC SOURCE TO LOAD. | SWITCH is selected to ALTERNATE AC SOURCE TO LOAD. | ||
: 4) Check the following indications: 4) Perform the following: | : 4) Check the following indications: 4) Perform the following: | ||
LI SYSTEM OUTPUT VOLTAGE - a) jf System output voltage is less 116 124 VOLTS | LI SYSTEM OUTPUT VOLTAGE - a) jf System output voltage is less 116 124 VOLTS than 110 Volts, THEN RETURN T.Step2. | ||
than 110 Volts, THEN RETURN T.Step2. | |||
Li SYSTEM OUTPUT FREQUENCY 59.7 60.3 HZ | Li SYSTEM OUTPUT FREQUENCY 59.7 60.3 HZ | ||
- - b) if System output voltage is greater than 110 Volts, THEN Li SYSTEM OUTPUT CURRENT - notify IAE to investigate LESS THAN 292 AMPS. abnormal indication as time allows. | - - b) if System output voltage is greater than 110 Volts, THEN Li SYSTEM OUTPUT CURRENT - notify IAE to investigate LESS THAN 292 AMPS. abnormal indication as time allows. | ||
MNS LOSS OF VITAL OR AUX CONTROL POWER PAGE NO. | MNS LOSS OF VITAL OR AUX CONTROL POWER PAGE NO. | ||
AP111A15500115 279 Enclosure 24 Page 26 of 31 | AP111A15500115 279 Enclosure 24 Page 26 of 31 UNIT 1 Restoring Power To KXB Rev 21 uwwornWD | ||
UNIT 1 Restoring Power To KXB Rev 21 uwwornWD | |||
: 7. (Continued) | : 7. (Continued) | ||
: p. On SKX Static Inverter, ensure ALARM CIRCUIT is OFF. | : p. On SKX Static Inverter, ensure ALARM CIRCUIT is OFF. | ||
Line 3,274: | Line 2,981: | ||
: b. Circle KRA in Note prior to Step 8. | : b. Circle KRA in Note prior to Step 8. | ||
: c. Check MKB 1A (240/120 VAC | : c. Check MKB 1A (240/120 VAC | ||
: c. IP. Step 8.e. | : c. IP. Step 8.e. | ||
Regulated Power Pnlbd No. KRB) - | Regulated Power Pnlbd No. KRB) - | ||
Line 3,282: | Line 2,988: | ||
follows: | follows: | ||
U On 1KU lnv Byp Panel, check INVERTER SUPPLYING LOAD light LIT. | U On 1KU lnv Byp Panel, check INVERTER SUPPLYING LOAD light LIT. | ||
U On 1 KU mv Byp Panel, check 1 KU MAN BYP SW in - NORMAL OPERATI ON. | U On 1 KU mv Byp Panel, check 1 KU MAN BYP SW in - NORMAL OPERATI ON. | ||
MNS LOSS OF VITAL OR AUX CONTROL POW AP111A15500115 ER PAGE NO. | MNS LOSS OF VITAL OR AUX CONTROL POW AP111A15500115 ER PAGE NO. | ||
Enclosure 24 Page 28 of 31 279 UNIT 1 | Enclosure 24 Page 28 of 31 279 UNIT 1 Restoring Power To KXB ReV.21 DDLILILIULILIULIDDDDLILILILILI LILILIDLILIDLILILILIrnLILI | ||
Restoring Power To KXB ReV.21 DDLILILIULILIULIDDDDLILILILILI LILILIDLILIDLILILILIrnLILI | |||
: 8. (Continued) | : 8. (Continued) | ||
: f. Check if KXA Inverter is in service as follows: f. Circle KXA in Note prior to Step 8. | : f. Check if KXA Inverter is in service as follows: f. Circle KXA in Note prior to Step 8. | ||
LI On KXA Static Inverter Bypass Panel, check INVERTER SUPPLYING LOAD light LIT.- | LI On KXA Static Inverter Bypass Panel, check INVERTER SUPPLYING LOAD light LIT.- | ||
LI On KXA Static lriverter Bypass Panel, check the MANUAL BYPASS SWITCH in NORMAL | LI On KXA Static lriverter Bypass Panel, check the MANUAL BYPASS SWITCH in NORMAL OPERATION. | ||
OPERATION. | |||
: g. Check if 2KU Inverter is in service as follows: | : g. Check if 2KU Inverter is in service as follows: | ||
: g. Circle 2KU in Note prior to Step 8. | : g. Circle 2KU in Note prior to Step 8. | ||
LI On 2KU lnv Byp Panel, check INVERTER SUPPLYING LOAD light LIT. | LI On 2KU lnv Byp Panel, check INVERTER SUPPLYING LOAD light LIT. | ||
LI On 2KU lnv Byp Panel, check 2KU MAN BYP SW in NORMAL OPERATION. | |||
LI On 2KU lnv Byp Panel, check 2KU MAN BYP SW in NORMAL | |||
OPERATION. | |||
MNS LOSS OF VITAL OR AUX CONTROL POWER PAGE NO. | MNS LOSS OF VITAL OR AUX CONTROL POWER PAGE NO. | ||
AP/11A15500/15 Enclosure 24 Page 29 of 31 | AP/11A15500/15 Enclosure 24 Page 29 of 31 279 UNET 1 Restoring Power To KXB Rev 21 urnurnurnrnornrnrnrn ornwrnrnrn | ||
279 UNET 1 Restoring Power To KXB Rev 21 urnurnurnrnornrnrnrn ornwrnrnrn | |||
: 8. (Continued) | : 8. (Continued) | ||
: h. In Unit 2 MG Set Room, check if I KDCSI Inverter is in service as follows: | : h. In Unit 2 MG Set Room, check if I KDCSI Inverter is in service as follows: | ||
: 1) On SKDCS Alignment Panel 1) Perform the following: | : 1) On SKDCS Alignment Panel 1) Perform the following: | ||
(column CC-59), check SKDCS SELECTOR SWITCH in OFF. | (column CC-59), check SKDCS SELECTOR SWITCH in OFF. | ||
a) IF SKDCS SELECTOR SWITCH in MKB position, THEN GOTO Step 8.h.2). | a) IF SKDCS SELECTOR SWITCH in MKB position, THEN GOTO Step 8.h.2). | ||
b) if SKDCS SELECTOR SWITCH in MKA position, THEN perform the following: | b) if SKDCS SELECTOR SWITCH in MKA position, THEN perform the following: | ||
Line 3,321: | Line 3,016: | ||
MNS LOSS OF VITAL OR AUX CONTROL POWER APIIIAI5500/15 PAGE NO. | MNS LOSS OF VITAL OR AUX CONTROL POWER APIIIAI5500/15 PAGE NO. | ||
Enclosure 24 Page 30 of 31 | Enclosure 24 Page 30 of 31 244 of 279 UNIT 1 Restoring Power To KXB Rev. 21 ornrnrnrnrnrnrnrnrnu | ||
244 of 279 UNIT 1 Restoring Power To KXB Rev. 21 ornrnrnrnrnrnrnrnrnu | |||
: 8. (Continued) | : 8. (Continued) | ||
: i. In Unit 2 MG Set Room, check if 2KDCS1 Inverter is in service as follows: | : i. In Unit 2 MG Set Room, check if 2KDCS1 Inverter is in service as follows: | ||
Line 3,337: | Line 3,030: | ||
: j. Check the total number of panelboards | : j. Check the total number of panelboards | ||
: j. Observe Caution prior to Step 8.1 and circled in Note prior to Step 8 LESS | : j. Observe Caution prior to Step 8.1 and circled in Note prior to Step 8 LESS | ||
]Q. Step 8.1. | ]Q. Step 8.1. | ||
THAN OR EQUAL TO TWO. | THAN OR EQUAL TO TWO. | ||
Line 3,343: | Line 3,035: | ||
MNS LOSS OF VITAL OR AUX CONTROL POWER PAGE NO. | MNS LOSS OF VITAL OR AUX CONTROL POWER PAGE NO. | ||
API1/A15500115 Enclosure 24 Page 31 of 31 | API1/A15500115 Enclosure 24 Page 31 of 31 245 of 279 UNIT 1 Restoring Power To KXB Rev. 21 UDDUWWW nwnrnrnrnrnrnrn | ||
245 of 279 UNIT 1 Restoring Power To KXB Rev. 21 UDDUWWW nwnrnrnrnrnrnrn | |||
: 8. (Continued) | : 8. (Continued) | ||
CAUTION If KXB panelboard is aligned to MKB in subsequent steps, the transformer supplying both MKA and MKB may become overloaded, depending on actual loads at that moment. | CAUTION If KXB panelboard is aligned to MKB in subsequent steps, the transformer supplying both MKA and MKB may become overloaded, depending on actual loads at that moment. | ||
Line 3,354: | Line 3,044: | ||
: m. Perform one of the following based on previous evaluation: | : m. Perform one of the following based on previous evaluation: | ||
IF station management decides to proceed with placing KXB on MKB, THEN RETURN ] Step 7.j. | IF station management decides to proceed with placing KXB on MKB, THEN RETURN ] Step 7.j. | ||
OR | OR IF station management desires to align KXB panelboard to another source, THEN RETURN ] Step 2.}} | ||
IF station management desires to align KXB panelboard to another source, THEN RETURN ] Step 2.}} |
Latest revision as of 18:26, 11 March 2020
ML102640724 | |
Person / Time | |
---|---|
Site: | McGuire, Mcguire |
Issue date: | 08/30/2010 |
From: | NRC/RGN-II |
To: | Duke Energy Carolinas, Duke Power Co |
References | |
50-369/10-301, 50-370/10-301, ES-301, ES-301-2 50-369/10-301, 50-370/10-301 | |
Download: ML102640724 (233) | |
Text
ES-301 Control Room/In-Plant Systems Outline Form ES-301-2 FINAL Facility: McGuire Date of Examination: 8/2/10 Exam Level (circle one): RO (only)! SRO(l) / SRO (U) Operating Test No.: N 10-1 Control Room Systems@ (8 for RO; 7 for SRO-l; 2 or 3 for SRO-U, including 1 ESF)
Type Code* Safety System / JPM Title Function
- a. 006 Emergency Core Cooling System SD,EN 2 Transfer the NI Pumps from Cold Leg Recirc to Hot Leg Recirc
- b. 005 Residual Heat Removal System S,D,A,L 4P Respond to ND System Malfunction While at Mid Loop
- c. 056 Condensate System S,N,A 4S Swap Hotwell/CM Booster Pumps
- d. 026 Containment Spray System S,P,D,A,EN 5 Manually Actuate Containment Spray System
- e. APE 077 Generator Voltage and Electric Grid Disturbances S,N,A 6 Separate From the Electrical Grid Due to Low Grid Frequency
- f. 015 Nuclear Instrumentation System S,P,M 7 Restore Repaired Power Range Channel to Service
- g. 075 Circulating Water System Isolate the Circulating Water System During Turbine Building S N 8 Flooding
- h. 010 Pressurizer Pressure Control System S,N,A 3 Remove Pressurizer Heaters from Service In-Plant Systems@ (3 for RO; 3 for SRO-l; 3 or 2 for SRO-U)
- j. 008 Component Cooling Water System D,R,E 8 Makeup to the Unit I KC Surge Tanks
- k. APE 057 Loss of Vital AC Electrical Instrument Bus D,R,E 6 Restore Power to KXB Power Panel Board Using lnverter SKX NUREG-1 021, Revision 9
ES-301 Control Room/In-Plant Systems Outline Form ES-301-2 FINAL
@ All RO and SRO-l control room (and in-plant) systems must be different and serve different safety functions; all 5 SRO-U systems must serve different safety functions; in-plant systems and functions may overlap those tested in the control room.
Type Codes Criteria for RO I SRO-l I SRO-U (A)lternate path 4-6 (5) /4-6 (4) I 2-3 (3)
(C)ontrol room (D)irect from bank 9 (6) / 8 (6) I 4 (4)
(E)mergency or abnormal in-plant 1 (3) I 1 (3) I 1 (2)
(EN)gineered Safety Feature - I - I 1 (1) (Control Room System)
(L)ow-Power I Shutdown 1 (1) I 1 (1) I 1 (1)
(N)ew or (M)odified from bank including 1 (A) 2 (5) / 2 (4) 1 1 (1)
(P)revious 2 exams 3 (2) / 3 (2)! 2 (1) (Randomly Selected)
(R)CA 1 (2)/1 (2)Il (2)
(S)imulator JPM Summary JPM A This is bank JPM-PS-NC-1 17. The operator will be told Unit 1 experienced a Loss of Coolant Accident six (6) hours ago, and that the plant is operating in the Cold Leg Recirculation mode. The operator will be directed to Transfer Recirculation to Hot Leg Recirc PER EP/1/A15000/ES-1 .4 (Transfer to Hot Leg Recirculation). The operator will be expected to align the NI System to the Hot Leg Recirc Mode.
JPM B This is bank JPM PS-ND-183A. The operator will be told that Unit 1 is in Mode 5 with the NC System drained to approximately 10 inches, that 1A ND Pump is in service to all four Cold Legs, and that ND flow has suddenly increased. The operator will be directed to implement AP/1/A15500/1 9 (Loss of ND or ND System Leakage). The operator will be expected to take manual action to control flow, but recognize that attempts to manually control the RHR HX Outlet Valve and the Bypass Valve are ineffective (Alternate Path).
The operator will be expected to throttle ND flow to less than 3000 gpm using the Cold Leg injection valve(s) and position the ND Heat Exchanger Outlet Manual Loaders so that when these valves are repaired, the ND flow will not be affected.
JPM C This is a new JPM. The operator will be told that Unit I is operating at 90% power in preparation for a Condensate System Pump Swap. The operator will be directed to start the C Hotwell Pump, and place the A Hotwell Pump in standby, and then start the C Condensate Booster Pump and place the A Condensate Booster Pump in standby using Enclosure 4.5 of OP/1/A/6250/001 (Condensate and Feedwater System). The operator will be expected to swap both sets of pumps in accordance with the procedure. During the course of swapping the Condensate Booster Pumps, the operator will recognize that the C Hotwell Pump Strainer High AP Annunciator will alarm (Alternate Path). The operator will be expected to use the Annunciator Response Procedure and re-start the A Hotwell Pump, and stop the C Hotwell Pump.
JPM D This JPM is a bank JPM, and was previously used on the 2008 NRC Operating Test.
The operator will be placed in a Post-Reactor Trip situation and told that the crew has progressed from EP/1/A/5000/E-0 (Reactor Trip and/or Safety Injection) to EP/1/A/5000/ES-0.1 (Reactor Trip Response) due to a reactor trip. The operator will be told that after entry into ES-0.1 a LOCA occurs inside the Containment causing a Safety NUREG-1 021, Revision 9
ES-301 Control Room/In-Plant Systems Outline Form ES-301-2 FINAL Injection; and that the crew has now left ES-0.1 for EP/1IA/5000IFR-Z.l (Response to High Containment Pressure) due to the Orange Path condition on the Containment Critical Safety Function, completing steps 1-9. The operator will be directed to check the NS System in Operation in accordance with step 10 of FR-Z. 1. Although Containment Pressure will be > 3 psig, automatic actuation of Containment Spray (NS) will have failed. Additionally, the NS manual actuators will fail to operate requiring that the operator take manual action to start the NS Pumps and open the discharge valves. The operator will need to manually open the NS Pump discharge valves and manually start the NS Pumps. When attempts are made to manually open the A Train discharge valves, they will not open (Alternate Path), requiring the operator to make no attempt to start the 1A NS pump.
JPM E This is a new JPM. With the plant at 77% power, the operator will be told that the crew has entered AP/1/A15500/05 (Generator Voltage and Electrical Grid Disturbances) due to low Electrical Grid frequency, and that the procedure is completed up to Step 15. The operator will be directed to separate from the Electrical Grid without delay in accordance with Step 15 of AP/1/A/5500/05 (Generator Voltage and Electrical Grid Disturbances).
Since plant power is greater than 60%, the operator will be required to reduce load.
When the operator attempts to operate the turbine in automatic, Turbine power will fail to lower (Alternate Path). The operator will be expected to recognize that the Turbine has failed, and lower power manually, and then disconnect the Turbine Generator from the Electrical Grid.
JPM F This JPM is a modified version of a similar JPM used on the 2009 NRC Operating Test.
The Operator will be placed in a situation with Unit 1 at 100% power. The operator will be told that Power Range Channel N43 has previously failed low, and that the channel has been defeated in accordance with AP/1/A/5500/16, Malfunction of Nuclear Instrumentation, Case III, Power Range Malfunction. The operator will be asked to restore Power Range Channel N43 to service in accordance with Step 21 of AP16, Malfunction of Nuclear Instrumentation, Case III, Power Range Malfunction. The operator will be required to restore the channel to service in accordance with the procedure.
JPM G This is a new JPM. The operator will be told that there is massive flooding in the Turbine Building and that the crew has implemented AP/0/A15500/44 (Plant Flooding), Enclosure 1 (Unit 1 Turbine Bldg Flooding). The operator will be directed to isolate the RC System by performing steps 6.d-v of the procedure, while the crew continues with EP/1/A/5000/E-0 (Reactor Trip and/or Safety Injection). The operator will be expected to take all pump and valve control switch manipulations to isolate the RC System. This task was chosen because Internal Flooding events are a large PRA contributor (15%
CDF). This is a Time Critical JPM that must be complete in 40 Minutes.
JPM H This is a new JPM. The operator will be told that plant power has just been raised to 100% per OP/1/A/6100/003 (Controlling Procedure for Unit Operation). The operator will be directed to remove Pzr Heater Groups A, B and D from service per Enclosure 4.6 (Operation of Pzr Heaters) of OP/1/A16100/003. The operator will be expected to remove the A, B and D Pzr Heater Groups from service in accordance with Step 3.4.4 of Enclosure 4.6. After the Pzr Pressure Master has been placed in MANUAL and its output has been adjusted, the Pzr variable Heaters (Group C) will fail (Alternate Path).
The operator will be required to respond to MCB Annunciator 1AD6/D6 (PZR HTR CONTROLLER TROUBLE), and manually control pressure using the other heater NUREG-1 021, Revision 9
ES-301 Control Room/In-Plant Systems Outline Form ES-301-2 FINAL groups. The operator will be expected to place at least one Pzr Heater Group in service in accordance with Step 3.3.1 (or equivalent) of Enclosure 4.6.
JPM I This is Bank JPM STM-SM-1 07. The Operator will be told that a Loss of Control Room has occurred and AP/1/A/5500/17 (Loss of Control Room) has been implemented, that Steam Generator pressure is discovered to be 1185 psig, and the CRS desires to reduce pressure below the Safety Valve lift setpoint. The operator will be directed to locally control Steam Generator Pressure with the SM PORVs per AP/1/A/5500/17 (Loss of Control Room) Enclosure 7 (Manual Operation of PORVs). The operator will be expected to open isv-i and 1SV-19 to 10% open and control their position from the Unit 1 exterior doghouse.
JPM J This is bank JPM PSS-KC-165T. The operator will be told that Unit I is operating at 100% power when the KC Surge Tank A and B lo level computer alarms are received, that the surge tank levels are 3.9 feet and decreasing, and that AP/i/A/5500/21 (Loss of KC or KC System Leakage) has been implemented. Since the YM System will be out of service, the operator will be directed to initiate makeup to both Unit 1 KC Surge Tanks AP/1/A/5500/21 (Loss of KC or KC System Leakage), Enclosure 3 (Aligning RN Makeup to KC Surge Tank). This is a Time Critical JPM. The operator will be expected to manipulate valves, and communicate with the C/R to restore KC Surge Tank level within ten minutes of dispatch. This is a Time Critical JPM that must be complete in 10 Minutes.
JPM K This is bank JPM EL-EPK-199. The operator will be told that AP/1/A15500/15 (Loss of Vital or Aux Control Power) has been implemented due to a loss of Aux Control Power Panel Board KXB, and that prior to the event, all electrical systems were aligned in their normal operating configurations. The operator will be directed to energize KXB using inverter SKX per Enclosure 24 of AP/i/A/5500/15 (Loss of Vital or Aux Control Power).
The operator will be expected to align Inverter 5KX to provide power to KXB power panel board.
NUREG-i 021, Revision 9
Appendix C Job Performance Measure Form ES-C-I Worksheet SIM JPM A 2010 Systems Control Room JPM A
- NUREG 1021, Revision 9
Appendix C Page 2 of 9 Form ES-C-I Job Performance Measure Worksheet Facility: McGuire Task No,:
Task
Title:
Transfer the NI Pumps from Cold JPM No.: 2010 Systems Control Leg Recirc to Hot Leg Recirc Room JPM A K/A
Reference:
006,A4.01, 4.1/3.9 Examinee: NRC Examiner:
Facility Evaluator: Date:
Method of testing:
Simulated Performance: Actual Performance: X Classroom Simulator X Plant READ TO THE EXAMINEE I will explain the initial conditions, which steps to simulate or discuss, and provide initiating cues. When you complete the task successfully, the objective for this Job Performance Measure will be satisfied.
Initial Conditions: Unit I experienced a Loss of Coolant Accident six (6) hours ago.
Transfer to Cold Leg Recirculation (EP/1/A/5000/ES-I .3) is complete.
Task Standard: The NI System is realigned to the Hot Leg Recirc Mode.
Required Materials: None General
References:
EP/1/A/5000/ES-I .3 (Transfer to Cold Leg Recirc)
EP/1/A/5000/ES-1 .4 (Transfer to Hot Leg Recirc)
Handouts: EP/l/A/5000/ES-1 .4 (Transfer to Hot Leg Recirc)
Initiating Cue: The CRS has directed you to Transfer to Hot Leg Recirc f EP/1/A/5000/ES-1 .4 (Transfer to Hot Leg Recirculation).
Time Critical Task: NO Validation Time: 8 minutes 2010 Systems Control Room JPM A
- NUREG 1021, Revision 9
Appendix C Page 3 of 9 Form ES-C-I Job Performance Measure Worksheet SIMULATOR OPERATIONAL GUIDELINES
- 1. Reset the Simulator to IC-20 (100% Power BOL)
- 2. Insert Malfunction NC0008A (Cold Leg LOCA)
- 3. From CAEP, open and run file ZZNIVLVI to restore power to the following valves:
NI 162 - (L) NI 19, SET = Racked In NI 121 - (L) NI 22, SET = Racked In NI 152 - (L) NI 23, SET = Racked In NI 173 - (L) NI 24, SET = Racked In NI 178 - (L) NI 25, SET Racked In
- 4. Insert LOA NI 26, SET = Racked In, to restore power to NI 183
- 5. Allow Accident to continue until the FWST Lo Level Alarm sounds and the Auto Transfer of ND to Cold Leg Recirc initiates Note: To lower FWST to Lo Alarm level set: ASISRWST=800000 with Monitor
- 6. Complete the transfer to Cold Leg Recirc Per EP/1/A/5000/ES-1 .3 (Transfer To Cold Leg Recirc)
Note: To lower FWST to Lo-Lo Alarm set: ASISRWST2I 0000 with Monitor
- 7. Allow the NS System to bring FWST level to the LO LO level setpoint then Transfer NS to Cold Leg Recirc
- 8. Freeze the Simulator OR
- 1. Reset Simulator to Temporary Snap IC-241 (April, 2010).
- 2. REMOVE White Tag Stickers from the following Valves:
- INI-121A
- 3. Momentarily place Simulator in Run to acknowledge alarms/Reset SLIMS.
- 4. Leave Simulator in FREEZE until operator is ready to begin.
2010 Systems Control Room JPM A NUREG 1021, Revision 9
Appendix C Page 4 of 9 Form ES-C-i PERFORMANCE INFORMATION (Denote Critical Steps with an asterisk*)
Provide Candidate with Initial Conditions/Cue (Last Page of this JPM), and Handout EP/11A15000!ES-1.4 (Transfer to Hot Leg Recirc).
START TIME:
STEPS ELEMENTS STANDARD S/U COMMENTS REQUIRED FOR UNSAT Simulator Instructor NOTE: Leave Simulator in FREEZE until operator is ready to begin.
- 1 The operator depresses the (Step 1) Align NI flow path for Hot Leg Recirc: 1A NI Pump STOP pushbutton and observes (Step ia) Stop iA NI the Green status light LIT, Pump. Red status light OFF.
The operator observes motor amps go to 0, and pump flow (1 NIP-5450) lower to 0.
- 2 The operator depresses the (Step ib) Close iNl-i i8A (Train A NI to Cold Leg 1 NI-i 1 8A CLOSE lsol). pushbutton and observes Green status light LIT, Red status light OFF.
3 (Step 1 .c) Check 1 NI-i 1 8A The operator observes the (Train A NI to Cold Leg Isol) 1NI-il8A Green status light CLOSED. LIT, Red status light OFF.
- 4 The operator depresses the (Step 1.d) Open 1NI-i2lA (Train A NI to B &C Hot lNli2iA OPEN Leg) pushbutton and observes Red status light LIT, Green status light OFF.
5 (Step i.e) Check 1NI-i2iA The operator observes the (Train A NI to B &C Hot iNl-i2lA Red status light Leg) OPEN.
LIT, Green status light OFF.
2010 Systems Control Room JPM A NUREG 1021, Revision 9
Appendix C Page 5 of 9 Form ES-C-i PERFORMANCE INFORMATION STEPS ELEMENTS STANDARD S/U COMMENTS REQUIRED FOR UNSAT
- 6 (Step 1 .f) Start IA NI Pump. The operator depresses the IA NI Pump START pushbutton and observes the Red status light LIT, Green status light OFF.
The operator observes motor amps rise, peak and stabilize, and pump flow (1 NIP-5450) rise to 440 gpm.
- 7 (Step l.g) Stop lB NI The operator depresses the Pump. lB NI Pump STOP pushbutton and observes the Green status light LIT, Red status light OFF.
The operator observes motor amps go to 0, and pump flow (1NIP-5120) lower to 0.
(Step i.h) Close 1NI-150B The operator depresses the (Train B NI to Cold Leg 1NI-150B CLOSE Isol). pushbutton and observes Green status light LIT, Red status light OFF.
(Step Ii) Close INI-162A The operator depresses the (NI Pumps Cold Leg Isol). INI-162A CLOSE pushbutton and observes Green status light LIT, Red status light OFF.
(Step l.j) Open INI-152B The operator depresses the (Train B NI to A & D Hot 1NI-152B OPEN Leg). pushbutton and observes Red status light LIT, Green status light OFF.
2010 Systems Control Room JPM A
- NUREG 1021, Revision 9
Appendix C Page 6 of 9 Form ES-C-i PERFORMANCE INFORMATION STEPS ELEMENTS STANDARD S/U COMMENTS REQUIRED FOR UNSAT ii (Step i.k) Check if lB NI Pump should be started:
The operator observes the
. 1NI-150B (Train B NI to 1NJ-150B Green status light Cold Leg lsol) - LIT, Red status light OFF.
CLOSED The operator observes the
. I NI-152B (Train B NI to INI-152B Red status light A & D Hot Leg ) OPEN LIT, Green status light OFF.
- 12 (Step 1.1) Start NI Pump lB. The operator depresses the lB NI Pump START pushbutton and observes the Red status light LIT, Green status light OFF.
The operator observes motor amps rise, peak and stabilize, and pump flow (1NIP-5120) rise to 45O.
13 (Step 1 .m) Check the The operator observes that following windows on ESF each of the ESF Monitor Monitor Light Panel, Group Light Panel windows are 5 LIT:
- LIT.
. A-I INI-118ATRAINA NI TO CL ISOL CLOSED
. 8-1 1NI-121ATRAINA NI TO HL ISOL OPEN
. A-8 lNl-I50 TRAIN B NI TO CL ISOL CLOSED
. A-31NI-162ANI PUMPS COLD LEG ISOL CLOSED
. B-8 1NI-152 TRAIN B NI TO HL ISOL OPEN 2010 Systems Control Room JPM A
- NUREG 1021, Revision 9
Appendix C Page 7 of 9 Form ESC-1 PERFORMANCE INFORMATION STEPS ELEMENTS STANDARD S/U COMMENTS REQUIRED FOR UNSAT 14 (Step 2) Check flow from at The operator observes that least one train of NI - flow meter for 1A (1 NIP-ESTABLISHED. 5450) indicates 450 gpm.
The operator observes that flow meter for lB (INIP 5120) indicates 440 gpm.
15 (Step 3) RETURN TO The operator reports to the procedure and step in effect CRS that the procedure is complete.
Terminating Cue: Evaluation on this JPM is complete.
STOP TIME:
2010 Systems Control Room JPM A
- NUREG 1021, Revision 9
Appendix C Page 8 of 9 Form ES-C-i VERIFICATION OF COMPLETION Job Performance Measure No.: 2010 Systems Control Room JPM A Examinees Name:
Date Performed:
Facility Evaluator:
Numberof Attempts:
Time to Complete:
Question Documentation:
Result: SAT UNSAT Examiners Signature: Date:
2010 Systems Control Room JPM A
- NUREG 102i, Revision 9
Appendix C Form ES-C-i JPM CUE SHEET INITIAL CONDITIONS: Unit 1 experienced a Loss of Coolant Accident six (6) hours ago.
Transfer to Cold Leg Recirculation (EPI1IAI5000IES-1 .3) is complete.
INITIATING CUE: The CRS has directed you to Transfer to Hot Leg Recirc PER EPII/A5000/ES-1 .4 (Transfer to Hot Leg Recirculation).
NUREG 1021, Revision 9
I MNS EP/1/A/5000IES-1.4 TRANSFER TO HOT LEG RECIRC PAGE NO.
1 of 5 UNIT1 A. Purpose This procedure provides the necessary instructions for transferring the Safety Injection System to Hot Leg Recirc.
B. Symptoms or Entry Conditions This procedure is entered from:
- EP/1/A/5000/E-1 (Loss Of Reactor Or Secondary Coolant), Step 20 when the specified time interval has elapsed.
- RP/OIA/5700/026 (Operations/Engineering Required Actions In The Technical Support Center (TSC)), when a decision has been made by the TSC that transfer to Hot Leg Recirc is required.
Transfer to Hot Leg Recirc may be required, eventually, after transferring to Cold Leg Recirc during the implementation of:
- a. EP/1/A/5000/ES-1.2 (Post LOCA Cooldown And Depressurization).
- b. EP/1/A/5000/ECA-3.1 (SGTR With Loss Of Reactor Coolant Subcooled Recovery Desired).
- c. EP/1/A/5000/ECA-3.2 (SGTR With Loss Of Reactor Coolant Saturated Recovery Desired).
MNS TRANSFER TO HOT LEG RECIRC PAGE NO.
EPII/A/5000!ES-1.4 2 of 5 Rev. 4 UNIT 1 ACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSE RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED C. Operator Actions I. Align NI flow path for Hot Leg Recirc as follows:
- a. Stop 1A NI Pump.
- b. Close INI-118A(TrainANlToCold Leg Iso!).
- c. Check 1 NI-I 1 8A (Train A NI To Cold c. Perform the following:
Leg Isol) CLOSED.
- 1) IF 1NI-118A is in intermediate position, THEN wait up to 30 seconds for valve to complete valve movement.
- 2) IF 1 NI-i 1 8A is closed, THEN GO JQ.Step id.
- 3) IF 1 NI-i 1 8A will not close, THEN QIQ Step 1g.
- d. Open 1NI-i2iA (Train A NI To B & C Hot Leg).
- e. Check iNl-i2iA (Train A NI To B & C e. Perform the following:
Hot Leg) OPEN.
I) IF iNl-121A is in intermediate position, THEN wait up to 30 seconds for valve to complete valve movement.
- 2) IF INI-i2iA is open, THEN IQ Step i.f.
- 3) IF iNl-121A will not open, THEN QjQ.Step 1.g.
- f. Start iA NI Pump.
- g. Stop lB NI Pump.
- h. Close 1NI-1 SOB (Train B NI To Cold Leg Isol).
- i. Close 1NI-i62A (NI Pumps Cold Leg Isol).
MNS TRANSFER TO HOT LEG RECIRC PAGE NO.
EPI1IAI5000IES-1.4 3of5 Rev. 4 UNIT 1 ACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSE RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED
- 1. (Continued)
- j. Open 1NI-152B (Train B NI To A & D Hot Leg).
- k. Check if 1 B NI Pump should be started: k. Perform the following:
. 1NI-150B (Train B NI To Cold Leg 1) if valve(s) in intermediate position, Isol) CLOSED
- THEN wait up to 30 seconds to allow valves to complete valve
. 1NI-152B (Train B NI To A & D Hot movement.
Leg) OPEN.
- 2) IF valves are properly aligned, THEN çQ] Step 1.1.
- 3) if either valve fails to go to its required position, THEN GOTO Step i.m.
I. Start lB NI Pump.
- m. Check the following windows on ESF m. Notify station management of valve Monitor Light Panel, Group 5 LIT:
- positions.
A-i 1NI-1I8ATRAINANITOCL ISOL CLOSED
. B-i 1NI-121ATRAINANITQHL ISOL OPEN
. A-8 1NI-150 TRAIN B NI TO CL ISOL CLOSED
. A-3 1 NI-i 62A NI PUMPS COLD LEG ISOL CLOSED
. B-8 1NI-152 TRAIN B NI TO HL ISOL OPEN.
- 2. Check flow from at least one train of NI - Perform the following:
ESTABLISHED.
- a. Notify station management that NI flow not indicated.
- b. IF both trains of NI have failed to operate in Hot Leg Recirc mode, THEN Step 4.
MNS TRANSFER TO HOT LEG RECIRC PAGE NO.
EP/1IAI5000IES-1 .4 4 of 5 Rev.4 UNIT 1 ACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSE RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED
- 3. RETURN IP. procedure and step in effect.
- 4. Align ND SIl flow path for Hot Leg Recirc as follows:
- a. Check the following valves CLOSED:
- a. Perform the following:
. 1 ND-i B (1 C NC Loop to ND Pumps 1) Contact station management to Isol) evaluate guidance to align NI or ND for Hot Leg Recirc.
. 1ND-2AC(1CNCL0opToND Pumps Cont Inside Isol) 2) RETURN ] procedure and step in effect.
. 1ND-30A(iANDTo1B&1CNC Hotlegs Isol)
. 1ND-i5B(1BNDT01B&1CNCH0t Legs Isol).
- b. Open 1NI-183B (UI ND to B & C Hot b. Perform the following:
Leg Cont Outside Isol).
- 1) Contact station management to evaluate guidance to align NI or ND for Hot Leg Recirc.
- 2) RETURN TO procedure and step in effect.
- c. ForANDtrain:
_1) Check 1NS-43A(lANDHxOutlet 1) GOjStep4.d.
to NS Cont Outside lsol) CLOSED.
_2) Close INI-i73A(1ANDt0A&B _2) QjQStep4.d.
Cold Legs Cont Outside Isol).
- 3) Open 1ND-30A (1A ND To lB & 1C 3) Open iNI-173A.
NC Hotlegs Isol).
- 4) Check the following windows on 4) Notify station management of valve ESF Monitor Light Panel, Group 5 - positions.
LIT:
. A-6 iNI-i83B ND TO HL B & C ISOL OPEN
. A-2 1 NI-i 73A TRAIN A ND TO CL A & B CLOSED.
MNS TRANSFER TO HOT LEG RECIRC PAGE NO.
EPI1/A/5000/ES-1 .4 5 of 5 Rev. 4 UNIT 1 ACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSE RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED
- 4. (Continued)
- d. ForBNDtrain:
- 1) Check 1 NS-38B (1 B ND Hx Outlet 1) Q j Step 5.
to NS Cont Outside Isol) CLOSED.
_2) Close 1NI-178B (lB ND to C & D _2) TQ Step 5.
Cold Legs Outside Isol).
- 3) Open IND-15B (lB ND To lB & 1C 3) Open INI-178B.
NC Hot Legs Isol).
- 4) Check the following windows on 4) Notify station management of valve ESF Monitor Light Panel, Group 5 - positions.
LIT:
. A-6INI-I83BNDTOHLB&C ISOL OPEN
. A-7 1NI-178B TRAIN B ND TO CL C & D CLOSED.
- 5. Check flow to NC hot legs from at least Contact station management to evaluate one train of ND ESTABLISHED.
- guidance to align NI or ND for Hot Leg Recirc.
- 6. RETURN ] procedure and step in effect.
END
Appendix C Job Performance Measure Form ES-C-I Worksheet SIM JPM B 2010 Systems Control Room JPM B
- NUREG 1021, Revision 9
Appendix C Page 2 of 1 1 Form ES-C-I Job Performance Measure Worksheet Facility: McGuire Task No.:
Task
Title:
Respond to ND System Malfunction JPM No.: 2010 Systems Control While at Mid Loop Room JPM B (Alternate Path)
K/A
Reference:
005, A4.01, 3.6/3.4 Examinee: NRC Examiner:
Facility Evaluator: Date:
Method of testing:
Simulated Performance: Actual Performance: X Classroom Simulator X Plant READ TO THE EXAMINEE I will explain the initial conditions, which steps to simulate or discuss, and provide initiating cues. When you complete the task successfully, the objective for this Job Performance Measure will be satisfied.
Initial Conditions: Unit 2 is at 100% power.
Unit I is in Mode 5 with the NC System drained to approximately 10 inches IA ND Pump is in service to all four Cold Legs.
ND flow has suddenly increased.
Task Standard: The A ND Train flow is throttled to less than 3000 gpm using INl-173 and INI-178; and positions the Manual Loaders for the lAand lB ND Heat Exchanger Outlets valves to full Open.
Required Materials: None General
References:
OP/1/A/6100/SD-20 (Draining the NC System)
AP/l/A/5500/19 (Loss of ND or ND System Leakage)
Handouts: AP/I/A/5500/19 (Loss of ND or ND System Leakage) 2010 Systems Control Room JPM B NUREG 1021, Revision 9
Appendix C Page 3 of I I Form ES-C-i Job Performance Measure Worksheet Initiating Cue: The CRS has directed you to implement AP!11A15500119 (Loss of ND or ND System Leakage) AND control ND flow so that NC Temperature is maintained at its present temperature Time Critical Task: NO Validation Time: 8 minutes 2010 Systems Control Room JPM B NUREG 1021, Revision 9
Appendix C Page 4 of 1 1 Form ES-C-I Job Performance Measure Worksheet SIMULATOR OPERATIONAL GUIDELINES
- 1. ResettoiC-Ol
- 2. Insert OVERRIDE/TRANSMITTERS:
A. XMT-NCOO8 (LNC_5991 NC SYS N/R LVL) = 10 B. XMT-NCOO9 (LNC_8470 NC LOOP A ULTRASONIC LEVEL) = 10 C. XMT-NCO1O (LNC_8460 NC LOOP C ULTRASONIC LEVEL) = 10 D. XMT-NCOO7 (LNC_5990 NC SYS W/R LVL) = 10
- 3. Insert MAL NDOO5B (ND Heat Exchanger Outlet Or Bypass Valve 1ND29) = 100 Insert MAL NDOO5C (ND Heat Exchanger Outlet Or Bypass Valve 1ND34) = 100
- 4. Place OAC point Ml P0828 (Ui AVG of FIVE HOTEST I/C THERMOCOUPLES) on 10 Minute trend.
- 5. Stabilize Incore Thermocouple temperature.
- 6. Freeze Simulator
- 7. Remove Red Tag stickers from the following Valves:
- iNl-178B OR
- 1. Reset to lC-242 (April, 2010)
- 2. REMOVE Red Tag Stickers from the following Valves:
- 3. Momentarily place Simulator in Run to acknowledge alarms/Reset SLIMS.
- 4. Leave Simulator in FREEZE until operator is ready to begin.
2010 Systems Control Room JPM B
- NUREG 1021, Revision 9
Appendix C Page 5 of I I - Form ES-C-i PERFORMANCE INFORMATION (Denote Critical Steps with an asterisk*)
Provide Candidate with Initial Conditions!Cue (Last Page of this JPM), and Handout AP/1 115019.
START TIME:
STEPS ELEMENTS STANDARD S/U COMMENTS REQUIRED FOR UNSAT Simulator Instructor NOTE: Leave Simulator in FREEZE until operator is ready to begin.
I (Step 1) Check ND pumps The operator observes the ANY RUNNING. IA ND Pump Red status light LIT, Green status light OFF, and motor amps to be 7O amps; and determines that the iA ND Pump is running.
2 (Step 2) Check if ND pumps The operator observes one should remain running: or more of the following instruments:
. INCP-5991 NC SYS (Step 2.a) NC level - N/R LVL GREATER THAN 4
- I NCP-8470 NC LOOP INCHES. A ULTRASONIC LEVEL
- 1NCP-5990 NC SYS W/R LVL And determines that NC Level is lO inches.
3 (Step 2.b) Check NC The operator observes the subcooling based on core NC Subcooling Monitors exit T/Cs GREATER (Train A or Train B) and THAN 0°F. determines that NC Subcooling is 1 15°F.
2010 Systems Control Room JPM B
- NUREG 1021, Revision 9
Appendix C Page 6 of Ii Form ES-C-I PERFORMANCE INFORMATION STEPS ELEMENTS STANDARD S/U COMMENTS REQUIRED FOR UNSAT 4 (Step 2.c) Check the The operator observes 1 ND following valves OPEN
-1 B and 1 ND-2AC on the
. 1ND-1B (IC NC Loop OAC (ND Graphic), seeing To ND Pumps Isol) that they are Red, determines that both valves are open.
. 1ND-2AC (1C NC Loop to ND Pumps Cont Note:
Inside Isol)
Both breaker status lights are OFF since the valves are de-energized in this mode.
5 (Step 2.d) IF AT ANY TIME The operator reads the NC level goes below 4 step, which is a continuous inches OR NC subcooling action step, and proceeds.
based on core exit T/Cs goes below 0°F, THEN .... Note:
It is not expected that the conditions for this continuous action step will be met during the performance of this JPM.
6 (Step 3) Check NC level - The operator observes one LESS THAN 15 INCHES or more of the following (TOP OF HOT LEG). instruments:
. INCP-5991 NC SYS N/R LVL
- INCP-8470 NC LOOP A ULTRASONIC LEVEL
. INCP-8460 NC LOOP C ULTRASONIC LEVEL
. 1NCP-5990 NC SYS W/R LVL And determines that NC Level is 10 inches.
2010 Systems Control Room JPM B
- NUREG 1021, Revision 9
Appendix C Page 7 of ii Form ES-C-i PERFORMANCE INFORMATION STEPS ELEMENTS STANDARD S/U COMMENTS REQUIRED FOR UNSAT 7 (Note prior to Step 4) ND The operator reads the flow control valves fail open Note, and proceeds.
on a loss of air.
Note:
A common air line failure has caused both 1ND29 (ND Heat Exchanger Outlet Or Bypass Valve) and 1ND34 (ND Heat Exchanger Outlet Or Bypass Valve) to fail open.
8 (Step 4) Check ND Flow The operator observes total control: ND system flow by observing INDP-519i(C &
(Step 4.a) Check total ND D Cold Leg) to be 2i75 system flow GREATER gpm, and i NDP-5i 81 (A &
THAN 3000 GPM. B Cold Leg) to be 2325 gpm; and determines that ND system flow is 4500 gpm.
(Step 4.b) Throttle the The operator attempts to following valves as adjust the position of both necessary to reduce ND I ND-29 and I ND-34 by System to less than 3000 adjusting the controller.
GPM:
. 1ND-14 (lB ND Hx The operator observes that Outlet Isol) controller adjustments do NOT impact total ND System flow still indicates
. I ND-29 (1A ND Hx 4500 gpm, and proceeds Outlet Isol) to Step 4.b RNO (Alternate Path).
. 1ND-34(1A&1BND Hx Byp Isol) 2010 Systems Control Room JPM B
- NUREG 1021, Revision 9
Appendix C Page 8 of 1 1 Form ES-C-I PERFORMANCE INFORMATION STEPS ELEMENTS STANDARD S/U COMMENTS REQUIRED FOR UNSAT
- 10 (Step 4.b RNO) Perform the following:
(Note prior to Step 4.b RNO The operator reads the b.1) When throttling closed Note and proceeds.
lNl-173A or 1NI-178B, the seal in circuit may cause The operator may observe the valve to fully close MCB flow indications, or before a drop in flow is flow on OAC (ND Screen).
seen. If the valve inadvertently closes, it may be pulsed open to the The operator depresses the desired flow. INI-173A/1NI-178B Close pushbutton and observes a (Step 4.b RNO b.1) Throttle reduction in flow rate to the the following valves as Cold Legs (operator should necessary to reduce ND be monitoring this System to less than 3000 parameter while throttling GPM: and both valves already have red and green lights lNl-173A(1ANDt0 LIT due to being in a B Cold Legs Cont throttled position).
Outside Isol)
INI-178B (lB ND to C & Note:
D Cold Legs Cont Outside Isol) The critical task is to reduce total flow to less than 3000 GPM. Operator may throttle one or both of the valves.
The operator observes total flow (1NDP-5181 and INDP-5191) to be less than 3000 gpm.
11 (Step 4.b RNO b.2) IF ND The operator checks for an Pump(s) cavitating, oscillation in flow, motor THEN amps and pressure, then determines ND pump is t cavitating, and proceeds to RNO step 4.b.3.
2010 Systems Control Room JPM B
- NUREG 1021, Revision 9
Appendix C Page 9 of 11 Form ES-C-i PERFORMANCE INFORMATION STEPS ELEMENTS STANDARD S/U COMMENTS REQUIRED FOR UNSAT
- 12 (Step 4.b RNO b.3) Place the following manual loaders in the full open position:
. I ND-29 (IA ND Hx The operator rotates the Outlet Isol) IND-29 manual loader counter-clockwise until the needle is at 100%.
The operator rotates the
. 1ND-14 (lB ND Hx IND-14 manual loader Outlet Isol) counter-clockwise until the needle is at 100%.
Note:
The critical task is to OPEN at least one of the two Manual Loaders.
Terminating Cue: Evaluation onthis JPM is complete.
STOP TIME:
2010 Systems Control Room JPMB
- NUREG 1021, Revision 9
Appendix C Page 10 of I I Form ES-C-I VERIFICATION OF COMPLETION Job Performance Measure No.: 2010 Systems Control Room JPM B Examinees Name:
Date Performed:
Facility Evaluator:
Number of Attempts:
Time to Complete:
Question Documentation:
Result: SAT UNSAT Examiners Signature: Date:
2010 Systems Control Room JPM B
- NUREG 1021, Revision 9
Appendix C Form ES-C-i JPM CUE SHEET Initial Conditions: Unit 2 is at 100% power.
Unit 1 is in Mode 5 with the NC System drained to approximately 10 inches.
1A ND Pump is in service to all four Cold Legs.
ND flow has suddenly increased.
INITIATING CUE: The CRS has directed you to implement AP!11A15500119 (Loss of ND or ND System Leakage) AND control ND flow so that NC Temperature is maintained at its present temperature.
NUREG 1021, Revision 9
of (Do> -C 4-.
11 LL C 0
Cu Cu I
0 E
4-uJ U, 0 Cl)
ZLOZ 01
MNS LOSS OF ND OR ND SYSTEM LEAKAGE PAGE NO.
API1IAI5500/19 2 of 217 Rev. 22 UNIT 1 ACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSE RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED B Symptoms ND pump tripped Known ND System leak A (B) ND PUMP LO FLOW TO COLD LEGS Alarm A (B) ND PUMP DISCHARGE HI PRESS Alarm ND pump low discharge pressure OAC alarm Core exit TICs high temperature OAC alarm NC SYSTEM LO LEVEL OAC alarm ND flow low OAC alarm.
Containment Sump level going up Refueling Cavity level going down ND pump flow going up NC System level going down NC System pressure going down Oscillating ND pump motor amps.
MNS LOSS OF ND OR ND SYSTEM LEAKAGE PAGE NO.
APIIIAI5500/19 3 of 217 Rev. 22 UNIT 1 ACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSE RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED C. Operator Actions CAUTION Changes in NC pressure could result in inaccuracies in NC Level indications.
- 1. Check ND pumps ANY RUNNING.
- GO TO Step 5.
- 2. Check if ND pumps should remain running:
- a. NC Level GREATER THAN
- a. Perform the following:
4 INCHES.
- 1) Stop ND pumps.
- 2) CLOSE the following valves:
& 1C NC Hotlegs Iso!)
. CLOSE IND-33 (1A ND Hx Byp Isol)
. CLOSE IND-18 (lB ND Hx Bypass)
. CLOSE 1ND-15B (lB ND To lB
& IC NC Hot Legs Isol).
_3) jStep5.
MNS LOSS OF ND OR ND SYSTEM LEAKAGE PAGE NO.
API1/A15500/19 4 of 217 Rev. 22 UNIT 1 ACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSE RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED
- 2. (Continued)
- b. Check NC subcooling based on core b. Perform the following:
exit T/Cs GREATER THAN 0°F.
- 1) Stop ND pump(s).
- 2) Ensure all NC pumps off.
- 3) CLOSE the following valves:
. CLOSE IND-30A(1A ND To lB
& 1C NC Hotlegs lsol)
. CLOSE 1ND-33 (1A ND Hx Byp Isol)
- CLOSE IND-18 (lB ND Hx Bypass)
. CLOSE 1ND-15B(IBNDTo1B
& IC NC Hot Legs lsol).
- 4) Q ] Step 5.
- c. Check the following valves OPEN:
- c. Perform the following:
Isol)
_2) ]Step5.
- IND-2AC(ICNCLoopToND Pumps Cont Inside Isol).
MNS LOSS OF ND OR ND SYSTEM LEAKAGE PAGE NO.
API1/A15500/19 5 of 217 Rev. 22 UNIT 1 ACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSE RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED
- 2. (Continued)
- d. IFATANY TIME NC level goes below 4 inches Q NC subcooling based on core exit T/Cs goes below 0°F, THEN perform the following:
- 1) Stop ND pump(s).
- 2) CLOSE the following valves:
. CLOSE 1ND-30A(1A ND To lB
& IC NC Hotlegs Isol)
. CLOSE IND-33 (1A ND Hx Byp Isol)
. CLOSE IND-18 (lB ND Hx Bypass)
. CLOSE IND-15B(IBNDT01B
& IC NC Hot Legs Isol).
- 3. Check NC level LESS THAN 15 INCHES
- Perform the followrng:
(TOP OF HOT LEG).
- a. if AT ANY TIME NC level is less than 15 inches, THEN observe Note prior to Step 4 and perform Step 4.
_b. .QTOStep5.
MNS LOSS OF ND OR ND SYSTEM LEAKAGE PAGE NO.
API1/A15500119 6 of 217 Rev. 22 UNIT 1 ACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSE RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED NOTE ND flow control valves fail open on a loss of air.
- 4. Check ND flow control:
- a. Check total ND System flow - a. Q ] Step 4.c.
GREATER THAN 3000 GPM.
- b. THROTTLE the following valves as b. Perform the following:
necessary to reduce ND System to less than 3000 GPM:
- 1ND-14 (lB ND Hx Outlet Isol) NOTE When throttling closed INI-l73Aor
- 1ND-29 (lAND Hx Outlet Isol) lNl-178B, the seal-in circuit may cause the
- I ND-34 (IA & I B ND Hx Byp IsbI). valve to fully close before a drop in flow is seen. If the valve inadvertently closes, it may be pulsed open to the desired flow.
- 1) THROTTLE the following valves as necessary to reduce ND System to less than 3000 GPM:
. 1NI-173A CiA ND to A & B Cold Legs Cont Outside Isol)
INI-178B(IBNDtoC&DCold Legs Outside Isol).
- 2) if ND pump(s) cavitating, THEN perform the following:
a) Stop ND pump(s) b) QTQStep5.
- 3) Place the following manual loaders in the full OPEN position:
- 1ND-29 (1A ND Hx Outlet Isol)
. IND-14 (lB ND Hx Outlet Isol).
_4) QjQStep4.f.
Appendix C Job Performance Measure Form ES-C-i Worksheet SIM JPM C 2010 Systems Control Room JPM C
- NUREG 1021, Revision 9
Appendix C Page 2 of 14 Form ES-C-i Job Performance Measure Worksheet Facility: McGuire Task No.:
Task
Title:
Swap Hotwell/CM Booster Pumps JPM No.: 2010 Systems Control Room JPM C (Alternate Path)
K/A
Reference:
056, A2.04, 2.6/2.8 Examinee: NRC Examiner:
Facility Evaluator: Date:
Method of testing:
Simulated Performance: Actual Performance: X Classroom Simulator X Plant READ TO THE EXAMINEE I will explain the initial conditions, which steps to simulate or discuss, and provide initiating cues. When you complete the task successfully, the objective for this Job Performance Measure will be satisfied.
Initial Conditions: Unit 1 is operating at 90% power in preparation for a Condensate System Pump Swap The A and the B Hotwell Pumps are running, with the C Hotwell Pump in Standby.
The A and the B Condensate Booster Pumps are running, with the C Condensate Booster Pump in Standby.
To support maintenance activities, it is desired to swap Condensate System Pumps.
U-i TB Rounds NEC (Bob) is standing by via radio, and has reported that the 1 C Hotwell Pump and the 1 C CM Booster Pump have been checked out and both are ready to start, and all operating parameters are normal.
Task Standard: The operator will start the C Hotwell Pump, and place the A Hotwell Pump in standby. Then, the operator will start the C Condensate Booster Pump, and place the A Condensate Booster Pump in standby.
The operator will then respond to an ARP, requiring that the A Hotwell Pump be restarted and the C Hotwell Pump removed from service.
Required Materials: None 2010 Systems Control Room JPM C NUREG 1021, Revision 9
Appendix C Page 3 of 14 Form ES-C-i Job Performance Measure Worksheet General
References:
OPI1/A/62501001 (Condensate and Feedwater System)
OP/1/A/6100/0iO I (Annunciator Response for Panel 1AD-8), Window A3, HTWL PUMP C STRNR HI DIP SOMP 01-02 (Reactivity Management)
OMP 8-i (Star and Peer Checking)
Handouts: Enclosure 4.5 (Swapping HotwelllCM Booster Pumps) of OPI1IAI6250I001 (Condensate and Feedwater System) marked up for place-keeping through step 3.1.
Initiating Cue: The CRS has directed you to start the C Hotwell Pump, and place the A Hotwell Pump in standby, and then start the C Condensate Booster Pump and place the A Condensate Booster Pump in standby using Enclosure 4.5 of OPI1IA/62501001, Condensate and Feedwater System.
All outstanding R&Rs that may have impacted the performance of this procedure have been evaluated.
Time Critical Task: NO Validation Time: 15 minutes 2010 Systems Control Room JPM C
- NUREG 1021, Revision 9
Appendix C Page 4 of 14 Form ES-C-i Job Performance Measure Worksheet SIMULATOR OPERATIONAL GUIDELINES
- 1. Reset simulator to 10-38, 90% power.
- 2. Place in RUN
- 3. Ensure both A and B Hotwell Pumps are running, and C Hotwell Pump is in Standby.
- 4. Ensure both A and B Condensate Booster Pumps are running, and C Condensate Booster Pump is in Standby.
- 5. Place XMT-CM01 I = 4, 10 second Ramp, on Trigger #1.
- 6. Freeze the Simulator OR
- 1. Reset to 10-243 (April, 2010)
- 2. Place Simulator in Run and acknowledge alarms/Reset SLIMS.
NOTE: During the performance of this JPM, the simulator operator will need to operate Trigger #1 at the end of Step 14 of this JPM, after switch has been placed in AUTO, and then clear this malfunction at Step 16.
2010 Systems Control Room JPM C NUREG 1021, Revision 9
Appendix C Page 5 of 14 Form ES-C-i PERFORMANCE INFORMATION (Denote Critical Steps with an asterisk*)
Provide Candidate with Initial Conditions/Cue (Last Page of this JPM), and Handout .5 (Swapping Hotwell/CM Booster Pumps) of OPII/A162501001 marked up for place-keeping through step 3.1.
START TIME:
STEPS ELEMENTS STANDARD S/U COMMENTS REQUIRED FOR UNSAT Examiner Note:
Examine the operator ability to obtain a Controlled Copy of a procedure during this JPM (Le. Using NEDL/Computer or Controlled Copy files and make a copy).
Examiner Note:
Throughout JPM, If the operator provides information to the OATC, as OATC, acknowledge (Step 3.2) Perform the The operator proceeds to following Sections as Section 3.3.
applicable.
Section 3.3, Swapping Hotwell Pumps Section 3.4, Swapping CM Booster Pumps 2010 Systems Control Room JPM C
- NUREG 1021, Revision 9
Appendix C Page 6 of 14 Form ES-C-i PERFORMANCE INFORMA11ON STEPS ELEMENTS STANDARD S/U COMMENTS REQUIRED FOR UNSAT 2 (Step 3.3) Swapping Hotwell Pumps.
(Note prior to Step 3.3.1) The operator reads the Starting a Hotwell Pump will Note and proceeds.
cause an increase in condensate flow to the The operator will make an Steam Generators and announcement regarding result in an NC System the Pump start.
temperature decrease (R.M.)
The operator rotates the I C (Step Hotwell Pump control switch 3.3.1) Start desired Hotwell Pump (R.M.) to the START position and observes the Red status
. 1A Hotwell Pump light LIT, and Green status
. lB Hotwell Pump light OFF.
. 1 C Hotwell Pump The operator observes motor amps rise, peak, and then stabilize at 45 amps.
Booth Cue:
If the operator contacts the NEO to check pump status, as NEO, report The IC Hotwell Pump is operating properly all operating parameters normal.
(Note prior to Step 3.3.2) The operator reads the Securing an operating Note and proceeds.
Hotwell pump will cause a decrease in condensate flow to the Steam Generators and result in an NC System temperature increase (R.M) 2010 Systems Control Room JPM C
- NUREG 1021, Revision 9
Appendix C Page 7 of 14 Form ES-C-i PERFORMANCE INFORMATION STEPS ELEMENTS STANDARD S/U COMMENTS REQUIRED FOR UNSAT
- 4 (Step 33.2) WHEN desired, The operator rotates the 1A place desired Hotwell Pump Hotwell Pump control switch in STOP (R.M.)
to the STOP position and
. 1A Hotwell Pump observes the Green status
. lB Hotwell Pump light LIT, and Red status
. iC Hotwell Pump light OFF.
The operator observes motor amps lower to 0 amps (NOTE: running pumps go to 75 amps).
- 5 (Step 3.3.3) Place non- The operator rotates the IA operating Hotwell Pump in Hotwell Pump control switch AUTO to the AUTO position.
. 1A Hotwell Pump
. lB Hotwell Pump The operator returns to step
. IC Hotwell Pump 3.2.
6 (Step 3.2) Perform the The operator proceeds to following Sections as Section 3.4.
applicable.
Section 3.3, Swapping Hotwell Pumps Section 3,4, Swapping CM Booster Pumps 2010 Systems Control Room JPM C
- NUREG 1021, Revision 9
Appendix C Page 8 of 14 Form ES-C-i PERFORMANCE INFORMATION STEPS ELEMENTS STANDARD S/U COMMENTS REQUIRED FOR UNSAT (Step 3.4) Swapping CM Booster Pumps.
(Note prior to Step 3.4.1) The operator reads the Swapping CM Booster Note and proceeds.
Pumps at power operations will affect Reactor Thermal Power. Reactor Thermal Power should be less than 98% RTP to prevent exceeding 100% RTP during pump swap (R.M.)
(Step 3.4.1) IF greater than The operator recognizes or equal to 98% RTP, that reactor power is 90%,
decrease Turbine load to and proceeds.
reduce Reactor power to less than 98% RTP (R.M) 8 (Step 3.4.2) Evaluate The operator directs the potential operational SRO to Evaluate potential concerns related to operational concerns swapping CM Booster related to swapping CM Pumps on line. (R.M.) Booster Pumps on line.
Cue:
The CRS acknowledges and initials Step 3.42.
2010 Systems Control Room JPM C NUREG 1021, Revision 9
Appendix C Page 9 of 14 Form ES-C-I PERFORMANCE INFORMATION STEPS ELEMENTS STANDARD S/U COMMENTS REQUIRED FOR UNSAT (Step 3.4.3) Ensure The operator contacts the Auxiliary Oil Pump NEO to check the Auxiliary operating on CM Booster Oil Pump running.
Pump to be started:
Booth Cue:
. IA CM Booster Auxiliary Oil Pump As the NEO, report that
. lB CM Booster Auxiliary the IC CM Booster Oil Pump
. IC CM Booster Auxiliary Auxiliary Oil Pump is Oil Pump running.
10 (Note prior to Step 3.4.4) The operator reads the Starting a CM Booster Note and proceeds.
Pump will cause a increase in condensate flow to the Steam Generators and result in an NC System temperature decrease.
(R.M.)
2010 Systems Control Room JPM C
- NUREG 1021, Revision 9
Appendix C Page 10 of 14 Form ES-C-i PERFORMANCE INFORMATION STEPS ELEMENTS STANDARD S/U COMMENTS REQUIRED FOR UNSAT ii (Step 3.4.4) Start desired The operator will make an CM Booster Pump (R.M.)
announcement regarding the Pump start.
. IA CM Booster Pump The operator rotates the 1C
. 1 B CM Booster Pump CM Booster Pump control
. 1 C CM Booster Pump switch to the START position and observes the Red status light LIT, and Green status light OFF.
The operator observes motor amps rise, peak, and then stabilize at 90 amps.
Cue:
If the operator contacts the NEO to check pump status, as NEO, report The IC CM Booster Pump is operating properly all operating parameters normaL 12 (Note prior to Step 3.4.5) The operator reads the Securing an operating CM Note and proceeds.
Booster Pump will cause a decrease in condensate flow to the Steam Generators and result in an NC System temperature increase. (R.M.)
2010 Systems Control Room JPM C NUREG 1021, Revision 9
Appendix Q Page 11 of 14 Form ES-C-I PERFORMANCE INFORMATION STEPS ELEMENTS STANDARD S/U COMMENTS REQUIRED FOR UNSAT
- 13 (Step 3.4.5) WHEN desired, The operator rotates the IA place the desired CM CM Booster Pump control Booster Pump in STOP switch to the STOP position and observes the Green
. 1A CM Booster Pump status light LIT, and Red
. lB CM Booster Pump status light OFF.
. IC CM Booster Pump The operator observes motor amps lower to 0 amps.
14 (Step 3.4.6) Place non- The operator rotates the 1A operating CM Booster CM Booster Pump control Pumps in AUTO.
switch to the AUTO
. IA CM Booster Pump position.
. lB CM Booster Pump
. IC CM Booster Pump The operator addresses Annunciator Response Procedure for Panel 1AD-8, A3, HTWL PUMP C STRNR HI D/P (Alternate Path).
Simulator Instructor Note: Just after the operator places the IA CM Booster Pump Control Switch to STOP, operate Trigger #1.
2010 Systems Control Room JPM C
- NUREG 1021, Revision 9
Appendix C Page 12 of 14 Form ES-C-i PERFORMANCE INFORMATION STEPS ELEMENTS STANDARD S/U COMMENTS REQUIRED FOR UNSAT
- 15 (OP/1/A/6100/O1O I, 1AD-8 The operator depresses the A3, Step 1 (IA)) Start IA Ho w standby Hotwell Pump.
Pushbutton and observes the Red status light LIT, and Green status light OFF.
The operator observes motor amps rise, peak, and then stabilize at 45 amps.
Cue:
If the operator reports the Immediate Actions to the CRS, as the CRS, direct the operator to take any immediate actions Simulator Instructor Note: Clear XMT-CMOI I when operator takes the next action.
- 16 (Step 2 (IA)) Remove C The operator depresses the Hotwell Pump from Service 1 C Hotwell Pump STOP Pushbutton and observes the Green status light LIT, and Red status light OFF.
The operator observes motor amps lower to 0 amps.
Terminating Cue: Evaluation on this JPM is complete.
STOP TIME:
2010 Systems Control Room JPM C
- NUREG 1021, Revision 9
Appendix C Page 13 of 14 Form ES-C-i VERlFICATON OF COMPLETION Job Performance Measure No.: 2010 Systems Control Room JPM C Examinees Name:
Date Performed:
Facility Evaluator:
Number of Attempts:
Time to Complete:
Question Documentation:
Result: SAT UNSAT Examiners Signature: Date:
2010 Systems Control Room JPM C
- NUREG 1021, Revision 9
Appendix C Form ES-C-i JPM CUE SHEET INITIAL CONDITIONS: Unit 1 is operating at 90% power in preparation for a Condensate System Pump Swap.
The A and the B Hotwell Pumps are running, with the C Hotwell Pump in Standby.
The A and the B Condensate Booster Pumps are running, with the C Condensate Booster Pump in Standby.
To support maintenance activities, it is desired to swap Condensate System Pumps.
U-i TB Rounds NEO (Bob) is standing by via radio, and has reported that the IC Hotwell Pump and the IC CM Booster Pump have been checked out and both are ready to start, and all operating parameters are normal.
INITIATING CUE: The CRS has directed you to start the C Hotwell Pump, and place the A Hotwell Pump in standby, and then start the C Condensate Booster Pump and place the A Condensate Booster Pump in standby using Enclosure 4.5 of OP/1/A/6250/001, Condensate and Feedwater System.
All outstanding R&Rs that may have impacted the performance of this procedure have been evaluated.
NUREG 1021, Revision 9
Enclosure 4.5 OP/1/A/6250/OO1 Swapping Hotwell / CM Booster Pumps Page 1 of 4
- 1. Limits and Precautions fi .1 This procedure is Reactivity Management related because it controls activities that can affect core reactivity by changing NC System temperature. (R.M.)
.2 Minimum Hotwell Pump flow is 1700 gpm.
vI.3 Minimum CM Booster Pump flow is 3000 gpm.
- 2. Initial Conditions 2.1 IF in Mode 1 OR 2, ensure reactivity management controls established per SOMP 0 1-02 (Reactivity Management). (R.M.)
NOTE: ft Starting Hotwell Pumps at low ambient temperatures can cause damage to motor stators due to moisture and will likely damage motor bearings due to cold oil.
Checking OAC indications verifies internal heater operation.
{PIPs 07-5209, 06-1673}
v IF the OAC is out of service, ambient air temperature can be checked with hand held thermometer in the vicinity of the Hotwell Pumps.
2.2 IF ambient air temperature at Hotwell Pumps is less than 32°F, ensure the following indicate greater than 32°F:
For 1A Hotwell Pump Motor:
- M1A0493 (1A Hotwell Pump Mtr Upper Thrust Brng Temp)
- M1A0457 (1A HTWL Pmp Motor Upper Guide Bearing Temp)
- M1A0475 (1A Hotwell Pump Motor Lwr Guide Brng Temp)
For 1 B Hotwell Pump Motor:
- M1A0499 (lB Hotwell Pump Mtr Upper Thrust Bmg Temp)
- M1A0463 (lB HTWL Pmp Motor Upper Guide Bearing Temp)
- M1AO481 (lB Hotwell Pump Motor Lwr Guide Brng Temp)
For 1 C Hotwell Pump Motor:
- M1A0505 (1C Hotwell Pump Mtr Upper Thrust Brng Temp)
- M1A0469 (1C HTWL Pmp Motor Upper Guide Bearing Temp)
- M1A0487 (1C Hotwell Pump Motor Lwr Guide Brng Temp)
Unit 1
Enclosure 4.5 0P/1/A1625o/oo1 Swapping Hotwell / CM Booster Pumps Page 2 of 4 NOTE: h Starting Condensate Booster Pumps at low ambient temperatures can cause damage to motor stators due to moisture and will likely damage motor/pump bearings due to cold oil. Checking OAC indications verifies internal heater operation.
{PIP5 07-5209, 06-1673}
- 1. IF the OAC is out of service, oil sump temperature can be checked using temperature gauge on top of reservoir or ambient air temperature can be checked with hand held thermometer in the vicinity of the Condensate Booster Pumps.
2.3 IF ambient air temperature at Condensate Booster Pumps is less than 50°F, ensure the following indicate greater than 50°F:
For 1A Condensate Booster Pump:
- M1A0529 (lA CBP Mtr Opp Dry End (Frnt) Brg-TR Edge)
- M1A0547 (1A CBP Drive End (Rear) Brg-TR Edge)
- M1A0565 (1A CM Booster Pump Inboard Bearing Temp)
- M1A0486 (1A CM Booster Pump Outboard Bearing Temp)
- M1A0504 (1A CM Booster Pump Thrust Bearing Temp)
For lB Condensate Booster Pump:
- M1A0535 (lB CBP Mtr Opp Dry End (Frnt) Brg-TR Edge)
- M1A0553 (lB CBP Drive End (Rear) Brg-TR Edge)
- M1A0571 (lB CM Booster Pump Inboard Bearing Temp)
- M1A0492 (lB CM Booster Pump Outboard Bearing Temp)
- M1AO51O (lB CM Booster Pump Thrust Bearing Temp)
For 1C Condensate Booster Pump:
- M1AO541 (1C CBP Mtr Opp Drv End (Frnt) Brg-TR Edge)
- M1A0559 (1C CBP Drive End (Rear) Brg-TR Edge)
- M1A0480 (lC CM Booster Pump Inboard Bearing Temp)
- M1A0498 (1C CM Booster Pump Outboard Bearing Temp)
- M1A0516 (lC CM Booster Pump Thrust Bearing Temp)
Unit 1
Enclosure 4.5 OP/1/A!62501001 Swapping Hotwell I CM Booster Pumps Page 3 of 4
- 3. Procedure 3.1 Evaluate all outstanding R&Rs that may impact performance of this procedure.
3.2 Perform the following sections, as applicable:
D Section 3.3, Swapping Hotwell Pumps LI Section 3.4, Swapping CM Booster Pumps 3.3 Swapping Hotwell Pumps NOTE: Starting a Hotwell pump will cause a increase in condensate flow to the steam generators and result in an NC System temperature decrease. (R.M.)
3.3.1 Start desired Hotwell Pump: (R.M.)
. 1A Hotwell Pump
- 1 B Hotwell Pump
. 1 C Hotwell Pump NOTE: Securing an operating Hotwell pump will cause a decrease in condensate flow to the steam generators and result in an NC System temperature increase. (R.M.)
3.3.2 IF required, place desired Hotwell Pump in STOP: (R.M.)
- 1A Hotwell Pump
- lB Hotwell Pump
- 1 C Hotwell Pump 3.3.3 Place non-operating Hotwell Pump in AUTO:
- 1A Hotwell Pump
- lB Hotwell Pump
- 1 C Hotwell Pump Unit 1
Enclosure 4.5 oPIl/A/625o/ool Swapping Hotwell I CM Booster Pumps Page 4 of 4 3.4 Swapping CM Booster Pumps NOTE: Swapping CM Booster Pumps at power operations will affect Reactor Thermal Power.
Reactor Thermal Power should be less than 98% RTP to prevent exceeding 100% RTP during pump swap. (R.M.)
3.4.1 IF greater than or equal to 98% RTP, decrease Turbine load to reduce Reactor power to less than 98% RTP. (R.M.)
3.4.2 Evaluate potential operational concerns related to swapping CM Booster SRO Pumps on line. (R.M.)
3.4.3 Ensure Auxiliary Oil Pump operating on CM Booster Pump to be started:
. 1A CM Booster Pump Auxiliary Oil Pump
- lB CM Booster Pump Auxiliary Oil Pump
. 1 C CM Booster Pump Auxiliary Oil Pump NOTE: Starting a CM Booster pump will cause a increase in condensate flow to the steam generators and result in an NC System temperature decrease. (R.M.)
3.4.4 Start desired CM Booster Pump: (R.M.)
. 1A CM Booster Pump
. lB CM Booster Pump
- 1C CM Booster Pump NOTE: Securing an operating CM Booster pump will cause a decrease in condensate flow to the steam generators and result in an NC System temperature increase. (R.M.)
3.4.5 IF required, place desired CM Booster Pump in STOP: (R.M.)
- 1A CM Booster Pump
- lB CM Booster Pump
- 1A CM Booster Pump
- lB CM Booster Pump
- 1C CM Booster Pump End of Enclosure Unit 1
Appendix C Job Performance Measure Form ES-C-i Worksheet SIM JPM D 2010 Systems Control Room JPM D
- NUREG 1021, Revision 9
Appendix C Page 2 of 10 - Form ES-C-i Job Performance Measure Worksheet Facility: McGuire Task No.:
Task
Title:
Manually Actuate Containment JPM No.: 2010 Systems Control Spray System Room JPM D (Alternate Path)
K/A
Reference:
026A2.03 4.1/4.4 Examinee: NRC Examiner:
Facility Evaluator: Date:
Method of testing:
Simulated Performance: Actual Performance: X Classroom Simulator X Plant READ TO THE EXAMINEE I will explain the initial conditions, which steps to simulate or discuss, and provide initiating cues. When you complete the task successfully, the objective for this Job Performance Measure will be satisfied.
Initial Conditions: With Unit I at 100% power a Reactor Trip occurs.
In response, the crew enters E-0, Reactor Trip or Safety Injection, and then transitions to ES-0.1, Reactor Trip Response.
Subsequently, a LOCA occurred inside the Containment causing a Safety Injection.
An Orange Path exists on the Containment Critical Safety Function Status Tree due to high Containment Pressure, and the crew has transitioned to FR-Z.i, Response to High Containment Pressure, and completed actions through step 9.
Task Standard: Manually open the B Train NS Pump Discharge Containment Isolation Valves and start the I B NS Pump.
Required Materials: None General
References:
EP/1/A/5000/FR-Z.i (Response to High Containment Pressure)
Handouts: EP/1/A15000/FR-Z.i (Response to High Containment Pressure) marked up for place-keeping through Step 9.
2010 Systems Control Room JPM D
- NUREG 1021, Revision 9
Appendix C Page 3 of 10 Form ES-C-i Job Performance Measure Worksheet Initiating Cue: The CRS has directed you to check the NS System in Operation in accordance with step 10 of FR-Z.1, Response to High Containment Pressure.
Time Critical Task: NO Validation Time: 15 minutes 2010 Systems Control Room JPM D
- NUREG 1021, Revision 9
Appendix C Page 4 of 10 Form ES-C-i Job Performance Measure Worksheet SIMULATOR OPERATIONAL GUIDELINES
- 1. Reset simulator to IC-39, 100% Power
- 2. Place in RUN and allow time to stabilize
- 3. Insert Malfunctions ISEOO5A/B, NS System Actuation Auto Failure/Manual Failure
- 5. Manually trip the reactor
- 6. Perform the actions of EPII/A/5000/E-0 up through step 5 and transition to ES-0.1.
- 7. After performing steps 1-11 in ES-0. 1, insert Malfunction NCOO8A, Cold Leg Break Loop A.
- 8. Ensure Safety Injection actuates automatically and all equipment responds as expected with the exception of NS System
- 9. Ensure Orange Path on Containment exists due to High Containment Pressure.
- 10. Complete Steps 1-9 of FR-Z.1.
- 11. Ensure the BOP Switch is in Silence.
- 12. Freeze the Simulator OR
- 1. Reset Simulator to Temporary Snap IC-244 (April, 2010).
- 2. Place Simulator in Run and acknowledge alarms/Reset SLIMS.
NOTE: During the performance of the JPM, the Simulator Driver will be required to acknowledge spurious alarms unrelated to the task being performed.
2010 Systems Control Room JPM D
- NUREG 1021, Revision 9
Appendix C Page 5 of 10 Form ES-C-i PERFORMANCE INFORMATION (Denote Critical Steps with an asterisk*)
Provide Candidate with Initial ConditionslCue (Last Page of this JPM), and Handout EPII!A15000/FR-Z.1 marked up for place-keeping through step 9.
START TIME:
STEPS ELEMENTS STANDARD S/U COMMENTS REQUIRED FOR UNSAT (Step 10) Check NS System in operation as follows:
(Step i0.a) Check The operator recognizes EP/i/A/5000/ECA1.1 (Loss from Initial Conditions that Of Emergency Coolant ECA-1 .1 is NOT in effect.
Recirc) IN EFFECT.
(Step 10.a RNO) GO TO The operator proceeds to Step 10.d. Step 10.d.
2 (Step 10.d) Check NS suction ALIGNED TO FWST AS FOLLOWS:
. Check 1NS-18A (IA NS Pump Suction From The operator observes the Cont Sump Isol) Green status light LIT.
CLOSED
. Check 1NS-20A (1A NS Pump Suction From The operator observes the FWST Isol) OPEN Red status light LIT.
. Check 1NS-1B(1B NS Pump Suction From The operator observes the Cont Sump Isol) - Green status light LIT.
CLOSED
. Check INS-3B(IB NS Pump Suction From The operator observes the FWST Isol) OPEN.
Red status light LIT.
2010 Systems Control Room JPM D
- NUREG 1021, Revision 9
Appendix C Page 6 of 10 Form ES-C-i PERFORMANCE INFORMATION STEPS ELEMENTS STANDARD S/U COMMENTS REQUIRED FOR UNSAT (Step 1 0.e) Check The operator observes four containment pressure - instruments above NS GREATER THAN 3 PSIG. Pump controls (or equivalent) and determines Containment Pressure is>
9 PSIG.
(Step I 0.f) Check the following NS pump discharge valves OPEN:
1 NS-32A (1A NS Hx Outlet The operator observes the Cont Outside Isol). Green status light LIT.
The operator observes the 1NS-29A (1A NS Hx Outlet Cont Outside Isol). Green status light LIT.
1 NS-i 2B (1 B NS Hx Outlet The operator observes the Cont Outside Isol). Green status light LIT.
1NS-15B (lB NS Hx Outlet Cont Outside Iso). The operator observes the Green status light LIT.
The operator proceeds to the Step i0.f RNO.
2010 Systems Control Room JPM D
- NUREG 1021, Revision 9
Appendix C Page 7 of 10 Form ES-C-I PERFORMANCE INFORMATION STEPS ELEMENTS STANDARD S/U COMMENTS REQUIRED FOR UNSAT (Step 1 0.f RNO) Perform the following:
The operator recognizes (Step 10.f RNO 1) IF both that both trains of NS are NS trains aligned to FWST, aligned to the FWST, and THEN perform the proceeds.
following:
(Step 10.f RNO 1)a) Open The operator attempts to affected valve(s). open 1 NS-32A by pressing the OPEN pushbutton, and recognizes valve does NOT open; the Green status light LIT. (Alternate Path)
The operator attempts to open 1 NS-29A by pressing the OPEN pushbutton, and recognizes valve does NOT open; the Green status light LIT. (Alternate Path)
The operator attempts to open INS-12B by pressing the OPEN pushbutton, and observes the Red status light LIT.
The operator attempts to open 1NS-15B by pressing the OPEN pushbutton, and observes the Red status light LIT.
6 (Step 10.f RNO 1)b) IF all The operator recognizes four valves are closed, that two of four valves have THEN opened and that the step does NOT apply.
(Step 10.f RNO 1)c) GO TO The operator proceeds to Step lOg. step 10.g.
2010 Systems Control Room JPM D NUREG 1021, Revision 9
Appendix C Page 8 of 10 Form ES-C-I PERFORMANCE INFORMATION STEPS ELEMENTS STANDARD S/U COMMENTS REQUIRED FOR UNSAT 8 (Step lOg) Check NS The operator observes the pumps ON.
Green status lights LIT for each NS pump, and proceeds to RNO.
- 9 (Step 10.g RNO 1) IF both trains aligned to the FWST, THEN perform the following: The operator recognizes that the I B NS Pump is the (Step 1 0.g RNO 1)a) Start only pump with a suction pump(s) with available and discharge flowpath and suction and discharge starts ONLY the 1 B NS flowpaths. Pump by pressing the START pushbutton.
(Alternate Path)
The operator observes 1 B NS Pump Red status light is LIT.
10 (Step I0.g RNO 1)b) IF The operator recognizes both pumps off, THEN that 1 of 2 pumps are running and that step does not apply.
11 (Step 1 0.g RNO I )c) GO The operator proceeds to TOStepil. step II.
Terminating Cue: Evaluation on this JPM is complete.
STOP TIME:
2010 Systems Control Room JPM D
- NUREG 1021, Revision 9
Appendix C Page 9 of 10 Form ES-C-i VERIFICATION OF COMPLETION Job Performance Measure No.: 2010 Systems Control Room JPM D Examinees Name:
Date Performed:
Facility Evaluator:
Number of Attempts:
Time to Complete:
Question Documentation:
Result: SAT UNSAT Examiners Signature: Date:
2010 Systems Control Room JPM D NUREG 1021, Revision 9
Appendix C Form ES-C-i JPM CUE SHEET INITIAL CONDITIONS: With Unit I at 100% power a Reactor Trip occurs.
In response, the crew enters E-0, Reactor Trip or Safety Injection, and then transitions to ES-0. 1, Reactor Trip Response.
Subsequently, a LOCA occurred inside the Containment causing a Safety Injection.
An Orange Path exists on the Containment Critical Safety Function Status Tree due to high Containment Pressure, and the crew has transitioned to FR-Zi, Response to High Containment Pressure, and completed actions through step 9.
INITIATING CUE: The CRS has directed you to check the NS System in Operation in accordance with step 10 of FR-Z. 1, Response to High Containment Pressure.
NUREG 1021, Revision 9
MNS RESPONSE TO HIGH CONTAINMENT PRESSURE PAGE NO.
EPI1 1A15000/FR-Z. 1 1 of 45 Rev. 16 UNIT 1 A. Purpose This procedure provides actions to respond to a high containment pressure.
B. Symptoms or Entry Conditions This procedure is entered from EPIIIAI5000IF-O (Critical Safety Function Status Trees)
(Containment), on a red or orange condition.
MNS RESPONSE TO HIGH CONTAINMENT PRESSURE PAGE NO.
EP/1/A/5000/FR-Z.1 2 of 45 Rev. 16 UNIT 1 ACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSE RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED C. Operator Actions J4 1. IF loss of emergency coolant recirc has occurred, THEN this procedure may be completed as time allows.
j/2. Monitor Foldout Page.
- 3. Stop all NC pumps.
Ensure all RV pumps are in manual and off.
NOTE Operator may have been dispatched to close breakers in next step by EPI1/AI5000IE-0 (Reactor Trip Or Safety Injection).
- 5. Ensure operator dispatched to remove white tags and close the following breakers:
I. IEMXA-R2A (IA ND To A&B Cold Legs Cont Outside Isol Motor (lNl-173A)) (aux bldg, 750, FF-54, FF-55)
V. IEMXBI-6B (lB ND To C&D NC Cold Leg Cont Outside Isol Motor (1NI-178B))
(aux bldg, 733, GG-55, GG-56).
1 6. Check containment pressure LESS -
Q JQ Step 9.
THAN 15 PSIG.
- 7. Check any NS pump ON. - 1Q Step 9.
NOTE The remainder of this EP may be completed with the priority of a yellow path EP.
Completion of this EP should be delayed if faulted S/G has occurred, or other higher priority actions are required.
- 8. Perform the remainder of this EP as time allows.
MNS RESPONSE TO HIGH CONTAINMENT PRESSURE PAGE NO.
EP/1/A15000/FR-Z.1 3 of 45 Rev. 16 UNIT1 ACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSE RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED
- 9. Check containment isolation:
Va. Check OAC - IN SERVICE, a. Perform the following on energized train(s):
- 1) IF Phase A or B valve is required open by another EP, THEN valve may be left open in next steps.
- 2) Check ESF Monitor Light Panel as follows:
- Ensure Group 1 Phase A valves are dark.
NOTE OAC driven summary lights in Group 4 will not work. Only valves with individual windows need to be checked in next step.
. Ensure Group 4 Phase A valves are lit.
- 3) Ensure Phase A valves in EPI1 IAI5000IG-1 (Generic Enclosures), Enclosure 11 (Phase A Valve Checklist) are closed.
- 4) Ensure Phase B valves in EPI1IAI5000IG-1 (Generic Enclosures), Enclosure 12 (Phase B Valve Checklist) are closed.
_5) GOIQSteplO.
MNS RESPONSE TO HIGH CONTAINMENT PRESSURE PAGE NO.
EP/1/A15000/FR-Z.1 4 of 45 Rev. 16 UNIT 1 ACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSE I RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED
- 9. (Continued)
- b. Check the following windows on Group b. Establish containment isolation on 4 of ESF Monitor light Panel LIT.
- energized train(s) as follows:
0-3 CONT ISOL PHASE A TRN A 1) if Phase A or B valve is required VLVS ALIGNED open by another EP, THEN valve may be left open in next step.
V
- C-6 CONT ISOL PHASE A TRN B VLVS ALIGNED 2) Check OAC Monitor Light Program
/ (MONL) for associated light, and V
- G-4 CONT ISOL PHASE B TRN A close Phase A and B isolation VLVS ALIGNED valves as required.
V. G-5 CONT ISOL PHASE. B TRN B VLVS ALIGNED.
- 10. Check NS System in operation as follows:
- a. Check EPII/A15000/ECA-1.1 (Loss Of a. GOTO Step 10.d.
Emergency Coolant Recirc) IN-EFFECT.
- b. Operate NS as directed by EP/1 1A15000/ECA-1 .1 (Loss Of Emergency Coolant Recirc).
_c. GOTOSteplI.
MNS RESPONSE TO HIGH CONTAINMENT PRESSURE PAGE NO.
EPI1IAI5000/FR-Z.l 5 of 45 UNIT 1 Rev. 16 ACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSE I RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED
- 10. (Continued)
- d. Check NS suction ALIGNED TO
- d. Perform the following:
FWST AS FOLLOWS:
- 1) if FWST level has remained greater
. Check 1NS-18A (1A NS Pump than 33 inches (FWST LEVEL Suction From Cont Sump Isol) - LO-LO alarm), THEN perform the CLOSED following:
. Check 1NS-20A (1A NS Pump a) Align valves.
Suction From FWST Isol) OPEN
- b) Q IQ. Step 1 0.e.
. Check iNS-lB (lB NS Pump Suction From Cont Sump lsol) CLOSED
- 2) if NS pump suction has been aligned in EPI1!A15000/ES-1.3
. Check 1NS-3B (lB NS Pump Suction (Transfer To Cold Leg Recirc),
From FWST Isol) OPEN.
- THEN perform the following:
a) if 1NI-185A (1A ND Pump Suction From Cont Sump Isol) is open, THEN ensure the following:
(1) 1NS-20A (1A NS Pump Suction From FWST Isol) -
CLOSED.
(2) INS-18A (IA NS Pump Suction From Cont Sump Isol) OPEN.
(3) IRN-134A (A NS Hx Inlet Isol) OPEN.
(4) IRN-137A (A NS Hx Outlet Isol) THROTTLED TO 3600 GPM.
b) i lNl-184B (lB ND Pump Suction From Cont Sump lsol) is open, THEN ensure the following:
(1) 1NS-3B (lB NS Pump Suction From FWST Isol) -
CLOSED.
(2) iNS-lB (lB NS Pump Suction From Cont Sump Isol) OPEN.
(3) 1RN-235B (B NS HX Inlet Isol) OPEN.
(4) 1 RN-238B (B NS Hx Outlet Isol) THROTTLED TO 3600 GPM.
MNS RESPONSE TO HIGH CONTAINMENT PRESSURE PAGE NO.
EPI1/A15000/FR-Z.1 6 of 45 UNIT1 ACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSE RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED 10, (Continued)
- e. Check containment pressufe - e. Q IQ. Step 11.
GREATER THAN 3 PSIG.
- f. Check the following NS pump discharge f. Perform the following:
valves OPEN:
- 1) if both NS trains aligned to FWST,
. I NS-32A (IA NS Hx Outlet Cont THEN perform the following:
Outside Isol) a) Open affected valve(s).
. 1 NS-29A (1A NS Hx Outlet Cont Outside Isol) b) IF all four valves are closed, THEN establish NS
- 1NS-12B (lB NS Hx Outlet Cónt Enclosure 2 (NS System Outside Isol) CPCS Failures).
. 1NS-15B (lB NS Hx Outlet Cont C) IQ.Step 10.g.
Outside Isol).
- 2) WHEN either alarm CONT SUMP LEVEL GREATER THAN 3 FT is lit on 1AD-14 or 1AD-15, THEN perform the following:
a) Open the following valves:
. 1NS-32A (1A NS Hx Outlet Cont Outside Isol)
- INS-29A (IA NS Hx Outlet Cont Outside Isol)
. 1NS-12B (lB NS Hx Outlet Cont Outside Isol)
- 1NS-15B (18 NS Hx Outlet Cont Outside Isol).
b) IF all four valves are closed, THEN establish NS ?R Enclosure 2 (NS System CPCS Failures).
MNS RESPONSE TO HIGH CONTAINMENT PRESSURE PAGE NO.
EP/1 /AI5000IFR-Z. 1 7 of 45 Rev. 16 UNIT 1 ACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSE RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED
- 10. (Continued)
- g. Check NS pumps ON.- g. Perform the following:
- 1) if both NS trains aligned to FWST, THEN perform the following:
a) Start pump(s) with available suction and discharge flowpaths.
b) if both pumps off, THEN establish NS PER Enclosure 2 (NS System CPCS Failures).
_c) ]Step11.
- 2) WHEN either alarm CONT SUMP LEVEL GREATERTHAN 3 FTis lit on IAD-14 or lAD-I 5, THEN perform the following:
a) Start pump(s) with available suction and discharge flowpaths.
b) if both pumps off, THEN establish NS PER Enclosure 2 (NS System CPCS Failures).
- 12. Check the following CLOSED:
- Close valve(s).
. All MSIVs All MSIV bypass valves.
- 13. Check steamlines intact: if any SIG pressure going down in an uncontrolled manner QB. any SIG
. All S/G pressures STABLE OR GOING
- depressurized, THEN isolate any faulted UP S!G(s) ER Enclosure 5 (Faulted SIG Isolation).
. All S/Gs PRESSURIZED.
Appendix C Job Performance Measure Form ESC-1 Worksheet SIM JPM E 2010 Systems Control Room JPM E
- NUREG 1021, Revision 9
Appendix C Page 2 of 1 1 Form ES-C-I Job Performance Measure Worksheet Facility: McGuire Task No.:
Task
Title:
Separate from the Electrical Grid JPM No.: 2010 Systems Control due to Low Grid Frequency Room JPM E (Alternate Path)
K/A
Reference:
APE 077, AA2.06, 3.4/3.5 Examinee: NRC Examiner:
Facility Evaluator: Date:
Method of testing:
Simulated Performance: Actual Performance: X Classroom Simulator X Plant READ TO THE EXAMINEE I will explain the initial conditions, which steps to simulate or discuss, and provide initiating cues. When you complete the task successfully, the objective for this Job Performance Measure will be satisfied.
Initial Conditions: Unit 1 is at 77% power, and Unit 2 is at 85% power Both crews have entered AP/1 (2)/A/5500/05 (Generator Voltage and Electrical Grid Disturbances) due to low Electrical Grid frequency.
AP/1/A/5500/05 (Generator Voltage and Electrical Grid Disturbances) has been completed up to Step 15.
Grid frequency has previously lowered to 58.4 Hz and remained there for several minutes.
Task Standard: The operator attempts to reduce load on the Turbine in Automatic, and when it fails, reduces load to less than 60% in MANUAL, then separates the Main Generator from the Grid.
Required Materials: None General
References:
AP/1/A/5500/05 (Generator Voltage and Electrical Grid Disturbances)
AP/2/A/5500/05 (Generator Voltage and Electrical Grid Disturbances)
OP/1/A/6300/001 (Turbine Generator Load Change)
OP/1/A16100/010 B (Annunciator Response for Panel lAD-i) 2010 Systems Control Room JPM E
- NUREG 1021, Revision 9
Appendix C Page 3 of I I Form ES-C-i Job Performance Measure Worksheet Handouts: AP/1/A/5500/05 (Generator Voltage and Electrical Grid Disturbances) marked upto Step 15.
Initiating Cue: The CRS has directed you to separate from the Electrical Grid without delay in accordance with Step 15 of AP/i IA/5500105 (Generator Voltage and Electrical Grid Disturbances)
Time Critical Task: NO Validation Time: 12 minutes 2010 Systems Control Room JPM E
- NUREG 1021, Revision 9
Appendix C Page 4 of 1 1 Form ES-C-i Job Performance Measure Worksheet SIMULATOR OPERATIONAL GUIDELINES
- 1. Reset to IC # 37, 75% Power, MOL. Go to RUN.
- 2. Using PLP-1 5 adjust Electrical Grid Frequency to 58.6 Hz (Turbine will trip if < 58.5 HZ).
- 3. Carry out AP/11A15500105 (Generator Voltage and Electrical Grid Disturbances), up to Step 15.
- 4. Insert ANN-ADO1-F09 = I (OFF)
- 5. Insert MALF DEH-008B on Trigger #1.
- 6. Freeze Simulator.
- 1. Reset Simulator to Temporary Snap IC-245 (April, 2010).
- 2. Momentarily place Simulator in Run to acknowledge alarms/Reset SLIMS.
- 3. Leave Simulator in FREEZE until operator is ready to begin.
NOTE: Simulator Instructor take Simulator to RUN just prior to candidate starting JPM.
NOTE: Simulator Instructor will need to operate Trigger #1 during the course of this JPM (Step 9).
NOTE: Simulator Floor Instructor will need to be stationed at the Control Rods during the course of this JPM.
2010 Systems Control Room JPM E
- NUREG 1021, Revision 9
Appendix C Page 5 of 1 1 Form ES-C-I PERFORMANCE INFORMATION (Denote Critical Steps with an asterisk*)
Provide Candidate with Initial ConditionslCue (Last Page of this JPM), and Handout AP111A15500105 marked up to Step 15.
START TIME:
STEPS ELEMENTS STANDARD S/U COMMENTS REQUIRED FOR UNSAT Simulator Instructor NOTE: Leave Simulator in FREEZE until operator is ready to begin.
1 (Step 15) Separate from the The operator calls SOC and Grid as follows: notifies them that Unit 1 is separating from the Grid.
(Step 15.a) Notify SOC that Unit us separating from the Cue:
Grid.
If operator calls SOC, as SOC, acknowledge.
(Step 15.b) Ensure control The operator observes the rods in auto. Rod Control Select Switch is in the AUTO position.
(Step 1 5.c) Check TURB The operator observes IMP PRESS CH 2T - 1SMP-5220 and determines GREATER THAN 340 that Channel 2 Turbine PSIG. Impulse Pressure is 520 psig.
(Step 1 5.d) Check Turbine The operator observes the automatic control - White Operator Auto Status AVAILABLE, light is LIT, and determines that Turbine automatic control is available.
2010 Systems Control Room JPM E
- NUREG 1021, Revision 9
Appendix C Page 6 of ii Form ES-C-i PERFORMANCE INFORMATION STEPS ELEMENTS STANDARD S/U COMMENTS REQUIRED FOR UNSAT (Step i5.e) Ensure Turbine The operator observes the control in OPERATOR White Operator Auto Status AUTO. light is LIT, and determines that Turbine Control is in OPERATOR AUTO.
6 (Step i 5.f) Place MW The operator observes the LOOP in service. Red MW IN Status light is LIT, and determines that MW Loop is in service.
(Step i 5.g) Enter target The operator enters a target load of 300 MW. load of 300 MW by depressing the REFERENCE pushbutton, using the KEY Pad to select 300, and when it appears on the Digital Display, presses ENTER.
8 (Step i 5.h) Enter load rate The operator enters a load of 300 MW/MIN. rate of 300 MW/rn in by depressing the LOAD RATE pushbutton, using the KEY Pad to select 300, and when it appears on the Digital Display, presses ENTER.
9 (Step i5.i) Depress GO. The operator depresses the GO pushbutton and observes that the Pushbutton is LIT.
Simulator Instructor Note:
When the operator presses GO on the Turbine Operate Trigger #1 (MALF-DEHOO8B)
(Alternate Path)
This action will cause Main Control Board Annunciator Panel IAD-IIF-4, TURBINE IN MANUAL 2010 Systems Control Room JPM E
- NUREG 1021, Revision 9
Appendix C Page 7 of 1 1 Form ES-C-i PERFORMANCE INFORMATION STEPS ELEMENTS STANDARD S/U COMMENTS REQUIRED FOR UNSAT
- 10 MCB Annunciator Panel The operator recognizes lAD-i F4ITURBINE IN that the Turbine will not MANUAL operate in AUTO and operates the Turbine in MANUAL. (Alternate Path)
Cue:
If operator requests guidance from CRS, indicate that the CRS is unavailable.
Examiner Note:
There is more than one success path for the operator. The operator may back up in AP111A15500105 to Step 15.d, and recognize that the Turbine Automatic Control is no longer available. If so, they will respond by implementing the Step 15.d RNO. This path is scripted in JPM Steps 11-15.
As an alternative to this, the operator may use the ARP for MCB Annunciator IAD-11F4, TURBINE IN MANUAL, which will direct the operator to reduce load in Manual in accordance with 0P111A163001001 A (Turbine Generator Load Change), Enclosure 4.1 (Turbine Generator Load Change) Section 3.5.2.
These steps will accomplish the same actions as JPM Steps 11-15.
2010 Systems Control Room JPM E
- NUREG 1021, Revision 9
Appendix C Page 8 of I I Form ES-C-i PERFORMANCE INFORMATION STEPS ELEMENTS STANDARD S/U COMMENTS REQUIRED FOR UNSAT ii (Step i5.d RNO) Perform The operator observes the following: White MANUAL Status light is LIT, and determines that (Step 15.d.i) Ensure the Turbine Control is in Turbine in MANUAL MANUAL.
control.
- 12 (Step I .d.2) Immediately The operator depresses the lower Turbine load to less GV Lower pushbutton.
than 300 MW using GV LOWER.
13 (Step 15.d.3) WHEN PCBs The operator reads the step are opened to separate and proceeds.
from the Grid in step 15.1, THEN use GV LOWER and GV RAISE to maintain 1800 RPM.
14 (Step 15.d.4) GO TO Step The operator proceeds to i5.j. Step 15.j.
- 15 (Step 15.j) Do not continue The operator lowers load until the following conditions until Channel 2 Turbine are met: Impulse Pressure (1SMP-5220) is less than 340 psig,
. TURB IMP PRESS CH AND the Power Range 2 LESS THAN 340 Meters indicate less than PSIG 60%.
. P/R meters LESS THAN 60%.
- 16 (Step 15k) Notify Unit 2 The operator notifies the Operator that Unit 1 is Unit 2 RO that Unit I is separating from the Grid, ready to be separated from the Grid.
Cue:
As the U2 RO, acknowledge 2010 Systems Control Room JPM E
- NUREG 1021, Revision 9
Appendix C Page 9 of 1 1 Form ES-C-i PERFORMANCE INFORMATION STEPS ELEMENTS STANDARD S/U COMMENTS REQUIRED FOR UNSAT
- 17 (Step 15.1) Open the following Switchyard PCBs:
The operator depresses the
. PCB-8 OPEN pushbutton for PCB 8, and observes the Green status light LIT, Red status light OFF.
. PCB-9 The operator depresses the OPEN pushbutton for PCB 9, and observes the Green status light LIT, Red status light OFF.
. PCB-i i The operator depresses the OPEN pushbutton for PCB ii, and observes the Green status light LIT, Red status light OFF.
. PCB-12 The operator depresses the OPEN pushbutton for PCB 12, and observes the Green status light LIT, Red status light OFF.
18 (Step i5.m) GO TO The operator reports that AP/i/A/5500/03 (Load the Generator is separated Rejection. from the Grid, and that the crew must proceed to AP/i /A/5500/3.
Terminating Cue: Evaluation on this JPM is complete.
STOP TIME:
2010 Systems Control Room JPM E
- NUREG 1021, Revision 9
Appendix C Page 10 of 1 1 Form ES-C-I VERIFICATION OF COMPLETION Job Performance Measure No.: 2010 Systems Control Room JPM E Examinees Name:
Date Performed:
Facility Evaluator:
Number of Attempts:
Time to Complete:
Question Documentation:
Result: SAT UNSAT Examiners Signature: Date:
2010 Systems Control Room JPM E
- NUREG 1021, Revision 9
Appendix C Form ES-C-1 JPM CUE SHEET INITIAL CONDITIONS: Unit 1 is at 77% power, and Unit 2 is at 85% power.
Both crews have entered AP/1 (2)1A15500105 (Generator Voltage and Electrical Grid Disturbances) due to low Electrical Grid frequency.
AP/11A15500105 (Generator Voltage and Electrical Grid Disturbances) has been completed up to Step 15.
Grid frequency has previously lowered to 58.4 Hz and remained there for several minutes.
INITIATING CUE: The CRS has directed you to separate from the Electrical Grid without delay in accordance with Step 15 of AP/1 /A/5500/05 (Generator Voltage and Electrical Grid Disturbances).
NUREG 1021, Revision 9
GENERATOR VOLTAGE AND ELECTRIC GRID MNS PAGE NO.
DISTURBANCES API1 1A15500105 1of27 Rev. 8 UNIT 1 A. Purpose This procedure provides guidance on how to respond to Main Generator voltage regulator malfunctions and to voltage andlor frequency disturbances on the Electrical Grid.
GENERATOR VOLTAGE AND ELECTRIC GRID MNS DISTURBANCES AP/1 1A15500105 Rev. 8 UNIT 1 uuwrnrnrn nwwuwurnrnw B. Symptoms OAC alarm on Hi Generator voltage OAC alarm on Hi Generator MVARs OAC alarm on Lo Generator MVARs OAC alarm on Generator frequency OAC alarm on Lo Switchyard voltage Generator voltage and MVARs fluctuating (swinging)
Generator Capability Curve Exceeded EXCITATION LIMITER IN ACTION alarm.
TCC notification that the Real Time Contingency Analysis (RTCA) indicates that switchyard voltage would not be adequate should the unit trip TCC notification that the Real Time Contingency Analysis (RTCA) indicates that switchyard voltage would not be adequate if further grid degradation occurs TCC notification that the Real Time Contingency Analysis (RTCA) is out of service TCCISOC notification that actual or predicted Megawatt reserves are less than 500 MW TCCISOC notification that NQrth American Electric Reliability Corporation (NERC) Alert Level 2 or 3 has been declared TCC!SOC notification of potential degraded grid voltage or frequency condition OAC alarm on Lo 7KV bus voltage OAC alarm on Lo 4KV bus voltage.
GENERATOR VOLTAGE AND ELECTRIC GRID API1IAI5500/05 3 of 27 Rev. 8 UNIT 1 uuwwwuuw rnrnrnwwrnrnrn C. Operator Actions Announce occurrence on page.
j2. Ensure dispatcher is aware of problem.
/3. Notify Unit 2 to evaluate implementing API2!A!5500105 (Generator Voltage and Electric Grid Disturbances).
Check Unit I Generator TIED TO GRID.
TQ Step 20.
- 5. IFAT TIME reactor power is greater than 100%, THEN reduce turbine load to maintain reactor power less than 100%.
- 6. Check Unit I Generator frequency - j4IGenerator frequency does not GREATER THAN 58.5 Hz. immediately recover above 58.5 Hz, THEN Q ] Step 15 to separate from the grid.
GENERATOR VOLTAGE AND ELECTRIC GRID MNS PAGE NO AP/11A15500105 DISTURBANCES 4 of 27 UNIT 1 Rev. 8 uwwrnrnurnrnuurnrn cuowrnrnw
- 7. Monitor Generator Capability Curve as follows:
NOTE In the following step, if Generator voltage is fluctuating above and below 24 Ky, then assume voltage is less than 24 Ky.
- a. Check Generator voltage LESS THAN
- a. Perform the following:
24 Ky.
- 1) Monitor Generator Capability Curve PER Enclosure I (Generator Capability Curve 24 Ky).
_2) GOIQStep8.
- b. Check OAC - IN SERVICE. b. Perform the following:
- 1) Monitor Generator Capability Curve PER Enclosure 2 (Generator Capability Curve 22.8 Ky).
_2) GOIQStep8.
- c. Monitor Generator Capability Curve PER OAC turn on code GENCAP.
- 8. Check Generator MVARs -WITHIN ]EQ Step 11.
LIMITS OF GENERATOR CAPABILITY CURVE.
- 9. IFATANYTlMEcapabilitycurve exceeded, THEN perform Steps 11 and 12.
_1O. QIQStep13.
GENERATOR VOLTAGE AND ELECTRIC GRID API1/A15500/05 5 of 27 Rev. 8 UNIT 1 nonnnEinnnnrnrnrnrnn nwwnn
- 11. Adjust MVARs to within the capability curve by performing one of the following:
Depress LOWER on the VOLTAGE ADJUST to reduce lagging MVARs OR Depress RAISE on the VOLTAGE ADJUST to reduce leading MVARs.
- 12. Check Generator MVARs WITHIN
- if actions in Step 11 do not restore LIMITS OF GENERATOR CAPABILITY MVARs, THEN perform the following:
CURVE.
- a. if voltage regulator in AUTO, THEN perform the following:
- 1) Place voltage regulator in MAN.
- 2) Adjust MVARs to within the capability curve.
- b. IF unable to maintain MVARs within curve, THEN remove generator from service as follows:
- 1) IF greater than P-8, THEN perform the following:
a) Trip reactor.
b) Q TQ. EPI1IAI5000IE-O (Reactor Trip or Safety Injection).
- 2) IF less than P-8, THEN perform the following:
a) Trip turbine.
b) GOTOAPI1IAI5500/02 (Turbine Generator Trip).
MNS I GENERATOR VOLTAGE AND ELECTRIC GRID DISTURBANCES PAGE NO.
AP/11A15500/05 I 6 of 27 Rev. 8 UNIT1 LWuUUWrnWrn flDWWWW
- 13. Monitor Generator frequency as follows:
- a. Checkgeneratorfrequency-AT6O Hz. a. QIQ Step 13.d.
- b. if 4J +/-4J TIME generator frequency is abnormal Q.RTCC/SOC reports abnormal grid frequency condition, THENj Step 13.d.
_c. QjQStep16.
- d. Place OAC point M1A0966 (Ui Generator Frequency) on trend with a range of 58.0 to 60.0 Hz.
CAUTION If Generator frequency goes below 58.5 Hz, the unit must be separated from the grid within 10 minutes or a Generator lockout will occur.
- e. IF +/-4J +/-4f TIME Generator frequency goes below 58.5 Hz (LO LO alarm setpoint on OAC) AND does not immediately recover above 58.5 Hz, THEN GO IP. Step 15 to separate from the grid.
- 14. Q]Step16.
- 15. Separate from the grid as follows:
- a. Notify SOC that Unit 1 is separating from the grid.
- b. Ensure control rods in auto.
GREATER THAN 340 PSIG.
GENERATOR VOLTAGE AND ELECTRIC GRID API1/A15500105 7 of 27 Rev. 8 UNIT 1 EflLLLWDflLUUWW uuounwrnrnw
- 15. (Continued)
- d. Check Turbine automatic control - d. Perform the following:
AVAILABLE.
- 1) Ensure Turbine in MANUAL control.
- 2) Immediately lower Turbine load to less than 300 MW using GV LOWER.
- 3) WHEN PCBs are opened to separate from the Grid in step 15.1, THEN use GV LOWER and GV RAISE to maintain 1800 RPM.
_4) TO Step 15.j.
- e. Ensure Turbine control in OPERATOR AUTO.
- g. Enter target load of 300 MW.
- h. Enter load rate of 300 MW/MIN.
- i. Depress GO.
- j. Do not continue until the following conditions are met:
TURB IMP PRESS CH 2- LESS THAN 340 PSIG P/R meters LESS THAN 60%.
- k. Notify Unit 2 Operator that Unit I is separating from the Grid.
I. Open the following Switchyard PCBs:
- 1) Open PCB-8.
- 2) Open PCB-9.
- 3) Open PCB-11.
- 4) Open PCB-12.
- m. GO TO AP/1/A/5500/03 (Load Rejection).
Appendix C Job Performance Measure Form ES-C-i Worksheet SIM JPM F 2010 Systems Control Room JPM F
- NUREG 1021, Revision 9
Appendix C Page 2 of 9 Form ES-C-i Job Performance Measure Worksheet Facility: McGuire Task No.:
Task
Title:
Restore Repaired Power Range JPM No.: 2010 Systems Control Channel to Service Room JPM F K/A
Reference:
015A2.01 3.5/3.9 Examinee: Examiner:
Facility Evaluator: Date:
Method of testing:
Simulated Performance: Actual Performance: X Classroom Simulator X Plant READ TO THE EXAMINEE I will explain the initial conditions, which steps to simulate or discuss, and provide initiating cues. When you complete the task successfully, the objective for this Job Performance Measure will be satisfied.
Initial Conditions:
- With Unit I at 100% power, Power Range Channel N43 failed low.
- The Control Room crew removed Power Range Channel N43 from service in accordance with API6, Malfunction of Nuclear Instrumentation, Case III.
- The instrument has been out of service for 16 hours1.851852e-4 days <br />0.00444 hours <br />2.645503e-5 weeks <br />6.088e-6 months <br />, and IAE has inserted the required bistable trip signals.
- IAE has indicated that the channel has been repaired and can now be restored to service.
Task Standard: Complete a restoration of a previously failed Power Range Channel. All critical tasks evaluated as satisfactory.
Required Materials: N43 Control Power Fuses Foot Stool available near Excore NIS Cabinets General
References:
AP/1/A/5500/16 (Malfunction of Nuclear Instrumentation)
Handouts: AP/1/A15500/16 (Malfunction of Nuclear Instrumentation) Case III, marked up for place-keeping through Step 20.
2010 Systems Control Room JPM F
- NUREG 1021, Revision 9
Appendix C Page 3 of 9 Form ES-C-I Job Performance Measure Worksheet Initiating Cue: The CRS has directed you to restore Power Range Channel N43 to service in accordance with Step 21 of AP16 (Malfunction of Nuclear Instrumentation) Case III, Power Range Malfunction Time Critical Task: NO Validation Time: 10 minutes 2010 Systems Control Room JPM F
- NUREG 1021, Revision 9
Appendix C Page 4 of 9 Form ESC-1 Job Performance Measure Worksheet SIMULATOR OPERATIONAL GUIDELINES
- 1. Reset simulator to IC-39, 100% Power
- 2. Place in RUN and allow time to stabilize
- 3. Insert Malfunction ENB13F (0%), Power Range Channel Failure, N43
- 4. Perform the actions of API1/N5500116 up through step 20.
- 5. Run CAEPZZPR43BS
- 6. Remove Malfunction.
- 7. Freeze the Simulator.
- 1. Reset to IC-246 (April, 2010).
- 2. Place Simulator in Run and acknowledge alarms/Reset SLIMS.
2010 Systems Control Room JPM F NUREG 1021, Revision 9
Appendix C Page 5 of 9 Form ES-C-i PERFORMANCE INFORMATION (Denote Critical Steps with an asterisk*)
Provide Candidate with Initial ConditionslCue (Last Page of this JPM), and Handout AP!11A15500!16, with Case III marked up for place-keeping through step 20.
START TIME:
STEPS ELEMENTS STANDARD S/U COMMENTS REQUIRED FOR UNSAT (Step2i) WHEN malfunctioning P/R channel repaired, THEN perform the following:
The operator checks fuses (Step 21 .a) Ensure installed in Power Range B instrument power fuses in Drawer.
POWER RANGE B drawer installed.
- 2 (Step 21 .b) Install control The operator inserts fuses power fuses in POWER into Power Range A RANGE A drawer. Drawer.
The operator observes the Drawer lights come back on.
- 3 (Step 21.c) Select RESET The operator selects on the RATE MODE RESET on the Rate Mode SWITCH. Switch and allows spring return to NORMAL.
The operator observes the Positive Rate Trip light extinguishes.
2010 Systems Control Room JPM F
- NUREG 1021, Revision 9
Appendix C Page 6 of 9 Form ES-C-i PERFORMANCE INFORMATION STEPS ELEMENTS STANDARD S/U COMMENTS REQUIRED FOR UNSAT 4 (Step 21.d) Check reactor The operator observes power GREATER THAN other Power Range 25% Channels and determines that the plant is at 100%
power.
(Step 21 .e) Check the The operator observes that following bistable LIT:
the PIR HI FLUX LO STPT Bistable light is LIT (1 Sl2-PIR HI FLUX LO STPT C12).
(1SI-2).
6 (Step 21 .f) Check the The operator observes that following bistables DARK:
the PIR HI FLUX HI STPT Bistable light is DARK FIR HI FLUX HI STPT (1SI2-C13).
(1 SI-2)
,, The operator observes that PIR HI FLUX RATE (1S1 the PIR HI FLUX HI RATE
- 3) Bistable light is DARK (1S13-C1).
- 7 (Step 21 .g) Place At Comparator and Rate COMPARATOR Drawer, The operator CHANNEL DEFEAT switch places the COMPARATOR to NORMAL. CHANNEL DEFEAT switch to NORMAL.
The operator observes the Comparator Defeat light extinguishes.
- 8 (Step 21 .h) Place POWER At Detector Current MISMATCH BYPASS Comparator Drawer, The switch to OPERATE. operator places the POWER MISMATCH BYPASS switch to OPERATE.
2010 Systems Control Room JPM F NUREG 1021, Revision 9
Appendix C Page 7 of 9 Form ES-C-i PERFORMANCE INFORMATION STEPS ELEMENTS STANDARD S/U COMMENTS REQUIRED FOR UNSAT
- 9 (Step 21 .i) Place UPPER At Detector Current SECTION switch to Comparator Drawer, The NORMAL. operator places the UPPER SECTION switch to NORMAL.
The operator observes the Channel Defeat light extinguishes.
- 10 (Step 21.j) Place LOWER At Detector Current SECTION switch to Comparator Drawer, The NORMAL. operator places the LOWER SECTION switch to NORMAL.
The operator observes the Channel Defeat light extinguishes.
- 1 1 (Step 21 .k) Place ROD At Detector Current STOP BYPASS switch to Comparator Drawer, The OPERATE. operator places the ROD STOP BYPASS switch to OPERATE.
12 (Step 21.1) IF IAE tripped The operator contacts IAE.
bistables PER Step 18, THEN perform the Cue:
following:
IAE will return Bistables (Step 21.1.1) Instruct IAE to to service.
place the following bistables for failed channel back in service:
- OPDT
STOP TIME:
2010 Systems Control Room JPM F NUREG 1021, Revision 9
Appendix C Page 8 of 9 Form ES-C-i VERIFICATION OF COMPLETION Job Performance Measure No.: 2010 Systems Control Room JPM F Examinees Name:
Date Performed:
Facility Evaluator:
Number of Attempts:
Time to Complete:
Question Documentation:
Result: SAT UNSAT Examiners Signature: Date:
2010 Systems Control Room JPM F
- NUREG 1021, Revision 9
Appendix C Form ES-C-i JPM CUE SHEET INITIAL CONDITIONS:
- With Unit 1 at 100% power, Power Range Channel N43 failed low.
- The Control Room crew removed Power Range Channel N43 from service in accordance with AP16, Malfunction of Nuclear Instrumentation, Case III.
- The instrument has been out of service for 16 hours1.851852e-4 days <br />0.00444 hours <br />2.645503e-5 weeks <br />6.088e-6 months <br />, and IAE has inserted the required bistable trip signals.
- IAE has indicated that the channel has been repaired and can now be restored to service.
INITIATING CUE: The CRS has directed you to restore Power Range Channel N43 to service in accordance with Step 21 of AP16 (Malfunction of Nuclear Instrumentation) Case III, Power Range Malfunction.
NUREG 1021, Revision 9
MNS MALFUNCTION OF NUCLEAR INSTRUMENTATION PAGE NO.
API1IA/5500/16 12 of 18 Case III UNIT 1 Power Range Malfunction Rev. 12 ACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSE RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED B. Symptoms
- Erratic or loss of PIR indication
- P!R HI VOLTAGE FAILURE alarm
- PIR HI FLUX RATE ALERT alarm
- PIR HI FLUX HI STPT ALERT alarm
- PIR CHANNEL DEVIATION alarm
- PIR OVER POWER ROD STOP alarm
- Loss of INSTRUMENT POWER ON or CONTROL POWER ON lights.
C. Operator Actions Place control rods in manual.
Check SIG levels AT PROGRAMMED
- if auto does not restore SIG level(s) to LEVEL program, THEN place affected S/G CF control valves in manual and return level to program.
- 3. Announce occurrence on paging system.
MNS I I
MALFUNCTION OF NUCLEAR INSTRUMENTATION I PAGE NO.
AP/11A15500/16 Case III I l3of 18 UNIT 1 Power Range Malfunction Rev.12 ACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSE RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED Check P!R channels ONLY ONE
- Perform the following:
CHANNEL FAILED.
- a. Initiate unit shutdown to Mode 3 within one hour, as required by Tech Spec 3.0.3.
- b. REFER JQ. RPIOIAI5700IO1O (NRC Immediate Notification Requirements).
- c. Ensure the following interlocks are in their required state for existing plant conditions:
. P-7 Lo Power Rx Trips Blocked
- P-8 Hi Pwr La Flo Rx Trip Blocked
. P-10 Nuclear at Power.
- d. RETURN ]Q procedure in effect.
Secure any power increase in progress.
- 6. Check the following interlocks IN
- Notify IAE.
REQUIRED STATE FOR EXISTING PLANT CONDITIONS:
P-7 La Power Rx Trips Blocked P-8 Hi Pwr La Flo Rx Trip Blocked P-b Nuclear at Power.
- 7. Perform the following actions at the MISCELLANEOUS CONTROL AND INDICATION PANEL drawer:
i/a. Place the appropriate ROD STOP BYPASS switch to the failed channel position.
/
I b. Place the POWER MISMATCH BYPASS switch to the failed channel position.
MNS MALFUNCTION OF NUCLEAR INSTRUMENTATION PAGE NO.
AP/l/A15500116 14 of 18 Case III UNIT 1 Power Range Malfunction Rev. 12 ACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSE RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED
- 8. Perform the following actions at the Notify IAE.
DETECTOR CURRENT COMPARATOR drawer:
a/a. Place the UPPER SECTION switch to the failed channel position.
Check the CHANNEL DEFEAT light for the upper section LIT.
/c. Place the LOWER SECTION switch to the failed channel position.
/
/ d. Check the CHANNEL DEFEAT light for the lower section LIT.
- 9. Perform the following actions at the Notify IAE.
COMPARATOR AND RATE drawer:
/a. Place the COMPARATOR CHANNEL DEFEAT switch to the failed channel position.
/
/ b. Check the COMPARATOR DEFEAT light LIT.
NOTE Removing fuses from power range drawers may cause associated NIS annunciators to alarm.
- 10. Trip bistables of failed channel as follows:
Ja. Remove Control Power fuses from POWER RANGE A drawer for failed channel.
a/b. if Power Range Cabinet shows evidence of damage (i.e. visual smoke or abnormal smell), THEN remove Instrument Power fuses from POWER RANGE B drawer.
MNS MALFUNCTION OF NUCLEAR INSTRUMENTATION PAGE NO.
AP111A15500116 15 of 18 Case III UNIT 1 Power Range Malfunction Rev. 12 ACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSE RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED
- 11. Check the following status lights for the Notify IAE.
failed channel LIT:-
NUC OVERPOWER ROD STOP CH I(Il,Ill,IV) BYP (1SI19)
/. PIR HI FLUX LO STPT (ISI-2)
J. P/R HI FLUX HI STPT (1SI-2)
- PIR HI FLUX RATE (ISI-3).
- 12. Check the following annunciator lights - Notify IAE.
LIT:
P/R HI VOLTAGE FAILURE (1AD-2, F-3)
P/R HI FLUX HI STPT ALERT (1AD-2, A-3) 7 PIR HI FLUX RATE ALER (1AD-2, A-i).
- 13. Check the following status lights on Perform the following:
ISI-18 LIT:
/ a. Check P/R HI FLUX LO STPT ALERT V. P/R LO SETPOINT TRAIN A TRIP alarm (IAD-2, A-2) LIT.
BLOCKED V
/* PIR LO SETPOINT TRAIN B TRIP
- b. if alarm is dark, THEN notify IAE to investigate.
BLOCKED.
/14. Check all CF control valves IN AUTO.
- WHEN SIGs at programmed level AND auto control desired, THEN place CF control valve(s) in auto.
/15. Ensure operable PIR channel selected to record on NIS Recorder.
4 6 . Adjust control rods to maintain T-Avg at if rods will not move in manual, THEN T-Ref. adjust turbine load to maintain T-Avg at T-Ref.
MNS I MALFUNCTION OF NUCLEAR INSTRUMENTATION I PAGE NO.
API1IAI5500/16 I Case III I 16 of 18 UNIT 1 I Power Range Malfunction Rev.12 I ACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSE 1 I RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED
- 17. WHEN T-Avg within 1°F of T-Ref, AND auto rod control desired, THEN return control rods to auto.
- 18. Instruct IAE to trip the following bistables associated with failed PIR channel within 72 hours8.333333e-4 days <br />0.02 hours <br />1.190476e-4 weeks <br />2.7396e-5 months <br /> of failure PER 1P111A1309O1014 (Tripping Inoperable Protection Channels):
OPDT OTDT.
- 19. fflJA.4Y TIME failed PIR channel is repaired prior to IAE tripping bistables, THEN perform the following:
iJ a. Inform IAE that bistables are no longer required to be tripped.
bib. jStep21.
- 20. ffiA]Jf TIME IAE completes Step 18, Notify IAE.
THEN check the following status lights for affected P!R LIT:
- ForP/RN-41:
- NC LOOP A OPDT RX TRIP (1 Sl-7)
- For P/R N-42:
- NC LOOP B OPDT RX TRIP (1 SI-7)
- For P/R N43:
/ NC LOOP C OPDT RX TRIP (1SI-7)
NC LOOP C OTDT RX TRIP (1 SI-7).
- For P/R N-44:
- NC LOOP D OPDT RXTRIP (lSl-7)
MNS MALFUNCTION OF NUCLEAR INSTRUMENTATION PAGE NO.
AP111A15500116 17 of 18 Case III UNIT 1 Power Range Malfunction Rev. 12 ACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSE RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED
- 21. WHEN malfunctioning P!R channel repaired, THEN perform the following:
- a. Ensure instrument power fuses in POWER RANGE B drawer installed.
- b. Install control power fuses in POWER RANGE A drawer.
- c. Select RESET on the RATE MODE SWITCH.
- d. Check reactor power GREATER
- d. Perform the following:
THAN 25%.
- 1) Check the following bistable -
DARK:
. P!R HI FLUX LO STPT (1SI-2).
- 2) iF bistable lit, THEN notify IAE.
_3) IQStep21.f.
- e. Check the following bistable LIT:
- e. Notify IAE.
- f. Check the following bistables DARK:
- f. Notify IAE.
- PIR HI FLUX HI STPT (ISI-2)
- g. Place COMPARATOR CHANNEL DEFEAT switch to NORMAL.
- h. Place POWER MISMATCH BYPASS switch to OPERATE.
- i. Place UPPER SECTION switch to NORMAL.
- j. Place LOWER SECTION switch to NORMAL.
- k. Place ROD STOP BYPASS switch to OPERATE.
MNS MALFUNCTION OF NUCLEAR INSTRUMENTATION PAGE NO.
AP111A15500116 Case III UNIT 1 Power Range Malfunction Rev 12 ACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSE RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED
- 21. (Continued)
I. IF IAE tripped bistables PER Step 18, THEN perform the following:
- 1) Instruct IAE to place the following bistables for failed channel back in service:
- OPDT
- OTDT.
- 2) WHEN IAE has placed bistables 2) Notify IAE.
back in service, THEN check the following status lights for failed P/R DARK:
- ForP/RN-41:
. NC LOOP A OPDT RX TRIP (1 SI-7)
. NC LOOP A OTDT RX TRIP (1 SI-7).
- For P/R N-42:
. NC LOOP B OPDT RX TRIP (lSl-7)
. NC LOOP B OTDT RX TRIP (ISI-7).
- For P/R N-43:
. NC LOOP C OPDT RX TRIP (1 SI-7)
. NC LOOP C OTDT RX TRIP (1SI-7).
- For P/R N-44:
- NC LOOP D OPDT RX TRIP (1 SI-7)
END
Appendix C Job Performance Measure Form ES-C-i Worksheet SIM JPM G 2010 Systems Control Room JPM G
- NUREG 1021, Revision 9
Appendix C Page 2 of 14 Form ES-C-i Job Performance Measure Worksheet Facility: McGuire Task No.:
Task
Title:
Isolate the Circulating Water System JPM No.: 2010 Systems Control During Turbine Building Flooding Room JPM G K/A
Reference:
075 A2.02 2.5/2.7 Examinee: Examiner:
Facility Evaluator: Date:
Method of testing:
Simulated Performance: Actual Performance: X Classroom Simulator X Plant READ TO THE EXAMINEE I will explain the initial conditions, which steps to simulate or discuss, and provide initiating cues. When you complete the task successfully, the objective for this Job Performance Measure will be satisfied.
Initial Conditions: With Unit I at 100% power, massive RC System Flooding occurred in the Unit I Turbine Building.
The crew has implemented AP/0/A/5500/44 (Plant Flooding) Enclosure I (Unit I Turbine Bldg Flooding), and an operator has just been dispatched to check the flood doors closed.
The crew has just manually tripped the reactor.
An operator has been dispatched to close the breaker for I RC-21.
The U-i Turbine Building Rounds NEO (Bob) is standing by via radio.
Task Standard: The operator takes actions to isolate the Unit 1 RC System.
Required Materials: None General
References:
AP/0/A15500/44 (Plant Flooding)
PT/0/A14600/1 13 (Operator Time Critical Task Verification), Enclosure 13.16 (Isolating Internal Plant Flooding)
EP/i/A/5000/E-0 (Reactor Trip or Safety Injection)
EP/1 /A15000/ES-0. 1 (Reactor Trip Response)
Handouts: Enclosure 1 (Unit 1 Turbine Bldg Flooding) of AP/0/A/5500/44 (Plant Flooding) marked upfor place-keeping through Step 6.c RNO c.2.
2010 Systems Control Room JPM G NUREG 1021, Revision 9
Appendix C Page 3 of 14 Form ES-C-i Job Performance Measure Worksheet Initiating Cue: The CRS has directed you to isolate the RC System by continuing with Enclosure I (Unit I Turbine Bldg Flooding) of AP/O/A15500/44 (Plant Flooding), step 6.d, and completing all Step 6 substeps, while the crew continues with EPI1IAJ5000/E-O (Reactor Trip and/or Safety Injection).
This is a Time Critical JPM Time Critical Task: YES 40 minutes.
Validation Time: 15 minutes 2010 Systems Control Room JPM G NUREG 1021, Revision 9
Appendix C Page 4 of 14 Form ES-C-i Job Performance Measure Worksheet SIMULATOR OPERATIONAL GUIDELINES
- 1. Reset simulator to IC-39, 100% Power
- 2. Place in RUN and allow time to stabilize
- 3. Overide MCB Annunciator 1AD8/C4, TURB ROOM SUMP UNIT 1 HI-HI LEVEL to ON.
- 4. Manually trip reactor.
- 5. Complete EP/1/A/5000/E-0 through Step 6, and EP/i/A/5000/ES-0.i through Step 16.
- 6. Acknowledge all alarms.
- 7. Freeze the Simulator.
- 1. Reset to Temp IC-247 (April, 2010).
- 2. Place Simulator in Run and acknowledge alarms/Reset SLIMS.
NOTE: Simulator Instructor will need to operate Trigger #1 at JPM Step 6.
2010 Systems Control Room JPM G
- NUREG 1021, Revision 9
Appendix C Page 5 of 14 Form ES-C-i PERFORMANCE INFORMATION (Denote Critical Steps with an asterisk*)
Provide Candidate with Initial Conditions!Cue (Last Page of this JPM), and Handout Enclosure I (Unit I Turbine Bldg Flooding) of APIOIA!5500144 (Plant Flooding) marked up for place-keeping through Step 6.c RNO c.2.
START TIME:
STEPS ELEMENTS STANDARD S/U COMMENTS REQUIRED FOR UNSAT
- j (Step 6.d) Open Main The operator depresses the condenser VACUUM Vacuum Breaker OPEN BREAKER. pushbutton and observes the Red status light LIT, and Green status light OFF.
- 2 (Step 6.e) Stop all Unit 1 The operator depresses the RC pumps: IA RC Pump STOP
. 1A RC pump pushbutton and observes the Green status light LIT, and Red status light OFF (Amps indicate 0).
. 1 B RC pump The operator depresses the lB RC Pump STOP pushbutton and observes the Green status light LIT, and Red status light OFF (Amps indicate 0).
The operator depresses the
. lCRCpump 1CRCPumpSTOP pushbutton and observes the Green status light LIT, and Red status light OFF (Amps indicate 0).
. 1 D RC pump The operator depresses the ID RC Pump STOP pushbutton and observes the Green status light LIT, and Red status light OFF (Amps indicate 0).
2010 Systems Control Room JPM G NUREG 1021, Revision 9
Appendix C Page 6 of 14 Form ES-C-i PERFORMANCE INFORMATION STEPS ELEMENTS STANDARD S/U COMMENTS REQUIRED FOR UNSAT
- 3 (Step 6.f) Press close pushbutton on the following Examiner Note:
valves:
The operator may NOT wait for these valves to complete stroking, prior to proceeding (Bulleted Substeps), The procedure checks their position later.
The operator depresses the
- 1RC-9 (1A1 Main 1RC-9 CLOSE pushbutton Condenser Waterbox and observes the Green Inlet Iso!) status light LIT, and Red status light OFF.
- 1RC-1O (1A2 Main The operator depresses the Condenser Waterbox 1RC-1O CLOSE pushbutton Inlet Iso!) and observes the Green status light LIT, and Red status light OFF.
- 1RC-1i (1B1 Main The operator depresses the Condenser Waterbox IRC-1i CLOSE pushbutton Inlet Iso!) and observes the Green status light LIT, and Red status light OFF.
- 1 RC-12 (1 B2 Main The operator depresses the Condenser Waterbox 1RC-12 CLOSE pushbutton Inlet Iso!) and observes the Green status light LIT, and Red status light OFF.
- 1RC-13 (IC1 Main The operator depresses the Condenser Waterbox 1RC-i3 CLOSE pushbutton In let Iso!) and observes the Green status light LIT, and Red Continued status light OFF.
NEXT PAGE 2010 Systems Control Room JPM G NUREG 1021, Revision 9
Appendix C Page 7 of 14 Form ES-C-i PERFORMANCE INFORMATION STEPS ELEMENTS STANDARD S/U COMMENTS REQUIRED FOR UNSAT
- 3
- IRC-i4 (1C2 Main The operator depresses the Condenser Waterbox 1RC-14 CLOSE pushbutton (coNTD) Inlet Isol). and observes the Green status light LIT, and Red status light OFF.
4 (Note prior to Step 6.g) RC The operator reads the crossover supply and Note and proceeds.
discharge valve indications are on Unit I OAC (RC graphic).
5 (Step 6.g) Check 1 RC-22 The operator observes the (Ui RC Crossover To U2 OAC (RC Graphic) 1RC-22 RC Disch Isol) OPEN.
is RED.
Examiner Cue:
Alert Booth Operator to operate Trigger #1.
Simulator Instructor:
Operate Trigger #1.
Afterwards, Call as NEO, and report that the breaker for I RC-21 has been closed.
6 (Step 6.h) Check 1 RC-7 The operator observes the (Ui RC Crossover To U2 1RC7 Red status light LIT, RC Supply Isol) OPEN.
and Green status light OFF.
- 7 (Step 6.i) Press close The operator depresses the pushbutton for 1RC-5 (Ui 1RC-5 CLOSE pushbutton RC Crossover Supply Iso). and observes the Green status light LIT, and Red status light OFF.
2010 Systems Control Room JPM G NUREG 1021, Revision 9
Appendix C Page 8 of 14 Form ES-C-i PERFORMANCE INFORMATION STEPS ELEMENTS STANDARD S/U COMMENTS REQUIRED FOR UNSAT
- 8 (Step 6.j) WHEN breaker for The operator observes the 1RC-21 is closed, THEN 1RC-21 Red status light press the close pushbutton LIT, and Green status light for 1RC-21 (UI RC OFF.
Crossover Disch Isol)
The operator depresses the 1RC-21 CLOSE pushbutton and observes the Green status light LIT, and Red status light OFF.
- 9 (Step 6.k) Press close pushbutton on the following Unit 1 RC discharge gates:
. 1 RC-79 (1A Main The operator depresses the Condenser Discharge 1 RC-79 CLOSE Gate) pushbutton.
. 1 RC-80 (1 B Main The operator depresses the Condenser Discharge -
Gate) pushbutton.
. The operator depresses the
. 1RC-81(iCMain 1RC-81 CLOSE Condenser Discharge pushbutton.
Gate) 10 (Step 6.1) Record time. The operator records the time in the space provided.
11 (Note prior to Step 6.m) The operator reads the Waterbox isolation valves Note and proceeds.
take 1-2 minutes to close.
2010 Systems Control Room JPM G NUREG 1021, Revision 9
Appendix C Page 9 of 14 Form ES-C-i PERFORMANCE INFORMATION STEPS ELEMENTS STANDARD S/U COMMENTS REQUIRED FOR UNSAT
- 12 (Step 6.m) Close waterbox outlet valves as follows:
- WHEN 1 RC-9 is closed, The operator, after THEN close 1RC-15 observing the associated (1AI Main Condenser Waterbox Inlet Valve Green Waterbox Outlet Isol). status light LIT, depresses the associated Waterbox
- WHEN 1RC-iOis Outlet Valve CLOSE closed, THEN close pushbutton and observes 1RC-i6 (1A2 Main the Green status light LIT, Condenser Waterbox and Red status light OFF, Outlet Isol). for each valve.
- WHEN 1RC-11 is closed, THEN close 1RC-17 (1B1 Main Condenser Waterbox Outlet Isol).
- WHEN 1RC-l2is closed, THEN close 1RC-18 (1B2 Main Condenser Waterbox Outlet lsol).
- WHEN 1RC-i3is closed, THEN close 1RC-19 (1C1 Main Condenser Waterbox Outlet Isol).
- WHEN 1RC-i4is closed, THEN close 1RC-20 (1C2 Main Condenser Waterbox Outlet Isol).
13 (Step 6.n) Check 1RC-5 The operator observes the (Ui RC Crossover Supply I RC-5 Green status light Isol) CLOSED.
LIT, and Red status light OFF.
14 (Step 6.0) Check 1RC-21 The operator observes the (Ui RC Crossover Disch 1RC-2i Green status light Isol) CLOSED.
LIT, and Red status light OFF.
2010 Systems Control Room JPM G
- NUREG 1021, Revision 9
Appendix C Page 10 of 14 Form ES-C-I PERFORMANCE INFORMATION STEPS ELEMENTS STANDARD S/U COMMENTS REQUIRED FOR UNSAT 15 (Step 6.p) Place 1 RL-1 8 The operator places the (Unit 1 LT Coolers Control) 1RL-18 Controller in in manual and close. MANUAL, and adjusts so that 1RL-18 is CLOSED (Output = 0).
16 (Step 6.q) Dispatch The operator contacts an operator to perform the NEO to take both actions.
following:
Close 1RL-13 (1A LT Cooler Inlet Isol) (Unit 1 Booth CUE:
turbine bldg, 760+10, 1GG-33 & 1 F-33, north of MTOT As NEO, acknowledge.
room)
Close 1RL-15 (lB LT Cooler Inlet Isol) (Unit I turbine bldg, 739+5 1G-33
& 1 FF-33, bottom of stairway).
17 (Step 6.r) Check The operator contacts the Unwatering pump OUT OF NEO (or WCC) in the Unit 1 SERVICE. Turbine Building.
Booth CUE:
As NEO (0rWCCS) in UI TB, the Unwatering Pump is NOT in service.
18 (Note prior to Step 6.s) RC The operator reads the pump discharge valve Note and proceeds.
indications are on RCPMPS graphic. These valves should automatically close when their respective RC pump is stopped.
2010 Systems Control Room JPM G NUREG 1021, Revision 9
Appendix C Page 11 of 14 Form ES-C-I PERFORMANCE INFORMATION STEPS ELEMENTS STANDARD S/U COMMENTS REQUIRED FOR UNSAT 19 (Step 6.s) Check the following RC Inlet valves -
CLOSED:
. 1RC-1 (1A RC Pump The operator observes OAC Disch Isol) Graphic (RC PMPS) showing IRC-l as GREEN.
. 1 RC-2 1 B RC The operator observes OAC Disch Isol) rap ic showing 1RC-2 as GREEN.
The operator observes OAC
. 1RC-3 (1C RC Pump Graphic (RC PMPS)
Disch Isol) showing IRC-3 as GREEN.
. 1 RC-4 (1 D RC Pump The operator observes OAC Disch Isol). Graphic (RC PMPS) showing 1 RC-4 as GREEN.
20 (Note prior to Step 6.t) The operator reads the Discharge gates can take Note and proceeds.
up to 1 1 minutes to close from time recorded in Step 6.1.
2010 Systems Control Room JPM G NUREG 1021, Revision 9
Appendix C Page 12 of 14 Form ES-C-i PERFORMANCE INFORMATION STEPS ELEMENTS STANDARD S/U COMMENTS REQUIRED FOR UNSAT 21 (Step 6.t) Check the following RC discharge gates on Unit 1 CLOSED:
. 1RC-79 (IA Main The operator observes the Condenser Discharge I RC-79 Green and Red Gate) status light LIT.
. I RC-80 (1 B Main The operator observes the Condenser Discharge 1RC-80 Green and Red Gate) status light LIT.
The operator observes the
. 1RC-81 (1C Main 1RC-81 Green and Red Condenser Discharge status light LIT.
Gate).
Examiner NOTE:
These Valves will most likely still be stroking close (z13 minutes closure time).
Terminating Cue: Evaluation on this JPM is complete.
STOP TIME:
2010 Systems Control Room JPM G NUREG 1021, Revision 9
Appendix C Page 13 of 14 Form ES-C-I VERIFICATION OF COMPLETION Job Performance Measure No.: 2010 Systems Control Room JPM G Examinees Name:
Date Performed:
Facility Evaluator:
Number of Attempts:
Time to Complete:
Question Documentation:
Result: SAT UNSAT Examiners Signature: Date:
2010 Systems Control Room JPM G NUREG 1021, Revision 9
Appendix C Form ES-C-i JPM CUE SHEET INITIAL CONDITIONS: With Unit I at 100% power, massive RC System Flooding occurred in the Unit I Turbine Building.
The crew has implemented AP/01N5500/44 (Plant Flooding)
Enclosure I (Unit I Turbine Bldg Flooding), and an operator has just been dispatched to check the flood doors closed.
The crew has just manually tripped the reactor.
An operator has been dispatched to close the breaker for I RC-21.
The U-i Turbine Building Rounds NEC (Bob) is standing by via radio.
INITIATING CUE: The CRS has directed you to isolate the RC System by continuing with Enclosure 1 (Unit 1 Turbine Bldg Flooding) of APIOIAI5500/44 (Plant Flooding), step 6.d, and completing all Step 6 substeps, while the crew continues with EP/1/A/5000/E-0 (Reactor Trip and/or Safety Injection).
This is a Time Critical JPM NUREG 1021, Revision 9
MNS PLANT FLOODING PAGE NO.
AP/01A15500144 5 of 293 Enclosure 1 Page 1 of 17 UNIT 0 Unit I Turbine Bldg Flooding Rev. 9 1 ACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSE RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED j/1. Announce occurrence over page.
- 2. if PJ ANY TIME flooding has been reduced to a manageable leak, THEN GO TO Step 10.
Dispatch operator to locally monitor status of flood PER Enclosure 8 (Unit I Turbine Bldg Flood Monitoring).
/4. Select source of flooding and indicated step or enclosure:
SOURCE Step or Enclosure Massive Flooding on a single condenser Step 5 waterbox section Massive RC system flooding
. More than one waterbox section
. RC piping RC to Feedwater pump Condensers Step 7 RC to Condensate Coolers Step B CA Piping rupture Step 9 RL piping to MTOT oil cooler Enclosure 5 (Isolation of RC Crossover Header)
Step 6 RC Crossover piping or components EnclosureS (Isolation
. Shared of RC Crossover Header)
. RC to RN Supply line
. RE system
. RC to KR Heat Exchangers RF Piping Enclosure 6 (Flooding from Fire Protection Piping)
r L
MNS AP101A15500144 PLANT FLOODING Enclosure 1 Page 2 of 17 PAGE NO.
6 of 293 Rev. 9 UNIT 0 Unit I Turbihe Bldg Flooding ACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSE RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED
- 5. To isolate a single waterbox section, perform the following:
- a. Dispatch operator to check flood doors closed PER Enclosure 10 (Flood Doors).
NOTE Waterbox Isolation valves take 1-2 minutes to close.
- b. Close isolation valves on affected waterbox:
CAUTION Isolating IAI waterbox could affect hotwell level indication.
- 1) For 1A1 waterbox: 1) IF either waterbox isolation valve fails to close, THEN GOIQStep 6.
a) Close 1RC-9 (1A1 Main Condenser Waterbox Inlet Isol).
b) WHEN inlet valve closed, THEN close 1RC-15(1A1 Main Condenser Waterbox Outlet Isol).
- 2) For 1A2 waterbox: 2) IF either waterbox isolation valve fails to close, THEN GO TO Step 6.
a) Close 1RC-10 (1A2 Main Condenser Waterbox Inlet lsol).
b) WHEN inlet valve closed, THEN close IRC-16 (1A2 Main Condenser Waterbox Outlet Isol).
- 3) For 1 Bi waterbox: 3) IF either waterbox isolation valve fails to close, THEN GO TO Step 6.
a) Close 1RC-11 (1B1 Main Condenser Waterbox Inlet Isol).
b) WHEN inlet valve closed, THEN close 1RC-17 (1B1 Main Condenser Waterbox Outlet Isol).
MNS PLANT FLOODING PAGE NO.
AP101A15500144 of 293 Enclosure 1 Page 3 of 17 Rev. 9 UNIT 0 Unit I Turbine Bldg Flooding ACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSE RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED 1
- 5. (Continued)
- 4) For 1 B2 waterbox: 4) IF either waterbox isolation valve fails to close, THEN QQ[QStep 6.
a) Close 1RC-12 (1B2 Main Condenser Waterbox In let lsol).
b) WHEN inlet valve closed, THEN close 1RC-18 (1B2 Main Condenser Waterbox Outlet Isol).
- 5) For 1C1 waterbox: 5) IF either waterbox isolation valve fails to close, THEN GO TO Step 6.
a) Close 1RC-13 (1C1 Main Condenser Waterbox Inlet lsol).
b) WHEN inlet valve closed, THEN close 1RC-19 (1C1 Main Condenser Waterbox Outlet Isol).
- 6) For 1 C2 waterbox: 6) IF either waterbox isolation valve fails to close, THEN GO TO Step 6.
a) Close 1RC-14 (1C2 Main Condenser Waterbox Inlet lsol).
b) WHEN inlet valve closed, THEN close 1RC-20 (1C2 Main Condenser Waterbox Outlet Isol).
- c. Reduce turbine load as necessary to maintain T-Avg at T-Ref.
- d. Check flooding REDUCED TO A
- d. Perform the following:
MANAGEABLE LEAK.
- 1) IF flood still exists due to failure of individual water box isolation valve, THEN GO TO Step 6.
- 2) Reevaluate source of flooding and RETURN TO Step 4.
_e. GOTOSteplO.
MNS PLANT FLOODING PAGE NO.
APIOIAI5500/44 8 of 293 Enclosure 1 Page 4 of 17 Rev. 9 UNIT 0 Unit I Turbine Bldg Flooding ACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSE RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED
- 6. To isolate for massive RC system flooding in Unit I Turbine Building, perform the following:
/a. Check Enclosure 10 (Flood Doors) - a. Dispatch operator to check flood doors HAS BEEN IMPLEMENTED. closed PER Enclosure 10 (Flood Doors).
Q Dispatch operator to remove white tag and close 1 MXA R8C (RC Crossover Disch Isol Motor (1RC-21)) (Unit 1 TB basement, at 1 B2 Feedwater Heater).
Vc. Check Unit 1 reactor TRIPPED.
- c. Peorm the following:
- 1) Trip Unit 1 reactor.
- 2) Have another operator continue with this AP.
- 3) GO TO EP/1IAJ5000IE-0 (Reactor Trip or Safety Injection).
- d. Open Main condenser VACUUM BREAKER.
- e. Stop all Unit 1 RC pumps:
- lARCpump
- lB RC pump
- lCRCpump
- lDRCpump.
MNS PLANT FLOODING PAGE NO.
AP101A15500144 9 of 293 Enclosure 1 Page 5 of 17 Rev. 9 UNIT 0 Unit I Turbine Bldg Flooding ACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSE RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED
- 6. (Continued)
- f. Press close pushbutton on the following valves:
. 1RC-9 (1A1 Main Condenser Waterbox Inlet Isol)
. 1RC-1O (1A2 Main Condenser Waterbox Inlet Iso!)
. 1RC-11 (1B1 Main Condenser Waterbox Inlet Isol)
. 1RC-12 (1B2 Main Condenser Waterbox Inlet Iso!)
. 1RC-13 (1C1 Main Condenser Waterbox Inlet Iso!)
. 1RC-14 (1C2 Main Condenser Waterbox Inlet Isol).
NOTE RC crossover supply and discharge valve indications are on Unit 1 QAC (RC graphic).
- g. Check 1 RC-22 (Ui RC Crossover To
- g. GO TO Step 4 of Enclosure 5 (Isolation U2 RC Disch Isol) OPEN.
- of RC Crossover Header) to isolate entire RC Crossover Header.
- h. Check 1 RC-7 (Ui RC Crossover To U2 h. Perform the following:
RC Supply Isol) OPEN.
- 1) Open 1RC-7.
- 2) IF 1RC-7 will not open, THEN GO TO Step 4 of Enclosure 5 (Isolation of RC Crossover Header) to isolate entire RC Crossover Header.
- i. Press close pushbutton for 1RC-5 (Ui RC Crossover Supply Iso!).
- j. WHEN breaker for 1RC-21 is closed, THEN press close pushbutton for 1RC-21 (Ui RC Crossover Disch Isol).
MNS PLANT FLOODING PAGE NO.
AP/01A15500144 10 of 293 Enclosure 1 Page 6 of 17 Rev. 9 UNIT 0 Unit I Turbine Bldg Flooding ACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSE RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED 1
- 6. (Continued)
- k. Press close pushbutton on the following Unit 1 RC discharge gates:
. 1RC-79 (1A Main Condenser Discharge Gate)
. 1RC-80 (lB Main Condenser Discharge Gate)
. 1RC-81 (1C Main Condenser Discharge Gate).
I. Record time NOTE Waterbox isolation valves take 1-2 minutes to close.
- m. Close waterbox outlet valves as follows:
. WHEN 1RC-9 is closed, THEN close IRC-15 (1A1 Main Condenser Waterbox Outlet Isol).
. WHEN 1RC-10 is closed, THEN close 1RC-16 (1A2 Main Condenser Waterbox Outlet Isol).
. WHEN 1 RC-1 1 is closed, THEN close 1RC-17 (1B1 Main Condenser Waterbox Outlet Isol).
. WHEN 1RC-12 is closed, THEN close 1RC-18 (1B2 Main Condenser Waterbox Outlet so!).
- WHEN 1RC-13 is closed, THEN close 1RC-19 (1C1 Main Condenser Waterbox Outlet Iso!).
- WHEN 1RC-14 is closed, THEN close 1RC-20 (1C2 Main Condenser Waterbox Outlet Iso!).
MNS PLANT FLOODING PAGE NO.
APIO/A15500144 11 of 293 Enclosure 1 Page 7 of 17 Rev. 9 UNIT 0 Unit I Turbine Bldg Flooding ACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSE RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED
- 6. (Continued)
RC Crossover Supply Isol) (Unit 1 turbine bldg, 737, 1C-25 & 1C-26, west of 1C2 waterbox inlet in pit).
- o. Check 1RC-21 (Ui RC Crossover Disch o. Perform the following:
Isol) CLOSED.
- 1) Contact security to provide access to Alarm Door 3230.
- 2) Dispatch operator to unlock and close 1RC-21 (Ui RC Crossover Disch Iso!) (Unit 1 turbine bldg, 7391J-31, bunker between 1A2 and 1 C2 feedwater heaters).
- p. Place 1 RL-1 8 (Unit 1 LT Coolers Control) in manual and close.
- q. Dispatch operator to perform the following:
. Close 1RL-13 (1A LI Cooler Inlet Iso!) (Unit 1 turbine bldg, 760+/-10, 1 GG-33 & 1 F-33, north of MTOT room)
. Close 1RL-15 (lB LT Cooler Inlet Iso!) (Unit 1 turbine bldg, 739+5 1G-33 & 1FF-33, bottom of stairway).
- r. Check Unwatering pump OUT OF- r. Contact station management to SERVICE, evaluate securing Unwatering pump.
MNS PLANT FLOODING PAGE NO.
AP101A15500144 12 of 293 Enclosure 1 Page 8 of 17 Rev. 9 UNIT 0 Unit I Turbine Bldg Flooding ACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSE RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED
- 6. (Continued)
NOTE RC pump discharge valve indications are on RCPMPS graphic. These valves should automatically close when their respective RC pump is stopped.
- s. Check the following RC Inlet valves - s. Dispatch operator to close affected CLOSED: valve(s).
- 1RC-1 (1A RC Pump Disch lsol)
- 1RC-2 (lB RC Pump Disch Isol)
- IRC-3 (1C RC Pump Disch Isol)
- 1RC-4 (1D RC Pump Disch Iso!).
NOTE Discharge gates can take up to 11 minutes to close from time recorded in Step 6.1.
- t. Check the following RC discharge gates t. Perform the following:
on Unit 1 CLOSED:
- 1) Do not continue until discharge
. 1RC-79 (1A Main Condenser gates have had a chance to fully Discharge Gate) close.
. 1 RC-80 (1 B Main Condenser 2) IF any discharge gate will not close, Discharge Gate) THEN perform the following:
. 1RC-81 (1C Main Condenser . Contact Security (2688) and have Discharge Gate). them meet operator at protected area gate 27 (intake structure) and escort them through the Zone and out gate 31 (discharge structure).
. Dispatch operator to meet security at protected area gate 27 (intake structure) and close Unit 1 RC Discharge Gates.
- u. Check flooding REDUCED TO A
- u. Reevaluate source of flooding and MANAGEABLE LEAK. RETURN TO Step 4.
- v. GOTO Step 10.
Appendix C Job Performance Measure Form ES-C-I Worksheet SIM JPM H 2010 Systems Control Room JPM H
- NUREG 1021, Revision 9
Appendix C Page 2 of 15 Form ES-C-i Job Performance Measure Worksheet Facility: McGuire Task No.:
Task
Title:
Remove Pressurizer Heaters from JPM No.: 2010 Systems Control Service Room JPM H KJA
Reference:
010, A4.02, 3.6/3A Examinee: NRC Examiner:
Facility Evaluator: Date:
Method of testing:
Simulated Performance: Actual Performance: X Classroom Simulator X Plant READ TO THE EXAMINEE I will explain the initial conditions, which steps to simulate or discuss, and provide initiating cues. When you complete the task successfully, the objective for this Job Performance Measure will be satisfied.
Initial Conditions: Unit 1 has just been raised to 100% per OP!i/A16100/003 (Controlling Procedure for Unit Operation).
Chemistry has confirmed that the Boron Concentration difference between the Pzr and the NC System is 4 ppm.
Task Standard: The operator will remove the A, B and D Pzr Heater Groups from service in accordance with Step 3.4.4 of Enclosure 4.6, and then after responding to the failure, manually control pressure using at least one other heater groups. The operator will place at least one Pzr Heater Group in service in accordance with Step 3.3.1 (or equivalent) of Enclosure 4.6, before MCB Annunciator 1AD-6, C6 alarms.
Required Materials: None General
References:
OP/1!A/6i00/003 (Controlling Procedure for Unit Operation)
OP/1/A16i00/OiOG (Annunciator Response for Panel IAD-6)
SOMP 04-02 (Procedure Use and Adherence)
Handouts: Enclosure 4.6 (Operation of Pzr Heaters) of OP/i /A/6i00/003 (Controlling Procedure for Unit Operation) 2010 Systems Control Room JPM H
- NUREG 1021, Revision 9
Appendix C Page 3 of 15 Form ES-C-I Job Performance Measure Worksheet Initiating Cue: The CRS has directed you to remove Pzr Heater Groups A, B and D from service per Enclosure 4.6 (Operation of Pzr Heaters) of 0P111A161001003, and ensure that NC System pressure is being controlled normally at 2235 psig.
All outstanding R&Rs that may impact performance of Enclosure 4.6 have been evaluated.
Time Critical Task: NO Validation Time: 25 minutes 2010 Systems Control Room JPM H
- NUREG 1021, Revision 9
Appendix C Page 4 of 15 Form ES-C-i Job Performance Measure Worksheet SIMULATOR OPERATIONAL GUIDELINES
- 1. Reset simulator to IC-39 (100%)
- 2. Ensure Simulator reflects having been completed through Step 3.22.7.4 of OP/1/A/6100/003, Enclosure 4.1 (Power Increase).
- 3. Ensure that Pzr Heaters groups A, B, and D are energized.
- 4. Insert OVR-NCO96D = ON; and ANN-ADO6-D06 ON, on Trigger #1.
- 5. Acknowledge Alarms and Freeze Simulator OR
- 1. Reset Simulator to Temporary Snap lC-248 (April, 2010).
- 2. Momentarily place Simulator in Run to acknowledge alarms.
- 3. Leave Simulator in FREEZE until operator is ready to begin.
NOTE: During the performance of this JPM, the simulator operator will need to Operate Trigger # I at Step 20 of the JPM.
2010 Systems Control Room JPM H NUREG 1021, Revision 9
Appendix C Page 5 of 15 Form ES-C-i PERFORMANCE INFORMATION (Denote Critical Steps with an asterisk*)
Provide Candidate with Initial ConditionslCue (Last Page of this JPM, and Handout .6 (Operation of Pzr Heaters) of OPIIIAI6I 001003.
START TIME:
STEPS ELEMENTS STANDARD S/U COMMENTS REQUIRED FOR UNSAT Simulator Instructor NOTE: Leave Simulator in FREEZE until operator is ready to begin.
(Enclosure 4.6, Step 3.1) The operator recognizes Evaluate all outstanding that this step has already R&Rs that may impact been performed (Initial performance of this Conditions), and proceeds.
procedure.
2 (Note prior to Step 3.2) The operator reads the During steady state Note and proceeds.
conditions, Pzr Htr Groups are normally OFF and in AUTO.
3 (Step 3.2) Perform the The operator recognizes following sections as that Section 3.4 is the applicable: applicable section and proceeds to Section 34.
. Section 3.3, Placing A, B, D Pzr Heater Groups in Service.
. Section 3.4, Removing A, B, D Pzr Heater Groups form Service.
. Section 3.5, Placing C Pzr Heater Group in Service.
. Section 3.6, Removing C Pzr Heater Group from Service.
2010 Systems Control Room JPM H
- NUREG 1021, Revision 9
Appendix C Page 6 of 15 Form ES-C-i PERFORMANCE INFORMATION STEPS ELEMENTS STANDARD S/U COMMENTS REQUIRED FOR UNSAT (Step 3.4) Removing A, B, D Pzr Heater Groups From Service (Caution prior to Step 3.4.1) The operator reads the Pzr Htr Groups and Pzr Caution and proceeds.
Spray Controls should be operated with extreme caution to prevent NC System pressure transients.
(Step 3.4.1) Ensure Boron The operator recognizes Concentration difference that this condition is already between Pzr and NC met (Initial Conditions), and System less than 50 ppm. proceeds.
(Step 3.4.2) IF three Pzr Htr The operator recognizes Groups in service AND that this step is NOT desire to operate with two applicable and proceeds.
Pzr Htr Groups in service 6 (Step 3.4.3) IF three Pzr Htr The operator recognizes Groups in service AND that this step is NOT desire to operate with one applicable and proceeds.
Pzr Htr Group in service (Step 3.4.4) IF three Pzr Htr
- 7 Groups in service AND desire to remove all Pzr Htr Groups from service, perform the following:
(Step 3.4.4.1) Place one of The operator rotates either the following in AUTO: the A, B or D Pzr Htr Mode A Pzr Htr Mode Select Select Switch counter -
clockwise to AUTO.
B Pzr Htr Mode Select D Pzr Htr Mode Select 2010 Systems Control Room JPM H
- NUREG 1021, Revision 9
Appendix C Page 7 of 15 Form ES-C-i PERFORMANCE INFORMATION STEPS ELEMENTS STANDARD S/U COMMENTS REQUIRED FOR UNSAT 8 (Step 3.4.4.2) Check The operator observes the associated Pzr Htr Group in Green status light LIT and OFF. the Red status light OFF for the heater group, whose A Pzr Htr Group Mode Select Switch was B Pzr Htr Group moved to AUTO in the D Pzr Htr Group previous step.
9 (Step 3.4.4.3) Monitor Pzr The operator observes pressure for 2 minutes. actual Pressurizer Pressure and Spray Valve position (Or equivalent) for 2 minutes and determines that Pzr Pressure has stabilized.
Examiner Cue:
2 minutes has elapsed.
- 10 (Step 3.4.4.4) Place second Pzr Htr Mode Select Switch in AUTO:
The operator rotates either A Pzr Htr Mode Select th A, B or D Pzr Htr Mode B Pzr Htr Mode Select Select Switch counter D Pzr Htr Mode Select clockwise to AUTO.
ii (Step 3.4.4.5) Check The operator observes the associated Pzr Htr Group in Green status light LIT and OFF. the Red status light OFF for the heater group, whose A Pzr Htr Group Mode Select Switch was B Pzr Htr Group moved to AUTO in the D Pzr Htr Group previous step.
2010 Systems Control Room JPM H
- NUREG 1021, Revision 9
Appendix C Page 8 of 15 Form ES-C-i PERFORMANCE INFORMATION STEPS ELEMENTS STANDARD S/U COMMENTS REQUIRED FOR UNSAT 12 (Step 34.46) Monitor Pzr The operator observes pressure for 2 minutes. actual Pressurizer Pressure and Spray Valve position (Or equivalent) for 2 minutes and determines that Pzr Pressure has stabilized.
Examiner Cue:
2 minutes has elapsed.
13 (Note prior to Step 3.4.4.7) The operator reads the Steps 3.4.4.7 3.4.4.10 C Note and proceeds.
should be performed without delay.
- 14 (Step 3.4.4.7) Place third The operator rotates either Pzr Htr Mode Select Switch the A, B or D Pzr Htr Mode in AUTO: Select Switch counter clockwise to AUTO.
A Pzr Htr Mode Select B Pzr Htr Mode Select D Pzr Htr Mode Select 15 (Step 3.4.4.8) Check The operator observes the associated Pzr Htr Group in Green status light LIT and OFF. the Red status light OFF for the heater group, whose A Pzr Htr Group Mode Select Switch was B Pzr Htr Group moved to AUTO in the D Pzr Htr Group previous step.
2010 Systems Control Room JPM H
- NUREG 1021, Revision 9
Appendix C Page 9 of 15 Form ES-C-i PERFORMANCE INFORMATION STEPS ELEMENTS STANDARD S/U COMMENTS REQUIRED FOR UNSAT 16 (Note prior to Step 3.4.4.9) The operator reads the Placing Pzr Press Master in Note and proceeds.
manual makes automatic operation of INC-34A (Pzr PORV) unavailable and should be evaluated using Electronic Risk Assessment Tool. This assessment should be performed prior to placing the Pzr Press Master in manual.
17 (Step 3.4.4.9) IF time allows The operator informs the AND Unit I in Modes 1-4, CRS.
evaluate unavailability of 1 NC-34A (Pzr PORV) using Electronic Risk Assessment Examiner Cue:
Tool.
As the CRS, indicate that the ERAT has been used, and the Pzr Press Master may be placed in MAN.
- 18 (Step 3.4.4.10) On the DCS The operator observes the Work Station, Pressurizer NC-Pressurizer and PRT and PRT graphic, perform DCS Screen and observes the following: Pressurizer pressure.
(Step 3.4.4.10 A) Place The operator selects Pzr PZR PRESS MASTER in Pressure Master and manual. selects M (Turns RED).
2010 Systems Control Room JPM H
- NUREG 1021, Revision 9
Appendix C Page 10 of 15 Form ES-C-i PERFORMANCE INFORMATION STEPS ELEMENTS STANDARD S/U COMMENTS REQUIRED FOR UNSAT
- 19 (Step 3.4.4.10 B) Adjust Using the NC-Pressurizer PZR PRESS MASTER and PRT DCS Screen, the output until the following operator adjusts until Pzr occurs: Press Master output (DOWN) until the error C Pzr Htr Group begins signal is < 15 psig.
cycling I NC-27C (A Loop Pzr The operator observes C Spray Control) Closes Pzr Heater Group Red 1 NC-29C (B Loop Pzr Status light cycling ON and Spray Control) Closes OFF, and determines that the C Pzr Htr Group is cycling.
The operator observes the INC-27C SLIMs Limit Switch and determines that 1NC-27C is CLOSED.
The operator observes the 1NC-29C SLIMs Limit Switch and determines that INC-29C is CLOSED.
- 20 (Step 3.4.4.10 C) Place Using the NC-Pressurizer PZR PRESS MASTER in and PRT DCS Screen, the auto. operator selects Pzr Pressure Master and selects A (Turns GREEN).
Simulator Instructor NOTE: Operate Trigger # I (PZR VARIABLE HEATERS FAIL) (Alternate Path)
It is expected that MCBAnnunciator IAD6ID6 (PZR HTR CONTROLLER TROUBLE) will ala rm.
2010 Systems Control Room JPM H
- NUREG 1021, Revision 9
Appendix C Page 11 of 15 Form ES-C-I PERFORMANCE INFORMATION STEPS ELEMENTS STANDARD S/U COMMENTS REQUIRED FOR UNSAT
- 21 (Step 3.4.4.11) Monitor Pzr The operator observes pressure for 2 minutes. actual Pressurizer Pressure and Spray valve Position (Or equivalent) and determines that Pzr Pressure is lowering.
The operator observes MCB Annunciator IAD6/D6 and addresses ARP.
22 (OP/I 1A161 00/010 G, The operator observes the Immediate Action I) C Pzr Heater Group Green Remove Group C Heater Status light is LIT, and Group from automatic determines that the Group control by opening supply C Heater supply breaker is breaker. OPEN.
2010 Systems Control Room JPM H
- NUREG 1021, Revision 9
Appendix C Page 12 of 15 Form ES-C-i PERFORMANCE INFORMATION STEPS ELEMENTS STANDARD S/U COMMENTS REQUIRED FOR UNSAT
- 23 (OP/I /A161 00/010 G, The operator recognizes Immediate Action 2) that no Pzr htrs are Manually control pressure energized and proceeds to using other heater groups. Enclosure 4.6, Step 3.3.1 to place one Pzr Htr Group in service.
Examiner Note:
The operator may use one or more Pzr Heater Groups to maintain NC System Pressure within the normal band.
The operator MUST place at least one Pzr Htr Group in service to complete the Critical nature of this task.
The operator should realize the need to get one set of htrs on for pressure control and MAY start that one set of htrs based on ARP guidance to manually control pressure. If NOT, the required OP Steps are scripted.
Examiner Note:
IF MCB Annunciator lAD 6, C6, alarms before the operator energizes one set of Heaters, the Critical Step is Failed.
2010 Systems Control Room JPM H
- NUREG 1021, Revision 9
Appendix C Page 13 of 15 Form ESC-l PERFORMANCE INFORMATION STEPS ELEMENTS STANDARD S/U COMMENTS REQUIRED FOR UNSAT 24 (Enclosure 4.6, Step 3.3)
Placing A, B, D Pzr Heater Groups in service.
(Caution prior to Step 3.3.1) The operator reads the Pzr Htr Groups and Pzr Caution, and proceeds.
Spray Controls should be operated with extreme caution to prevent NC System pressure transients.
(Step 3.3.1) IF desired to operate with one Pzr Htr group in service, perform the following:
(Step 3.3.1.1) Place of the The operator rotates either following in MAN: the A, B or D Pzr Htr Mode A Pzr Htr Mode Select Select Switch clockwise to MAN.
B Pzr Htr Mode Select D Pzr Htr Mode Select 25 (Step 3.3.1.2) Place the The operator depresses the associated Pzr Htr Group in ON pushbutton for the ON: heater group, whose Mode Select Switch was moved to A Pzr Htr Group MAN in the previous step, B Pzr Htr Group and observes the Red D Pzr Htr Group status light LIT and the Green status light OFF.
26 (Step 3.3.1.3) Monitor Pzr The operator observes pressure for 2 minutes. Pressurizer Pressure and Spray valve Position (Or equivalent) for 2 minutes and determines that Pzr Pressure has stabilized at 2235 +/-15 psig.
Terminating Cue: Evaluation on this JPM is complete.
STOP TIME:
2010 Systems Control Room JPM H
- NUREG 1021, Revision 9
Appendix C Page 14 of 15 Form ES-C-i VERIFICATION OF COMPLETION Job Performance Measure No.: 2010 Systems Control Room JPM H Examinees Name:
Date Performed:
Facility Evaluator:
Number of Attempts:
Time to Complete:
Question Documentation:
Result: SAT UNSAT Examiners Signature: Date:
2010 Systems Control Room JPM H
- NUREG 1021, Revision 9
Appendix C Form ES-C-i JPM CUE SHEET INITIAL CONDITIONS: Unit 1 has just been raised to 100% per OP/iIAI6i 00/003 (Controlling Procedure for Unit Operation).
Chemistry has confirmed that the Boron Concentration difference between the Pzr and the NC System is 4 ppm.
INITIATING CUE: The CRS has directed you to remove Pzr Heater Groups A, B and D from service per Enclosure 4.6 (Operation of Pzr Heaters) of OP/1/A/6100/003, and ensure that NC System pressure is being controlled normally at 2235 psig.
All outstanding R&Rs that may impact performance of Enclosure 4.6 have been evaluated.
NUREG 1021, Revision 9
Enclosure 4.6 OPI1/A16100/003 Operation of Pzr Heaters Page 1 of 11
- 1. Limits and Precautions 1.1 Maximum Boron concentration difference between Pzr and NC System is 50 ppm.
- 2. Initial Conditions None
- 3. Procedure El 3.1 Evaluate all outstanding R&Rs that may impact performance of this procedure.
NOTE: During steady state conditions, Pzr Htr Groups are normally OFF and in AUTO.
3.2 Perform the following sections, as applicable:
El Section 3.3, Placing A, B, D Pzr Heater Groups In Service El Section 3.4, Removing A, B, D Pzr Heater Groups From Service El Section 3.5, Placing C Pzr Heater Group In Service El Section 3.6, Removing C Pzr Heater From Service 3.3 Placing A, B, D Pzr Heater Groups In Service CAUTION: Pzr Htr Groups and Pzr Spray Controls should be operated with extreme caution to prevent NC System pressure transients.
El 3.3.1 IF desired to operate with one Pzr Htr group in service, perform the following:
3.3.1.1 Place one of the following in MAN:
El A Pzr Htr Mode Select El B Pzr Htr Mode Select El D Pzr Htr Mode Select 3.3.1.2 Place associated Pzr Htr Group in ON:
El A Pzr Htr Group El B Pzr Htr Group El D Pzr Htr Group El 3.3.1.3 Monitor Pzr pressure for 2 minutes.
Unit 1
Enclosure 4.6 OP/1/A16100/003 Operation of Pzr Heaters Page 2 of 11 El 3.3.2 desired to operate with two Pzr Htr Groups in service, perform the following:
3.3.2.1 Place one of the following in MAN:
El A Pzr Htr Mode Select El B Pzr Htr Mode Select El D Pzr Htr Mode Select 3.3.2.2 Place associated Pzr Htr Group in ON:
El A Pzr Htr Group El B Pzr Htr Group El D Pzr Htr Group El 3.3.2.3 Monitor Pzr pressure for 2 minutes.
3.3.2.4 Ensure second Pzr Htr Mode Select in MAN:
El A Pzr Htr Mode Select El B Pzr Htr Mode Select El D Pzr Htr Mode Select 3.3.2.5 Ensure associated Pzr Htr Group in ON:
El A Pzr Htr Group El B Pzr Htr Group El D Pzr Htr Group El 3.3.2.6 Monitor Pzr pressure for 2 minutes.
Unit 1
Enclosure 4.6 oPIl/AJ6looIoo3 Operation of Pzr Heaters Page 3 of 11 El 3.3.3 ] desired to operate with three Pzr Htr Groups in service, perform the following:
3.3.3.1 Place one of the following in MAN:
El A Pzr Htr Mode Select El B Pzr Htr Mode Select El D Pzr Htr Mode Select 3.3.3.2 Place associated Pzr Htr Group in ON:
El A Pzr Htr Group El B Pzr Htr Group El D Pzr Htr Group El 3.3.3.3 Monitor Pzr pressure for 2 minutes.
3.3.3.4 Ensure second Pzr Htr Mode Select in MAN:
El A Pzr Htr Mode Select El B Pzr Htr Mode Select El D Pzr Htr Mode Select 3.3.3.5 Ensure associated Pzr Htr Group in ON:
El A Pzr Htr Group El B Pzr Htr Group El D Pzr Htr Group El 3.3.3.6 Monitor Pzr pressure for 2 minutes.
3.3.3.7 Ensure third Pzr Htr Mode Select in MAN:
El A Pzr Htr Mode Select El B Pzr Htr Mode Select El D Pzr Htr Mode Select 3.3.3.8 Ensure associated Pzr Htr Group in ON:
El A Pzr Htr Group El B Pzr Htr Group El D Pzr Htr Group El 3.3.3.9 Monitor Pzr pressure for 2 minutes.
Unit 1
Enclosure 4.6 OPI1/A16100/003 Operation of Pzr Heaters Page 4 of 11 3.4 Removing A, B, D Pzr Heater Groups From Service CAUTION: Pzr Htr Groups and Pzr Spray Controls should be operated with extreme caution to prevent NC System pressure transients.
Q 3.4.1 Ensure Boron Concentration difference between Pzr and NC System less than 50 ppm.
LI 3.4.2 three Pzr Htr Groups in service AND desire to operate with two Pzr Htr Groups in service, perform the following:
3.4.2.1 Place one of the following in AUTO:
El A Pzr Htr Mode Select LI B Pzr Htr Mode Select LI D Pzr Htr Mode Select 3.4.2.2 Check associated Pzr Htr Group in OFF:
El A Pzr Htr Group El B Pzr Htr Group El D Pzr Htr Group El 3.4.2.3 Monitor Pzr pressure for 2 minutes.
Unit 1
Enclosure 4.6 oPIl/AI6looIoo3 Operation of Pzr Heaters Page 5 of 11 LI 3.4.3 three Pzr Htr Groups in service AND desire to operate with one Pzr Htr Group in service, perform the following:
3.4.3.1 Place one of the following in AUTO:
LI A Pzr Htr Mode Select LI B Pzr Htr Mode Select LI D Pzr Htr Mode Select 3.4.3.2 Check associated Pzr Htr Group in OFF:
LI A Pzr Htr Group LI B Pzr Htr Group LI D Pzr Htr Group LI 3.4.3.3 Monitor Pzr pressure for 2 minutes.
3.4.3.4 Place second Pzr Htr Mode Select in AUTO:
LI A Pzr Htr Mode Select LI B Pzr Htr Mode Select LI D Pzr Htr Mode Select 3.4.3.5 Check associated Pzr Htr Group in OFF:
LI A Pzr Htr Group LI B Pzr Htr Group LI D Pzr Htr Group LI 3.4.3.6 Monitor Pzr pressure for 2 minutes.
Unit 1
Enclosure 4.6 OP/l/A!6100/003 Operation of Pzr Heaters Page 6 of 11 El 3.4.4 IF three Pzr Htr Groups in service AND desire to remove all Pzr Htr Groups from service, perform the following:
3.4.4.1 Place one of the following in AUTO:
El A Pzr Htr Mode Select El B Pzr Htr Mode Select El D Pzr Htr Mode Select 3.4.4.2 Check associated Pzr Htr Group in OFF:
El A Pzr Htr Group El B Pzr Htr Group El D Pzr Htr Group El 3.4.4.3 Monitor Pzr pressure for 2 minutes.
3.4.4.4 Place second Pzr Htr Mode Select in AUTO:
El A Pzr Htr Mode Select El B Pzr Htr Mode Select El D Pzr Htr Mode Select 3.4.4.5 Check associated Pzr Htr Group in OFF:
El A Pzr Htr Group El B Pzr Htr Group El D Pzr Htr Group El 3.4.4.6 Monitor Pzr pressure for 2 minutes.
NOTE: Steps 3.4.4.7 3.4.4.1OC should be performed without delay.
El 3.4.4.7 Place third Pzr Htr Mode Select in AUTO:
El A Pzr Htr Mode Select El B Pzr Htr Mode Select El D Pzr Htr Mode Select 3.4.4.8 Check associated Pzr Htr Group in OFF:
El A Pzr Htr Group El B Pzr Htr Group El D Pzr Htr Group Unit 1
Enclosure 4.6 /A16100!003 1
OPI Operation of Pzr Heaters Page 7 of 11 NOTE: Placing Pzr Press Master in manual makes automatic operation of 1NC-34A (Pzr PORV) unavailable and should be evaluated using Electronic Risk Assessment Tool. This assessment should be performed prior to placing Pzr Press Master in manual.
El 3.4.4.9 IF time allows AND Unit 1 in Modes 1-4, evaluate unavailablilty of 1NC-34A (Pzr PORV) using Electronic Risk Assessment Tool.
El 3.4.4.10 On the DCS Work Station, Pressurizer and PRT graphic, perform the following:
El A. Place PZR PRESS MASTER in manual.
El B. Adjust PZR PRESS MASTER output until the following occurs:
El C Pzr Htr Group begins cycling El 1NC-27C (A Loop Pzr Spray Control) closes El 1NC-29C (B Loop Pzr Spray Control) closes El C. Place PZR PRESS MASTER in auto.
El 3.4.4.11 Monitor Pzr pressure for 2 minutes.
El 3.4.5 IF two Pzr Htr Groups in service AND desire to operate with one Pzr Htr Group in service, perform the following:
3.4.5.1 Place one of the following in AUTO:
El A Pzr Htr Mode Select El B Pzr Htr Mode Select El D Pzr Htr Mode Select 3.4.5.2 Check associated Pzr Htr Group in OFF:
El A Pzr Htr Group El B Pzr Htr Group El D Pzr Htr Group El 3.4.5.3 Monitor Pzr pressure for 2 minutes.
Unit 1
Enclosure 4.6 0PIIJA/6looIoo3 Operation of Pzr Heaters Page 8 of 11 U 3.4.6 j two Pzr Htr Groups in service AND desire to remove all Pzr Htr Groups from service, perform the following:
3.4.6.1 Place one of the following in AUTO:
U A Pzr Htr Mode Select U B Pzr Htr Mode Select U D Pzr Htr Mode Select 3.4.6.2 Check associated Pzr Htr Group in OFF:
U A Pzr Htr Group U B Pzr Htr Group U D Pzr Htr Group U 3.4.6.3 Monitor Pzr pressure for 2 minutes.
NOTE: Steps 3.4.6.4 3.4.6.7C should be perfomed without delay.
U 3.4.6.4 Place second Pzr Htr Mode Select in AUTO:
U A Pzr Htr Mode Select U B Pzr Htr Mode Select U D Pzr Htr Mode Select 3.4.6.5 Check associated Pzr Htr Group in OFF:
U A Pzr Htr Group U B Pzr Htr Group U D Pzr Htr Group Unit 1
Enclosure 4.6 OP/1/J61OOIOO3 Operation of Pzr Heaters Page 9 of 11 NOTE: Placing Pzr Press Master in manual makes automatic operation of 1NC-34A (Pzr PORV) unavailable and should be evaluated using Electronic Risk Assessment Tool. This assessment should be performed prior to placing Pzr Press Master in manual.
U 3.4.6.6 j time allows AND Unit 1 in Modes 1-4, evaluate unavailablilty of 1NC-34A (Pzr PORV) using Electronic Risk Assessment Tool.
U 3.4.6.7 On the DCS Work Station, Pressurizer and PRT graphic, perform the following:
U A. Place PZR PRESS MASTER in manual.
U B. Adjust PZR PRESS MASTER output until the following occurs:
U C Pzr Htr Group begins cycling U 1NC-27C (A Loop Pzr Spray Control) closes U 1NC-29C (B Loop Pzr Spray Control) closes U C. Place PZR PRESS MASTER in auto.
U 3.4.6.8 Monitor Pzr pressure for 2 minutes.
U 3.4.7 IF one Pzr Htr Group in service, perform the following:
NOTE: Steps 3.4.7.1 - 3.4.7.4C should be performed without delay.
U 3.4.7.1 Place operating Pzr Mode Select in AUTO:
U A Pzr Htr Mode Select U B Pzr Htr Mode Select U D Pzr Htr Mode Select 3.4.7.2 Check associated Pzr Htr Group in OFF:
U A Pzr Htr Group U BPzrHtrGroup U D Pzr Htr Group Unit 1
Enclosure 4.6 0PI1IAI6100/0o3 Operation of Pzr Heaters Page 10 of 11 NOTE: Placing Pzr Press Master in manual makes automatic operation of 1NC-34A (Pzr PORV) unavailable and should be evaluated using Electronic Risk Assessment Tool. This assessment should be performed prior to placing Pzr Press Master in manual.
0 3.4.7.3 IF time allows AND Unit 1 in Modes 1-4, evaluate unavailablilty of 1NC-34A (Pzr PORV) using Electronic Risk Assessment Tool.
El 3.4.7.4 On the DCS Work Station, Pressurizer and PRT graphic, perform the following:
El A. Place PZR PRESS MASTER t in manual.
El B. Adjust PZR PRESS MASTER output until the following occurs:
El C Pzr Htr Group begins cycling El 1NC-27C (A Loop Pzr Spray Control) closes El 1NC-29C (B Loop Pzr Spray Control) closes El C. Place PZR PRESS MASTER in auto.
El 3.4.7.5 Monitor Pzr pressure for 2 minutes.
Unit 1
Enclosure 4.6 OPI1/A16100/003 Operation of Pzr Heaters Page 11 of 11 3.5 Placing C Pzr Heater Group In Service Li 3.5.1 Check closed C Pzr Htr Grp Sup Bkr.
NOTE: Placing Pzr Press Master in manual makes automatic operation of 1NC-34A (Pzr PORV) unavailable and should be evaluated using Electronic Risk Assessment Tool. This assessment should be performed prior to placing Pzr Press Master in manual.
Li 3.5.2 IF time allows AND Unit 1 in Modes 1-4, evaluate unavailablilty of 1NC-34A (Pzr PORV) using Electronic Risk Assessment Tool.
Li 3.5.3 On the DCS Work Station, Pressurizer and PRT graphic, perform the following:
LI 3.5.3.1 Place PZR PRESS MASTER in manual.
Li 3.5.3.2 Adjust PZR PRESS MASTER to obtain desired output for C Pzr Htr Group.
LI 3.5.3.3 jj desired to operate C Pzr Htr Group in automatic, place PZR PRESS MASTER in auto.
3.6 Removing C Pzr Heater Group From Service LI 3.6.1 On the DCS Work Station Pressurizer and PRT graphic, perform the following:
Li 3.6.1.1 Place PZR PRESS MASTER in manual.
Li 3.6.1.2 Adjust PZR PRESS MASTER to obtain 0 (zero) output for C Pzr Htr Group.
Li 3.6.2 j desired to completely remove C Pzr Htr Group from service, open C Pzr Htr Grp Sup Bkr.
Li 3.6.3 IF desired to operate C Pzr Htr Group in automatic, on the DCS Work Station, place PZR PRESS MASTER in auto.
End of Enclosure Unit 1
Appendix C Job Performance Measure Form ES-C-i Worksheet In-Plant JPM I 2010 Systems In-Plant JPM I NUREG 1021, Revision 9
Appendix C Page 2 of 10 Form ES-C-I Job Performance Measure Worksheet Facility: McGuire Task No.:
Task
Title:
Control Steam Pressure Locally JPM No.: 2010 Systems In-Using SM PORVs Plant JPM I K/A
Reference:
039 A4.07 (2.8/2.9)
Examinee: NRC Examiner:
Facility Evaluator: Date:
Method of testing:
Simulated Performance: X Actual Performance:
Classroom Simulator Plant X READ TO THE EXAMINEE I will explain the initial conditions, which steps to simulate or discuss, and provide initiating cues. When you complete the task successfully, the objective for this Job Performance Measure will be satisfied.
Initial Conditions: A Loss of Control Room has occurred and AP/1/A15500/17 (Loss of Control Room) has been implemented.
The procedure is complete through subsequent action step 17.
When Steam Generator pressure is checked in step 17, the RO discovers pressure to be 1185 PSIG and reports this to the CRS.
The CRS desires to reduce pressure below the Safety Valve lift setpoint of 1170 psig.
Task Standard: The operator will open iSV-i and ISV-19 to 10% open and control their position from the Unit I exterior doghouse.
Required Materials: PPE (Hardhat, Safety Glasses, Hearing Protection, Safety Shoes etc.)
General
References:
AP/1/A15500/17 (Loss of Control Room)
Handouts: AP/1/N5500/17 (Loss of Control Room), Enclosure 7 (Manual Operation of PORV5)
Initiating Cue: The CRS dispatches you to locally control Steam Generator Pressure with the SM PORVs per AP/1/A15500/17 (Loss of Control Room)
Enclosure 7 (Manual Operation of PORVs).
2010 SystemsIn-Plant JPM I NUREG 1021, Revision 9
Appendix C Page 3 of 10 Form ES-C-I Job Performance Measure Worksheet Time Critical Task: NO Validation Time: 10 minutes NOTE: If the installed 02 monitors in the Doghouses are out of service, operators are expected to use portable 02 monitors during routine operations. For Time Critical actions that need to be performed in the Doghouses, Safety has waived this requirement. This evaluation is documented in PIP 05-3007. This exception does NOT apply to routine entries or for JPM performance. If the portable 02 monitors must be used during performance of this JPM, the time to obtain and operate the 02 monitor may be subtracted from the Actual JPM Completion Time.
2010 Systems In-Plant JPM I NUREG 1021 Revision 9
Appendix C Page 4 of 10 Form ES-C-i PERFORMANCE INFORMATION (Denote Critical Steps with an asterisk*)
Provide Candidate with Initial Conditions!Cue (Last Page of this JPM), and Handout Enclosure 7 of AP111A15500117.
START TIME:
STEPS ELEMENTS STANDARD S/U COMMENTS REQUIRED FOR UNSAT 1 (Step 1) Establish The Operator states that they communication from would use Plant Phone or doghouses to SRO at Aux Radio to establish Shutdown Panel. communication with SRO at Unit 1 Aux Shutdown Panel..
Cue:
You are in communication with the SRO at the Aux Shutdown Panel.
(NOTE prior to Step 2) A The operator reads the Main Steam Isolation signal or loss of VI will prevent NOTE and proceeds.
operation of PORVs from manual loaders.
2010 Systems In-Plant JPM I NUREG 1021, Revision 9
Appendix C Page 5 of 10 Form ES-C-i PERFORMANCE INFORMATION STEPS ELEMENTS STANDARD S/U COMMENTS REQUIRED FOR UNSAT (Step 2) Operate valves iSV-i 9AB (1A Main Steam Line PORV) and iSV-lAB (1D Main Steam Line PORV) (exterior doghouse) using manual loaders as follows:
(Step 2.a) Ensure the The operator rotates 1SV-i9 following controller knobs and 1 SV-i controller knobs are in the full completely counterclockwise.
counterclockwise position:
Cue.
Manual loader 1SMML5521 (1A SM PORV (1SV19) Control knob rotated Local Manual Loader) counterclockwise.
Cue:
Manual loader 1SMML5491 (1D SM PORV (1SV1) Control knob rotated Local Manual Loader) counterclockwise.
2010 Systems In-Plant JPM I NUREG 1021, Revision 9
Appendix C Page 6 of 10 Form ES-C-i PERFORMANCE INFORMATION STEPS ELEMENTS STANDARD S/U COMMENTS REQUIRED FOR UNSAT (Step 2.b) Ensure the following valves are open:
A-i (IA S/G LOCAL The operator rotates the A-i MANUAL LOADER INPUT and D-i Local Manual Loader ISOL) Input Isolation Valves fully counterclockwise.
Cue:
Knob rotated counterclockwise.
Cue:
D-i (iD S/G LOCAL MANUAL LOADER INPUT Knob rotated ISOL) counterclockwise.
- 5 (Step 2.c) Close the The operator rotates the A-2 following valves: and D-2 C/R Manual Loader Output Isolation Valves fully A-2 (1A SIC C/R clockwise.
MANUAL LOADER OUTPUT ISOL) Cue:
Knob rotated clockwise.
D-2 (iD S/G C/R MANUAL LOADER OUTPUT ISOL)
Cue:
Knob rotated clockwise.
2010 Systems In-Plant JPM I NUREG iO2i, Revision 9
Appendix C Page 7 of 10 Form ES-C-i PERFORMANCE INFORMATION STEPS ELEMENTS STANDARD S/U COMMENTS REQUIRED FOR UNSAT
- 6 (Step 2.d) Open the The operator rotates the A-3 following valves: and D-3 Local Manual Loader Output Isolation Valves fully A-3 (1A S/G LOCAL counterclockwise.
MANUAL LOADER OUTPUT ISOL) Cue: -
Knob rotated counterclockwise.
D-3 (iD S/G LOCAL Cue:
MANUAL LOADER Knob rotated OUTPUT ISOL) counterclockwise.
MANUAL LOADER as The SRO requests that you directed by SRO.
adjust the manual loader to 10% open.
The operator rotates the Local Manual Loader clockwise until the needle is at 10%.
Cue:
Control knob rotated clockwise and needle is at I 0%.
2010 Systems In-Plant JPM I NUREG 1021, Revision 9
Appendix C Page 8 of 10 Form ES-C-i PERFORMANCE INFORMATION STEPS ELEMENTS STANDARD S/U COMMENTS REQUIRED FOR UNSAT
MANUAL LOADER as The SRO requests that you directed by SRO.
adjust the manual loader to 10% open.
The operator rotates the Local Manual Loader clockwise until the needle is at 10%.
Cue:
Control knob rotated clockwise and needle is at 10%.
9 (Step 3) Operate the The operator contacts the following valves PER SRO.
instruction tag near valves:
Cue:
The SRO at the Auxiliary Shutdown Panel states that 1SV-7ABC (iC S/G PORV) steam pressure is under control and no further local PORV operation is required.
Terminating Cue: Evaluation on this JPM is complete.
STOP TIME:
2010 Systems In-Plant JPM I NUREG 1021, Revision 9
Appendix C Page 9 of 10 Form ES-C-I VERIFICATION OF COMPLETION Job Performance Measure No.: 2010 Systems In-Plant JPM I Examinees Name:
Date Performed:
Facility Evaluator:
Number of Attempts:
Time to Complete:
Question Documentation:
Result: SAT UNSAT Examiners Signature: Date:
2010 Systems In-Plant JPM I NUREG 1021, Revision 9
Appendix C Form ES-C-i JPM CUE SHEET INITIAL CONDITIONS: A Loss of Control Room has occurred and AP111A15500117 (Loss of Control Room) has been implemented.
The procedure is complete through subsequent action step 17.
When Steam Generator pressure is checked in step 17, the RO discovers pressure to be 1185 PSIG and reports this to the CRS.
The CRS desires to reduce pressure below the Safety Valve lift setpoint of 1170 psig.
INITIATING CUE: The CRS dispatches you to locally control Steam Generator Pressure with the SM PORVs per AP!1 /N550011 7 (Loss of Control Room) Enclosure 7 (Manual Operation of PORV5).
NOTE: No plant equipment should be operated during the performance of this JPM. All actions must be SIMULATED.
NUREG 1021, Revision 9
MNS LOSS OF CONTROL ROOM PAGE NO.
AP/1/A/5500/17 Enclosure 7-Page 1 of 2 Rv23 e
UNIT 1 Manual Operation of PORVs urnw
- 1. Establish communication from doghouses to SRO at Aux Shutdown Panel.
NOTE A Main Steam Isolation signal or loss of VI will prevent operation of PORVs from manual loaders.
- 2. Operate valves ISV-I 9AB (IA Main Operate the following valves PER Steam Line PORV) and ISV-lAB (ID instruction tag near valves:
Main Steam Line PORV) (exterior doghouse) using manual loaders as ISV-19AB (1A Main Steam Line PORV) follows:
ISV-lAB (1D Main Steam Line PORV).
- a. Ensure the following controller knobs are in the full counter clockwise position: . -
Manual loader 1SMML5521 (1A SM PORV (iSV-i 9) Local Manual Loader)
Manual loader 1SMML5491 (1D SM PORV (iSV-i) Local Manual loader).
- b. Ensure the following valves are OPEN:
A-I (IA S/G Local Manual Loader Input Isol)
D-i (ID S/G Local Manual Loader Input Isol).
- c. CLOSE the following valves:
A-2 (1A S/G C/R Manual Loader Output Isol)
D-2 (1D SIG C/R ManualLoader Output Isol).
MNS LOSS OF CONTROL ROOM PAGE NO.
AP111A15500117 Enclosure 7-Page 2 of 2 R ev.
UNIT 1 Manual Operation of PORVs uwwwwrnw wrnrnrn
- 2. (Continued)
- d. OPEN the following valves:
A-3 (1A S/G Local Manual Loader Output Isol)
D-3 (ID S/G Local Manual Loader Output Isol).
- 3. Operate the following valves instruction tag near valves:
iSV-i 3AB (lB Main Steam Line PORV)
ISV-7ABC (IC Main Steam Line PORV).
Appendix C Job Performance Measure Form ES-C-i Worksheet In-Plant JPM J 2010 Systems In-Plant JPM J NUREG 1021, Revision 9
Appendix C Page 2 of 9 Form ES-C-i Job Performance Measure Worksheet Facility: McGuire Task No.:
Task
Title:
Makeup to the Unit 1 KC Surge JPM No.: 2010 Systems In-Tanks Plant JPM J K/A
Reference:
008, A2.02, 3.2/3.5 Examinee: NRC Examiner:
Facility Evaluator: Date:
Method of testing:
Simulated Performance: X Actual Performance:
Classroom Simulator Plant X READ TO THE EXANIINEE I will explain the initial conditions, which steps to simulate or discuss, and provide initiating cues. When you complete the task successfully, the objective for this Job Performance Measure will be satisfied.
Initial Conditions: The plant YM system is out of service to allow major modifications to be incorporated.
Unit I is operating at 100% power when the KC Surge Tank A and B lo level computer alarms are received.
The surge tank levels are 3.9 feet and decreasing.
The operating crew has implemented AP/1/A/5500/21 (Loss of KC or KC System Leakage).
Several operators have been dispatched to attempt to locate the leak.
RN Pumps 1A and lB are in service.
Task Standard: The operator correctly manipulates valves, and communicates with the C/R to restore KC Surge Tank level. Flow must be initiated to at least one train of KC in less than or equal to TEN (10) minutes to satisfy the TIME CRITICAL requirements of this JPM.
Required Materials: PPE (Hardhat, Safety Glasses, Hearing Protection, Safety Shoes etc.)
General
References:
AP/1/A15500/21 (Loss of KC or KC System Leakage) 2010 Systems In-Plant JPM J NUREG 1021, Revision 9
Appendix C Page 3 of 9 Form ES-C-i Job Performance Measure Worksheet PT/01A14600/i 13 (Operator Time Critical Task verification) Enclosure 13.17 (Initiating Makeup to the KG Surge Tank or Isolate KG Header Leak)
Handouts: AP/1/A/5500/21 (Loss of KC or KG System Leakage), Enclosure 3 (Aligning RN Makeup to KC Surge Tank)
Initiating Cue: The CRS directs you to align makeup to both Unit I KC Surge Tanks AP/1/A/5500/21 (Loss of KC or KC System Leakage) Enclosure 3 (Aligning RN Makeup to KC Surge Tank)
This is a Time Critical JPM.
Time Critical Task: YES 10 Minutes Validation Time: 8 minutes NOTE: This JPM should be started from just inside the RCA Entry Point.
2010 Systems In-Plant JPM J NUREG 1021, Revision 9
Appendix C Page 4 of 9 Form ES-C-i PERFORMANCE INFORMATION (Denote Critical Steps with an asterisk*)
Provide Candidate with Initial Conditions/Cue (Last Page of this JPM), and Handout of AP/11A15500/21.
START TIME:
STEPS ELEMENTS STANDARD S/U COMMENTS REQUIRED FOR UNSAT (Caution prior to Step 1) RN The operator reads the pump must be running while Caution and proceeds.
RN to KC emergency makeup is open, to prevent draining KC surge tank back to RN.
2 (Step 1) Align one or both of The operator recognizes the following flowpaths that the IA RN Pump is ON (Step l.a or i.b) as (Initial Condition).
required:
(Step i.a) IF 1A RN Train to 1A KC Surge Tank makeup is desired, THEN:
(Step i.a.1) Ensure IA RN Pump is on.
2010 Systems In-Plant JPM J NUREG 1021 Revision 9
Appendix C Page 5 of 9 Form ES-C-i PERFORMANCE INFORMATION STEPS ELEMENTS STANDARD S/U COMMENTS REQUIRED FOR UNSAT
- 3 (Step 1 .a.2) Dispatch The operator removes the operator to perform the lock on 1 KC-494.
following:
Cue:
Unlock and open 1KC-494 (Unit I RN Assured Supply The Lock is removed.
to 1A KC Surge Tank Compartment lsol) (aux.
bldg, 733 + 10, HH-56, in The operator rotates the corner west of 1B1 KC IKC-494 handwheel in the Pump) counter-clockwise direction.
Cue:
The handwheel rotates, the Stem rises out of the valve and then stops.
Open 1KC-496 (IA KC Surge Tank Compartment The operator rotates the RN Assured Supply Isol) 1KC496 handwheel in the (aux. bldg, 733 + 10, HH- counter-clockwise direction.
56, in corner west of 1 Bi KC Pump). Cue:
The handwheel rotates,
- the Stem rises out of the valve and then stops.
4 (Step i.b) IF lB RN Train to The operator recognizes I B KC Surge Tank makeup that the I B RN Pump is ON is desired, THEN: (Initial Condition).
(Step i.b.1) Ensure lB RN Pump is on.
2010 Systems In-Plant JPM J NUREG 1021, Revision 9
Appendix C Page 6 of 9 Form ES-C-i PERFORMANCE INFORMATION STEPS ELEMENTS STANDARD S/U COMMENTS REQUIRED FOR UNSAT
- 5 (Step 1 .b.2) Dispatch The operator removes the operator to perform the lock on I KC-497.
following:
Cue:
Unlock and open IKC-497 (Unit I RN Assured Supply The Lock is removed.
to lB KC Surge Tank Compartment Isol) (aux.
bldg, 733 + 10, HH-56, in The operator rotates the corner west of 1B1 KC 1KC-497 handwheel in the Pump) counter-clockwise direction.
Cue:
The handwheel rotates, the Stem rises out of the valve and then stops.
Open IKC-499 (18 KC Surge Tank Compartment The operator rotates the RN Assured Supply Isol) 1 KC-499 handwheel in the (aux. bldg, 733 + 10, HH- counter-clockwise direction.
56, in corner west of I BI KC Pump) Cue:
The handwheel rotates, the Stem rises out of the valve and then stops.
NOTE Time Critical STOP Time:
6 (Step 2) IF AT ANY TIME The operator reads the Step an RN pump trips, THEN and proceeds.
dispatch operator to isolate affected trains RN to KC makeup line opened in step 1.
2010 Systems In-Plant JPM J NUREG 1021, Revision 9
Appendix C Page 7 of 9 Form ES-C-i PERFORMANCE INFORMATION STEPS ELEMENTS STANDARD S/U COMMENTS REQUIRED FOR UNSAT 7 (Step 3) Adjust makeup rate The operator calls the as required to prevent Control Room and asks for overflow of KC Surge Tank the 1A KC Surge Tank (approximately 8.5 Ft) level.
Cue:
The IA KC Surge Tank level is 4 Ft. and slowly increasing.
The operator calls the Control Room and asks for the i B KC Surge Tank level.
Cue:
The lB KC Surge Tank level is 4 Ft. and slowly
. increasing.
Terminating Cue: Evaluation on this JPM is complete.
STOP TIME:
2010 Systems In-Plant JPM J NUREG 1021 Revision 9
Appendix C Page 8 of 9 Form ES-C-i VERIFICATION OF COMPLETION Job Performance Measure No.: 2010 Systems In-Plant JPM J Examinees Name:
Date Performed:
Facility Evaluator:
Number of Attempts:
Time to Complete:
Question Documentation:
Result: SAT UNSAT Examiners Signature: Date:
2010 Systems In-Plant JPM J NUREG 1021, Revision 9
Appendix C Form ES-C-i JPM CUE SHEET INITIAL CONDITIONS: The plant YM system is out of service to allow major modifications to be incorporated.
Unit 1 is operating at 100% power when the KC Surge Tank A and B lo level computer alarms are received.
The surge tank levels are 3.9 feet and decreasing.
The operating crew has implemented API1/A15500/21 (Loss of KC or KC System Leakage).
Several operators have been dispatched to attempt to locate the leak.
RN Pumps IA and 1 B are in service.
INITIATING CUE: The CRS directs you to align makeup to both Unit 1 KC Surge Tanks AP/i/A/5500/2i (Loss of KC or KC System Leakage),
Enclosure 3 (Aligning RN Makeup to KC Surge Tank).
NOTE: No plant equipment should be operated during the performance of this JPM. All actions must be SIMULATED.
This is a Time Critical JPM.
NUREG 1021, Revision 9
MNS LOSS OF KC OR KC SYSTEM LEAKAGE PAGE NO.
AP111A15500121 32 of 78 Enclosure 3 Page 1 of 2 Rev. 9 UNIT 1 Aligning RN Makeup to KC Surge Tank ACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSE RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED CAUTION RN pump must be running while RN to KC emergency makeup is open, to prevent draining KC surge tank back to RN.
Align one or both of the following flowpaths (Step l.a or l.b) as required:
- a. if 1A RN Train to IA KC Surge Tank makeup is desired, THEN:
- 1) Ensure IA RN pump is on. 1) GOTO Step lb.
- 2) Dispatch operator to perform the following:
. Unlock and open 1KC-494 (Unit 1 RN Assured Supply to 1A KC S urge Tank Compartment Isol)
(aux bldg, 733+10, HH-56, in corner west of 1 Bi KC Pump).
. Open 1KC-496 (1A KC Surge Tank Compartment RN Assured Supply Isol) (aux bldg, 733+10, HH-56, in corner west of I B1 KC Pump).
MNS LOSS OF KC OR KC SYSTEM LEAKAGE PAGE NO.
AP/1/A15500/21 33 of 78 Enclosure 3 Page 2 of 2 Rev. 9 UNIT 1 Aligning RN Makeup to KC Surge Tank I ACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSE I RESPONSE NOT OBTAINED
- 1. (Continued)
- b. 1 B RN Train to 1 B KC Surge Tank makeup is desired, THEN:
- 1) Ensure lB RN pump is on. 1) Perform the following:
a) IF makeup using A train RN is desired, THEN RETURN TO Step l.a.
b) .QTQ.Step2.
- 2) Dispatch operator to perform the following:
. Unlock and open 1KC-497 (Unit 1 RN Assured Supply to 1 B KC Surge Tank Compartment Isol)
(aux bldg, 733+10, HH-56, in corner west of 1 Bi KC Pump).
. Open 1KC-499 (lB KC Surge Tank Compartment RN Assured Supply Isol) (aux bldg, 733+10, HH-56, in corner west of 1 Bi KC Pump).
- 2. TIME an RN pump trips, THEN dispatch operator to isolate affected trains RN to KC makeup line opened in Step 1.
- 3. Adjust makeup rate as required to prevent overflow of KC Surge Tank (approximately 8.5 ft).
Appendix C Job Performance Measure Form ES-C-i Worksheet In-Plant JPM K 2010 Systems In-Plant JPM K NUREG 1021, Revision 9
Appendix C Page 2 of 15 -- Form ES-C-i Job Performance Measure Worksheet Facility: McGuire Task No.:
Task
Title:
Restore Power to KXB Power Panel JPM No.: 2010 Systems In Board Using Inverter SKX Plant JPM K K/A
Reference:
APE 057, AA1.01, 3.7/3.7 Examinee: NRC Examiner:
Facility Evaluator: Date:
Method of testing:
Simulated Performance: X Actual Performance:
Classroom Simulator Plant X READ TO THE EXAMINEE I will explain the initial conditions, which steps to simulate or discuss, and provide initiating cues. When you complete the task successfully, the objective for this Job Performance Measure will be satisfied.
Initial Conditions: AP/11A15500/1 5 (Loss of Vital or Aux Control Power) has been implemented due to a loss of Aux Control Power Panel Board KXB.
Prior to the event, all electrical systems were aligned in their normal operating configurations.
Task Standard: Inverter SKX is aligned to provide power to KXB power panel board.
Required Materials: PPE (Hardhat, Safety Glasses, Hearing Protection, Safety Shoes etc.)
General
References:
AP/1/A15500/15 (Loss of Vital orAux Control Power)
Handouts: Enclosure 24 (Restoring Power to KXB) of AP/1/A15500/i5 (Loss of Vital or Aux Control Power)
Initiating Cue: The CRS directs you to energize KXB using inverter SKX per Enclosure 24 (Restoring Powerto KXB) of AP/1/A15500/15 (Loss of Vital orAux Control Power)
Time Critical Task: NO 2010 Systems In-Plant JPM K NUREG 1021, Revision 9
Appendix C Page 3 of 15 Form ES-C-i Job Performance Measure Worksheet Validation Time: 24 minutes NOTE: Just prior to administering JPM, ensure Key for Key-Operated KXB Static Inverter Alarm Circuit Switch is located in the switch.
2010 Systems In-Plant JPM K NUREG 1021 Revision 9
Appendix C Page 4 of 15 Form ES-C-i PERFORMANCE INFORMATION (Denote Critical Steps with an asterisk*)
Provide Candidate with Initial ConditionslCue (Last Page of this JPM), and Handout Enclosure 24 of APII/A!5500/1 5.
START TIME:
STEPS ELEMENTS STANDARD S/U COMMENTS REQUIRED FOR UNSAT (Cautions prior to Step 1) The operator reads the Cautions and proceeds.
Visibly damaged breakers shall not be operated without IAE approval.
One attempt at closing a TRIPPED breaker is allowed when restoring power to KXB.
If a tripped breaker re-opens after being closed, IAE should investigate prior to further operation of the breaker.
When closing a tripped breaker, the operator should not stand directly in front of the breaker cubicle.
2 (Step 1) IF AT ANY TIME The operator reads the during performance of this Steps and proceeds.
enclosure a breaker trips after being closed, THEN perform the following:
(Step 1.a) Notify IAE to investigate cause of breaker tripping.
(Step 1.b) Have station management evaluate whether plant conditions warrant continuation of this enclosure prior to completion of IAEs investigation.
2010 Systems In-Plant JPM K NUREG 1021, Revision 9
Appendix C Page 5 of 15 Form ES-C-i PERFORMANCE INFORMATION STEPS ELEMENTS STANDARD S/U COMMENTS REQUIRED FOR UNSAT
- 3 (Step 2) Select method of The operator proceeds to restoring power to KXB Step 3.
panelboard:
. To energize KXB using SKX Inverter, GO TO Step 3.
. To energize KXB using KXB Inverter, GO TO Step 4.
. To energize KXB from MKB through the KXB Inverter Bypass Panel, GO TO Step 5.
. To energize KXB from MKB through the SKX Inverter Bypass Panel, GO TO Step 7.
4 (Step 3) Align SKX Inverter to The operator observes the KXB panelboard as follows: SKX BAP Bkr 1.
(Step 3.a) On SKX Breaker Cue:
Alignment Panel, check the following breakers OPEN:
Breaker is as you see it.
SKXBAPBkr1 (SKXAC Output to KXA) The operator observes the SKX BAP Bkr 2.
SKX BAP Bkr2(SKXAC Output to 1KU) Cue:
Breaker is as you see it.
SKX BAP Bkr 4 (SKX AC Output to 2KU)
The operator observes the SKX BAP Bkr 4.
Cue:
Breaker is as you see it.
2010 Systems In-Plant JPM K NUREG 1021, Revision 9
Appendix C Page 6 of 15 Form ES-C-i PERFORMANCE NFORMATlON STEPS ELEMENTS STANDARD S/U COMMENTS REQUIRED FOR UNSAT 5 (Step 3.b) On SKX Static The operator observes the Inverter, perform the following: SKX lnv Bkr 3.
(Step 3.b.1) Ensure SKX lnv Cue:
Bkr 3 (SKX lnv AC Output) is open. Breaker is as you see it.
(Step 3.b.2) Ensure SKX lnv Bkr 2 (DCB to SKx DC The operator observes the Supply) is open. SKX mv Bkr 2.
(Step 3.b.3) Ensure SKX lnv Cue:
Bkr 1 (DCA to SKX DC Supply) is open. Breaker is as you see it.
The operator observes the SKX mv Bkr 1.
Cue:
Breaker is as you see it.
6 (Step 3.c) On SKX Static The operator observes the Inverter Bypass Panel, SKX Byp Pnl Bkr 4.
perform the following:
Cue:
. Ensure SKX Byp Pnl Bkr 4 Breaker is as you see it.
(MKA Alt AC Source Supply) is open.
The operator observes the SKX Byp Pnl Bkr 5.
. Ensure SKX Byp Pnl Bkr (MKB Alt AC Source C ue.
Supply) is open. Breaker is as you see it.
2010 SystemsIn-Plant JPM K NUREG 1021, Revision 9
Appendix C Page 7 of 15 Form ES-C-i PERFORMANCE INFORMATION STEPS ELEMENTS STANDARD S/U COMMENTS REQUIRED FOR UNSAT
- 7 (Step 3.d) Ensure KXB DISC The operator opens the SWITCH (Battery Room, disconnect switch.
Column BB58) is open.
Cue:
Disconnect moved into the down position.
- 8 (Step 3,e) On SKX Breaker The operator inserts the Alignment Panel, use Kirk key Kirk Key, rotates, and to close SKX BAP Bkr 3 (SKX moves breaker to the UP AC Output to KXB) position.
Cue:
The breaker moved into the up position.
9 (Step 3.f) Check kirk key in The operator observes DCB-i D (Static lnverter No. DCB-i D.
SKX) INSTALLED.
Cue:
The Kirk Key is installed.
- 10 (Step 3.g) Using kirk key close The operator moves DCB-1 D (Static Inverter No. breaker to the UP position.
SKX).
Cue:
The breaker moved into the up position.
2010 Systems In-Plant JPM K NUREG 1021, Revision 9
Appendix C Page 8 of 15 Form ES-C-I PERFORMANCE INFORMATION STEPS ELEMENTS STANDARD S/U COMMENTS REQUIRED FOR UNSAT 11 (Step 3.h) On SKX Static The operator observes Inverter, perform the following: SKX mv Bkr 2.
(Step 3.h.1) Ensure Kirk key Cue:
installed in SKX mv Bkr 2 (DCB to SKX DC Supply) The Kirk Key is installed.
- 12 (Step 3.h.2) Place The operator rotates the PRECHARGE switch to Switch clockwise and DCB position and hold. holds.
Cue:
The switch is in the DCB position.
- 13 (Step 3.h.3) WHEN PRECHARGE light has been Cue:
lit for 10 seconds, THEN perform the following in rapid The light has been LIT succession: for 10 seconds.
(Step 3.h.3.a) Release PRECHARGE switch The operator releases the Switch.
(Step 3.h.3.b) Close SKX mv The operator moves Bkr 2 (DCB to SKX DC breaker to the UP position.
Supply)
Cue:
The breaker moved into the up position.
2010 Systems In-Plant JPM K NUREG 1021, Revision 9
Appendix C Page 9 of 15 Form ES-C-i PERFORMANCE INFORMATION STEPS ELEMENTS STANDARD S/U COMMENTS REQUIRED FOR UNSAT 14 (Step 3.h.4) Check the The operator observes the following indications: Inverter Output Voltage.
INVERTER OUTPUT Cue:
VOLTAGE 116 -124 VOLTS Meter indicates 120 INVERTER OUTPUT volts.
FREQUENCY 59.7-60.3 HZ The operator observes the lnverter Output Frequency.
Cue:
Meter indicates 60 Hz.
- 15 (Step 3.h.5) Close SKX mv The operator moves Bkr 3 (SKX Inv AC Output) breaker to the UP position.
Cue:
The breaker moved into the up position.
2010 Systems In-Plant JPM K NUREG 1021 Revision 9
Appendix C Page 10 of 15 Form ES-C-i PERFORMANCE INFORMATION STEPS ELEMENTS STANDARD S/U COMMENTS REQUIRED FOR UNSAT
- 16 (Step 3.1) On SKX Static The operator observes the Inverter Bypass Panel, MANUAL BYPASS perform the following: SWITCH position.
(Step 3.1.1) Ensure MANUAL Cue:
BYPASS SWITCH selected to NORMAL OPERATION Switch is in the ALTERNATE AC SOURCE TO LOAD position.
The operator rotates the Switch counter-clockwise.
Cue:
Switch is in the NORMAL position.
17 (Step 3.1.2) Check INVERTER The operator observes the SUPPLYING LOAD light - INVERTER SUPPLYING LIT LOAD light.
Cue:
The light is LIT.
2010 Systems In-Plant JPM K NUREG 1021, Revision 9
Appendix C Page 11 of 15 Form ES-C-i PERFORMANCE INFORMATION STEPS ELEMENTS STANDARD S/U COMMENTS REQUIRED FOR UNSAT
- 18 (Step 3.i.3) Ensure SKX Byp The operator observes the Pnl Bkr 6 (SKX Byp Pnl AC SKX Byp PnI Bkr 6.
Output) is closed.
Cue:
Breaker is as you see it.
The operator moves breaker to the UP position.
Cue: -______
The breaker moved into the up position.
19 (Step 3.i.4) Check the The operator observes the following indications: System Output Voltage.
SYSTEM OUTPUT Cue:
VOLTAGE 116 -124 VOLTS Meter indicates 120 SYSTEM OUTPUT volts.
FREQUENCY 59.7-60.3 HZ SYSTEM OUTPUT CURRENT The operator observes the LESS THAN 292 AMPS System Output Frequency.
Cue:
Meter indicates 60 Hz.
The operator observes the System Output Current.
Cue:
Meter indicates 150 amps.
2010 SystemsIn-Plant JPM K NUREG 1021, Revision 9
Appendix C Page 12 of 15 Form ES-C-i PERFORMANCE INFORMATION STEPS ELEMENTS STANDARD S/U COMMENTS REQUIRED FOR UNSAT 20 (Step 3.j) On SKX Static The operator observes the Inverter, ensure ALARM Alarm Circuit Switch.
CIRCUIT is ON.
Cue:
The Switch is in the OFF position.
The operator rotates the Switch counter-clockwise.
Cue:
The Switch is in the ON position.
21 (Step 3.k) On KXB Static The operator observes the Inverter, ensure ALARM Alarm Circuit Switch.
CIRCUIT is OFF.
Cue:
The Switch is in the ON position.
The operator rotates the Switch clockwise.
Cue:
The Switch is in the OFF position.
2010 Systems In-Plant JPM K NUREG 1021, Revision 9
Appendix C Page 13 of 15 Form ES-C-I PERFORMANCE INFORMATION STEPS ELEMENTS STANDARD S/U COMMENTS REQUIRED FOR UNSAT 22 (Step 3.1) Notify Control Room The operator contacts the that KXB is energized. Control Room and notifies that KXB is energized.
Cue:
As CRS, acknowledge.
Terminating Cue: Evaluation on this JPM is complete.
STOP TIME:
2010 Systems In-Plant JPM K NUREG 1021, Revision 9
Appendix C Page 14 of 15 Form ES-C-i VERIFICATION OF COMPLETION Job Performance Measure No.: 2010 Systems In-Plant JPM K Examine&s Name:
Date Performed:
Facility Evaluator:
Number of Attempts:
Time to Complete:
Question Documentation:
Result: SAT UNSAT Examiners Signature: Date:
2010 Systems In-Plant JPM K NUREG 1021, Revision 9
Appendix C Form ES..C-1 JPM CUE SHEET INITIAL CONDITIONS: AP/1IA/5500/15 (Loss of Vital orAux Control Power) has been implemented due to a loss of Aux Control Power Panel Board KXB.
Prior to the event, all electrical systems were aligned in their normal operating configurations.
INITIATING CUE: The CRS directs you to energize KXB using inverter SKX per Enclosure 24 (Restoring Power to KXB) of AP111A15500115 (Loss of Vital or Aux Control Power).
NOTE: No plant equipment should be operated during the performance of this JPM. All actions must be SIMULATED.
NUREG 1021, Revision 9
MNS LOSS OF VITAL OR AUX CONTROL POWER PAGE N01 AP111A15500115 215 of 279 Enclosure 24- Page 1 of 31 UNIT 1 Restoring Power To KXB Rev. 21 UOOEDWDWOLI onurnrnw CAUTION LI Visibly damaged breakers shall not be operated without IAE approval.
LI One attempt at closing a TRIPPED breaker is allowed when restoring power to KXB. If a tripped breaker re-opens after being closed, IAE should investigate prior to further operation of the breaker.
LI When closing a tripped breaker, the operator should not stand directly in front of the breaker cubicle.
- 1. if AT ANY TIME during performance of this enclosure a breaker trips after being closed, THEN perform the following:
- a. Notify IAE to investigate cause of breaker tripping.
- b. Have station management evaluate whether plant conditions warrant continuation of this enclosure prior to completion of IAEs investigation.
- 2. Select method of restoring power to KXB panelboard:
LI To energize KXB using SKX Inverter, G TQ Step 3.
LI To energize KXB using KXB lnverter, GO Step 4.
LI To energize KXB from MKB through the KXB Inverter Bypass Panel, GOTO Step 5.
LI To energize KXB from MKB through the SKX Inverter Bypass Panel, Step 7.
MNS LOSS OF VITAL OR AUX CONTROL POWER PAGE NO.
AP111N5500115 279 Enclosure 24 Page 2 of 31 UNIT 1 Restoring Power To KXB Rev 21 LI DOD 000000W 0000 WW0
- 3. Align SKX Inverter to KXB panelboard as follows:
- a. On SKX Breaker Alignment Panel, a. Perform the following:
check the following breakers OPEN:
- 1) Notify Control Room to evaluate LI SKX BAP Bkr 1 (SKX AC Output to swapping bus aligned to SKX to KXA) another source.
LI SKX BAP Bkr 2 (SKX AC Output to 2) if bus aligned to SKX cannot be 1 KU) swapped to another source, THEN RETURN TO Step 2.
LI SKX BAP Bkr 4 (SKX AC Output to 2KU). 3) if bus aligned to SKX can be swapped to another source, THEN perform the following:
a) Swap OP!O!A163501001 B (125VDC 2401120VAC Auxiliary Control Power System).
b) Do not continue until swap complete.
- b. On SKX Static Inverter, perform the following:
_1) EnsureSKXlnvBkr3(SKXInvAC Output) is open.
- 2) Ensure SKX lnv Bkr 2 (DCB to SKX DC Supply) is open.
- c. On SKX Static Inverter Bypass Panel, perform the following:
LI Ensure SKX Byp Pnl Bkr 4 (MKA Alt AC Source Supply) is open.
LI Ensure SKX Byp Pnl Bkr 5 (MKB Alt AC Source Supply) is open.
- d. Ensure KXB DISC SWITCH (Battery Room, column BB58) is open.
MNS AP111N5500115 LOSS OF VITAL OR AUX CONTROL POWER I I
PAGE NO. I Enclosure 24 Page 3 of 31 217 of 2791 UNIT 1 Restoring Power To KXB I Rev. 21 I I
uornrnrnrnrnurn uuwrnrn
- 3. (Continued)
- e. On SKX Breaker Alignment Panel, use Kirk key to close SKX BAP Bkr 3 (SKX AC Output to KXB).
- f. Check kirk key in DCB 1 D (Static
- f. Perform the following:
lnverter No. SKX) INSTALLED.
- 1) Ensure DCA 1D (Static lnverter No. SKX) is open.
- 2) Remove kirk key from DCA 1 D. -
- 3) Insert kirk key in DCB - 1 D.
- g. Using Kirk key close DCB - 1 D (Static Inverter No. SKX).
- h. On SKX Static Inverter, perform the following:
- 1) Ensure Kirk key installed in SKX lnv Bkr 2 (DCB to SKX DC Supply).
- 2) Place PRECHARGE switch to DCB position and hold.
- 3) WHEN PRECHARGE light has been lit 10 seconds, THEN perform the following substeps in rapid succession:
a) Release PRECHARGE switch.
b) Close SKX lnv Bkr 2 (DCB to SKX DC Supply).
- 4) Check the following indications: 4) Perform the following:
LI INVERTER OUTPUT a) IF Inverter output voltage is less VOLTAGE - than 110 Volts, THEN RETURN 116-124 VOLTS TOStep2.
LI INVERTER OUTPUT b) if lnverter output voltage is FREQUENCY 59.7 60.3 HZ.
- - greater than 110 Volts, THEN notify IAE to investigate abnormal indication as time allows.
MNS LOSS OF VITAL OR AUX CONTROL POWER PAGE NO.
AP111A15500115 279 Enclosure 24 Page 4 of 31 Rev 21 UNIT 1 Restoring Power To KXB unrnrnrnrnrnwrnww :unwornww
- 3. (Continued)
- 5) Close SKX mv Bkr 3 (SKX lnv AC Output).
I. On SKX Static lnverter Bypass Panel, perform the following:
- 1) Ensure MANUAL BYPASS SWITCH selected to NORMAL OPERATI ON.
- 2) Check INVERTER SUPPLYING 2) Depress INVERTER TO LOAD LOAD light LIT.
- pushbutton.
- 3) Ensure SKX Byp PnI Bkr 6 (SKX Byp Pnl ACOutput) is closed.
- 4) Check the following indications: 4) Perform the following:
ii SYSTEM OUTPUT VOLTAGE - a) if System output voltage is less 116 124 VOLTS
- than 110 Volts, THEN RETURN Step 2.
Li SYSTEM OUTPUT FREQUENCY 59.7 60.3 HZ
- - b) if System output voltage is greaterthan 110 Volts, THEN Li SYSTEM OUTPUT CURRENT - notify IAE to investigate LESS THAN 292 AMPS. abnormal indication as time allows.
- j. On SKX Static Inverter, ensure ALARM CIRCUIT is ON.
- k. On KXB Static Inverter, ensure ALARM CIRCUIT is OFF.
I. Notify Control Room that KXB is energized.
MNS LOSS OF VITAL OR AUX CONTROL POWER PAGE NO.
API1/A15500115 Enclosure 24- Page 5 of 31 UNIT 1 Restoring Power To KXB R21 ev.
DflDUUUUUD DuoDmErn
- 3. (Continued)
NOTE With SKX Inverter in service, MKB is normally aligned to SKX Inverter as a backup power supply in case the inverter fails. If MKB is reliable, it should be aligned as a backup power source.
- m. Contact station management to evaluate closing the following breakers to restore backup power to SKX Static lnverter:
D SKX Byp Pnl Bkr 5 (MKB Alt AC Source Supply) on SKX Static Inverter Bypass Panel LI MKB 2C (Inverter No. SKX Manual Bypass SW Alternate Supply).
- n. Exit this enclosure.
MNS LOSS OF VITAL OR AUX CONTROL POWER PAGE NO.
API1/A15500/15 220 of 279 Enclosure 24- Page 6 of 31 Rev. 21 UNIT 1 Restoring Power To KXB crnornrnwrnrnrnnw DDDDflOWrnWDrnrn
- 4. Align KXB Inverter to KXB panelboard as follows:
- a. Perform the following at KXB Static Inverter:
- 1) Ensure KXB lnv Sw 2 (KXB Inverter AC Output) is open.
- 2) Ensure KXB mv Bkr 1 (DCB to KXB DC Supply) is open.
- b. On SKX Breaker Alignment Panel, ensure SKX BAP Bkr 3 (SKX AC Output to KXB) is open.
- c. Ensure MKB lB (Inverter No. KXB Manual Bypass SW Alternate Supply) is open.
- d. Ensure DCB 2G (Static Inverter No.
KXB) is closed.
- e. Close KXB DISC SWITCH (Battery Room, column BB58).
MNS LOSS OF VITAL OR AUX CONTROL POWER jPAGE NO.
AP111N5500115 221 of 279 Enclosure 24 Page 7 of 31 UNIT 1 Restoring Power To KXB Rev. 21 rnwuwrnw urnrnrnw
- 4. (Continued)
- f. Perform the following at KXB Static I nverter:
- 1) Depress and hold PRECHARGE pushbutton.
- 2) WHEN PRECHARGE light has been lit 10 seconds, THEN perform the following substeps in rapid succession:
a) Release PRECHARGE pushbutton.
b) Close KXB mv Bkr 1 (DCB to KXB DC Supply).
- 3) Check the following indications: 3) Perform the following:
Li INVERTER OUTPUT a) if Inverter output voltage is less VOLTAGE - than 110 Volts, THEN RETURN 116-124VOLTS TStep2.
LI INVERTER OUTPUT b) if Inverter output volts are FREQUENCY 59.7 60.3 HZ.
- - greater than 110 Volts, THEN notify IAE to investigate abnormal indication as time allows.
- 4) Close KXB mv Sw 2 (K)(B Inverter AC Output).
MNS LOSS OF VITAL OR AUX CONTROL POWER PAGE NO.
AP111A15500115 279 Enclosure 24 Page 8 of 31 UNIT 1 Restoring Power To KXB Rev 21 rnuornrnrnrnrn
- 4. (Continued)
- g. Perform the following at the KXB Static Inverter Bypass Panel:
- 1) Ensure KXB Byp Pnl Bkr 3 (KXB Byp PnI AC Output) is closed.
- 2) Ensure MANUAL BYPASS SWITCH in NORMAL OPERATION.
- 3) Check INVERTER SUPPLYING 3) Depress INVERTER TO LOAD LOAD light LIT.
pushbutton.
- 4) Check the following indications: 4) Perform the following:
D SYSTEM OUTPUT CURRENT - a) if System output voltage is less LESS THAN 292 AMPS than 110 Volts, THEN RETURN TQStep2.
L SYSTEM OUTPUT VOLTAGE -
116 124 VOLTS
- b) if System output voltage is greater than 110 Volts, THEN El SYSTEM OUTPUT notify IAE to investigate FREQUENCY 59.7 60.3 HZ.
- - abnormal indication as time allows.
- h. On KXB Static Inverter, ensure ALARM CIRCUIT is ON.
- i. IF SKX Static Inverter shutdown, THEN ensure ALARM CIRCUIT is OFF on cc Static Inverter.
- j. Notify Control Room that KXB panelboard is energized.
MNS LOSS OF VITAL OR AUX CONTROL POWER PAGE NO.
AP111A15500115 279 Enclosure 24 Page 9 of 31 UNIT 1 Restoring Power To KXB ev.
R21 nnnwrnrnrnrn nuoonrnrnrnw
- 4. (Continued)
NOTE With KXB Inverter in service, MKB is normally aligned to KXB lnverter as a backup power supply in case the inverter fails. If MKB is reliable, it should be aligned as a backup power source.
- k. Contact station management to evaluate closing the following breaker to restore backup power to KXB Static I nverter:
Li MKB lB (lnverter No. KXB Manual Bypass SW Alternate Supply).
I. Exit this enclosure.
MNS LOSS OF VITAL OR AUX CONTROL POWER PAGE NO.
AP111A15500115 Enclosure 24- Page 10 of 31 UNIT 1 Restoring Power To KXB Rev 21 conurnwrnurnrnn DLI
- 5. Align Distribution Center MKB to KXB panelboard through the KXB Inverter Bypass Panel as follows:
- a. On 1 LAMP1 Panel Module 1 LAM1 2 a. Perform the following:
(located in Battery Room, column DD-55), check #2 LED MKB REG. 1) if another source is available to POWER SOURCE LOW light DARK. -
align to KXB panelboard, THE.r RETURN ]Q Step 2.
NOTE Distribution Center MKB can be energized by one of the following methods:
LI From MCC SMXT, which is fed from 2SLXA (normal) or 1 SLXH (alternate).
OR LI Cross-tied to Distribution Center MKA, which is fed from MCC SMXS, which is fed from 1SLXF (normal) or 2SLXF (alternate).
- 2) Attempt to energize MKB from MCC SMXT.
- 3) IF MKB cannot be energized from SMXT, THEN evaluate cross-tying MKA and MKB PER Enclosure 33 (Cross-tying MKA and MKB).
- 4) Do not continue until MKB is energized.
- b. Check MKA 2C (Bus MKA Tie Bkr To
- b. Observe Note prior to Step 6 and G 240/1 20 VAC Bus MKB) OPEN.
T Step 6.
MNS LOSS OF VITAL OR AUX CONTROL POWER PAGE NO.
AP/1/A15500/15 225 of 279 Enclosure 24- Page 11 of 31 UNIT 1 Restoring Power To KXB Rev. 21 nnrnurnrnrnrn onrnrnurnrn
- 5. (Continued)
- c. Check 2KU panelboard aligned to its normal power source as follows:
- 1) On SKX Breaker Alignment Panel, 1) Step 5.e.
check SKX BAP Bkr 4 (SKX AC Output to 2KU) OPEN.
- 2) On 2KU mv Byp Panel, check the 2) QTO.Step 5.g.
following indications:
LI INVERTER SUPPLYING LOAD light LIT.
NORMAL OPERATION.
- d. jQStep5.k.
- e. Check 2KU panelboard aligned to SKX e. GO TQ Step 5.g.
Inverter as follows:
- 1) On SKX Static mnverter Bypass Panel, check INVERTER SUPPLYING LOAD light LIT.-
- 2) On SKX Static mnverter Bypass Panel, check the MANUAL BYPASS SWmTCH in NORMAL OPERATION.
- f. ]QStep5.k.
I MNS I LOSS OF VITAL OR AUX CONTROL POWER I PAGE NO. I I API1IAI5500/15 j Enclosure 24 Page 12 of 31 I 226 of 279 UNIT 1 Restoring Power To KXB I Rev. 21 I I I oounrnrnuooornrn ouornnornu 1
- 5. (Continued)
- g. In Unit 2 MG Set Room, check 2KDCS1 panelboard aligned to its normal power source as follows:
- 1) On SKDCS Alignment Panel 1) Perform the following:
(column CC-59), check SKDCS SELECTOR SWITCH in OFF.-
a) ffl SKDCS SELECTOR SWITCH in MKA position, THEN GOTO Step 5.g.2).
b) IF SKDCS SELECTOR SWITCH in MKB position, THEN perform the following:
(1) On SKDCS UPS, record status of INVERTER TO LOAD pushbutton LED:
LIT OR U DARK (2) IF LED is dark, THEN observe Caution prior to Step 5.i and Q]Step 5.i.
_(3) IFLEDislit,THENGOTO Step 5.k.
- 2) On 2KDCS UPS, check INVERTER 2) Observe Caution prior to Step 5.i TO LOAD pushbutton LED LIT.-
and TQ Step 5.i.
- h. QIQStep5.k.
MNS LOSS OF VITAL OR AUX CONTROL POWER PAGE NO.
AP111A15500115 279 Enclosure 24 Page 13 of 31 UNIT 1 Restoring Power To KXB Re21 V.
nwrnrnurnrnrnornnrnrn nowrnrnrn
- 5. (Continued)
CAUTION If KXB panelboard is aligned to MKB in subsequent steps, the transformer supplying MKB may become overloaded, depending on actual loads at that moment.
- i. Contact station management to perform the following prior to continuing:
D Evaluate reducing the number of loads on MKB.
Evaluate the potential for transformer overload with KXB aligned to MKB.
Evaluate energizing KXB panelboard from another source Step 2.
- j. Perform one of the following based on previous evaluation:
D IF station management decides to proceed with placing KXB on MKB, THEN GO ] Step 5k.
OR El IF station management desires to align KXB panelboard to another source, THEN RETURN TO Step 2.
- k. On SKX Breaker Alignment panel, ensure SKX BAP Bkr 3 (SKX AC Output to KXB) is open.
I. Perform the following at KXB Static I nverter:
- 1) Ensure KXB lnv Sw 2 (KXB Inverter AC Output) is open.
- 2) Ensure KXB lnv Bkr 1 (DCB to KXB DC Supply) is open.
- m. Close KXB DISC SWITCH (Battery m. RETURN TQ Step 2.
Room, column BB58).
- n. Close MKB 18 (Inverter No. KXB
- n. RETURN TQ Step 2.
Manual Bypass SW Alternate Supply).
MNS LOSS OF VITAL OR AUX CONTROL POWER PAGE NO.
AP111A15500115 279 Enclosure 24 Page 14 of 31 UNIT 1 Restoring Power To KXB Rev 21 mwwww rnrnwwurnrnwcrn
- 5. (Continued)
- o. Perform the following at the KXB Static Inverter Bypass Panel:
- 1) Ensure KXB Byp Pnl Bkr 3 (KXB Byp Pnl AC Output) is closed.
- 2) Place MANUAL BYPASS SWITCH 2) RETURN TO Step 2.
to ALTERNATE AC SOURCE TO LOAD.
- 3) Check the following indications: 3) Perform the following:
Li SYSTEM OUTPUT CURRENT - a) if System output voltage is less LESS THAN 292 AMPS than 110 Volts, THEN RETURN Step 2.
Li SYSTEM OUTPUT VOLTAGE -
116 124 VOLTS b) if System output voltage is greater than 110 Volts, THEN LI SYSTEM OUTPUT notify IAE to investigate FREQUENCY 59.7 60.3 HZ.
- - abnormal indication as time allows.
- p. IFSKX Static Inverter shutdown, THEN ensure ALARM CIRCUIT is OFF on SKX Static Inverter.
- q. On Static Inverter, ensure ALARM CIRCUIT is OFF.
- r. Notify Control Room that KXB panelboard is energized.
- s. Exit this enclosure.
MNS LOSS OF VITAL OR AUX CONTROL POWER PAGE NO.
API1IAI5500/15 Enclosure 24- Page 15 of 31 UNIT 1 Restoring Power To KXB R21 ev.
wrnrnDDw WWDLILIrnDWE NOTE The transformer connected to MKA and MKB can safely carry only three of eight possible loads. Any of the following panelboards may already be aligned to MKA/MKB:
LI KRA LI KRB LI 1KU LI KXA LI 2KU LI 1KDCS1 LI 2KDCS1.
- 6. Determine the number of panelboards currently energized from MKAIMKB as follows:
- a. Check MKA- 1A(240/12OVAC a. TQ Step 6.c.
Regulated Power Pnlbd No. KRA) -
CLOSED.
- b. Circle KRA in Note prior to Step 6.
- c. Check MKB- 1A(240/12OVAC c. TQStep6.e.
Regulated Power Pnlbd No. KRB) -
CLOSED.
- d. Circle KRB in Note prior to Step 6.
- e. On SKX Breaker Alignment Panel, e. Perform the following:
check the following breakers OPEN:
- 1) Record below which panelboard is LI SKX BAP Bkr 1 (SKX AC Output to associated with the closed breaker KXA) (i.e. KXA, 1KU, or2KU):
LI SKX BAP Bkr 2 (SKX AC Output to 1 KU)
_2) QjQStep6.g.
LI SKX BAP Bkr 4 (SKX AC Output to 2KU).
MNS LOSS OF VITAL OR AUX CONTROL POWER PAGE NO.
AP111A15500115 279 Enclosure 24 Page 16 of 31 UNIT 1 Restoring Power To KXB Rev 21 UUDflflflDflUWflUWfl nrnunuuouwrnurnrn
- 6. (Continued)
_f. IQStep6.h.
- g. Check if SKX Inverter is in service as g. Circle the panelboard in the Note prior follows: to Step 6 that was recorded in Step 6.e.
Li On SKX Static Inverter Bypass Panel, check INVE.RTER SUPPLYING LOAD light LIT. -
LI On SKX Staticlnverter Bypass Panel, check the MANUAL BYPASS SWITCH in NORMAL OPERATI ON.
- h. Check if 1 KU Inverter is in service as follows:
- 1) Check iKU DISC SWITCH 1) Q]Q Step 6.i.
(Battery Room, co[umn BB54) -
CLOSED.
- 2) Check the following indications: 2) Circle 1 KU in Note prior to Step 6.
LI On 1KU Inv Byp Panel, check INVERTER SUPPLYING LOAD light LIT.
LI On IKU Inv Byp Panel, check iKU MAN BYP SW in -
NORMAL OPERATION.
MNS LOSS OF VITAL OR AUX CONTROL POWER PAGE NO.
AP111A15500115 279 Enclosure 24 Page 17 of 31 UNIT 1 Restoring Power To KXB R ev. 21 rnunuowrnu wrnrnrnornrnrnurnu
- 6. (Continued)
- i. Check if KXA Inverter is in service as follows:
- 1) CheckKXA DISC SWITCH 1) TQ Step 6.j.
(Battery Room, column BB54) -
CLOSED.
- 2) Check the following indications: 2) Circle KXA in Note prior to Step 6.
ü On KXA Static Inverter Bypass Panel, check INVERTER SUPPLYING LOAD light LIT.-
D On KXA Static Inverter Bypass Panel, check the MANUAL BYPASS SWITCH in NORMAL OPERATIC N.
- j. Check if 2KU Inverter is in service as follows:
- 1) Check 2KU DISC SWITCH 1) ]Q Step 6.k.
(Battery Room, column BB58) -
CLOSED.
- 2) Check the following indications: 2) Circle 2KU in Note prior to Step 6.
On 2KU Inv Byp Panel, check INVERTER SUPPLYING LOAD light LIT.
On 2KU Inv Byp Panel, check 2KU MAN BYP SW in -
NORMAL OPERATION.
MNS LOSS OF VITAL OR AUX CONTROL POWER PAGE NO.
AP/1/A15500/15 232 of 279 Enclosure 24 Page 18 of 31 UNIT 1 Restoring Power To KXB Rev. 21 uuononuwrnurnnrnrn ouwowwww
- 6. (Continued)
- k. In Unit 2 MG Set Room, check if 1 KDCS1 Inverter is in service as follows:
- 1) On SKDCS Alignment Panel 1) Perform the following:
(column CC-59), check SKDCS SELECTOR SWITCH in OFF.-
a) IF SKDCS SELECTOR SWITCH in MKB position, THEN GOTO Step 6.k.2).
b) if SKDCS SELECTOR SWITCH in MKA position, THEN perform the following:
(1) On SKDCS UPS, record status of INVERTER TO LOAD pushbutton LED:
LI LIT OR LI DARK (2) IF LED is dark, THEN circle lKDCSl in Note prior to Step 6.
_(3) ]EQStep6.l.
- 2) On 1KDCS UPS, check INVERTER 2) Circle lKDCSl in Note prior to TO LOAD pushbutton LED LIT. -
Step 6.
MNS LOSS OF VITAL OR AUX CONTROL POWER PAGE NO.
API1/A15500115 233 of 279 Enclosure 24- Page 19 of 31 UNIT 1 Restoring Power To KXB Rev. 21 DODDDDUDflUUDUOU
- 6. (Continued)
I. In Unit 2 MG Set Room, check if 2KDCS1 Inverter is in service as follows:
- 1) On SKDCS Alignment Panel 1) Perform the following:
(column CC-59), check SKDCS SELECTOR SWITCH in OFF.
a) IF SKDCS SELECTOR SWITCH in MKA position, THEN GO TO Step 6.1.2).
b) IF SKDCS SELECTOR SWITCH in MKB position, THEN perform the following:
(1) On SKDCS UPS, record status of INVERTER TO LOAD pushbutton LED:
LlT OR DARK (2) IF LED is dark, THEN circle 2KDCS1 in Note prior to Step 6.
(3) GOTOStep6.m.
- 2) On 2KDCS UPS, check INVERTER 2) Circle 2KDCS1 in Note prior to TO LOAD pushbutton LED LIT.-
Step 6.
- m. Check the total number of panelboards m. Observe Caution prior to Step 6.o and circled in Note prior to Step 6 LESS
]Q Step 6.o.
THAN OR EQUAL TO TWO.
- n. RETURN TQ Step 5.k.
MNS LOSS OF VITAL OR AIJX CONTROL POWER PAGE NO.
AP111A15500115 Enclosure 24 Page 20 of 31 UNIT 1 Restoring Power To KXB Rev 21 ounnnurnnnrni nrnrnncuurnwrnnnrnnc
- 6. (Continued)
CAUTION If KXB panelboard is aligned to MKB in subsequent steps, the transformer supplying both MKA and MKB may become overloaded, depending on actual loads at that moment.
- o. Contact station management to perform the following prior to continuing:
Li Evaluate reducing the number of loads on MKA and MKB.
El Evaluate the potential for transformer overload with KXB aligned to MKAIMKB.
El Evaluate energizing KXB panelboard from another source Step 2.
- p. Perform one of the following based on previous evaluation:
El if station management decides to proceed with placing KXB on MKB, THEN RETURN ]Q. Step 5.k.
OR LI if station management desires to align KXB panelboard to another source, THEN RETURN TO Step 2.
MNS I LOSS OF VITAL OR AUX CONTROL POWER PAGE NO. I AP111N5500115 I Enclosure 24 Page 21 of 31 I 235 of 2791 UNIT 1 Restoring Power To KXB I Rev. 21 I I
oonnornrnrn uuuuonunrnrnrn
- 7. Align Distribution Center MKB to KXB panelboard through the SKX Static Inverter Bypass Panel as follows:
- a. On SKX Breaker Alignment Panel, a. Perform the following:
check the following breakers OPEN:
- 1) Notify Control Room to evaluate Li SKX BAP Bkr 1 (SKX AC Output to swapping bus aligned to SKX to KXA) another source.
LI SKX BAP Bkr 2 (SKX AC Output to 2) if bus aligned to SKX cannot be I KU) swapped to another source, THEN RETURN IQ. Step 2.
Li SKX BAP Bkr 4 (SKX AC Output to 2KU). 3) if bus aligned to SKX can be swapped to another source, THEN perform the following:
a) Swap OP/OIA/63501001 B (125VDC 240/12OVAC Auxiliary Control Power System).
b) Do not continue until swap complete.
MNS LOSS OF VITAL OR AUX CONTROL POWER PAGE NO.
AP111A15500115 236 of 279 Enclosure 24 Page 22 of 31 UNIT 1 Restoring Power To KXB Rev. 21 urnowrnurnrnoornrn urnrnrnrn
- 7. (Continued)
- b. On 1LAMPI Panel Module 1LAM12 b. Perform the following:
(located in Battery Room, column DD-55), check #2 LED MKB REG. 1) IF another source is available to POWER SOURCE LOW light DARK. -
align to KXB panelboard, THEN RETURN T Step 2.
NOTE Distribution Center MKB can be energized by one of the following methods:
L From MCC SMXT, which is fed from 2SLXA (normal) or 1 SLXH (alternate).
OR D Cross-tied to Distribution Center MKA, which is fed from MCC SMXS, which is fed from 1SLXF (normal) or 2SLXF (alternate).
- 2) Attempt to energize MKB from MCC SMXT.
- 3) IF MKB cannot be energized from SMXT, THEN evaluate cross-tying MKA and MKB PER Enclosure 33 (Cross-tying MKA and MKB).
- 4) Do not continue until MKB is energized.
- c. Check MKA 2C (Bus MKA Tie Bkr To
- c. Observe Note prior to Step 8 and G 240/1 20 VAC Bus MKB) OPEN.
]Q Step 8.
MNS LOSS OF VITAL OR AUX CONTROL POWER PAGE NO.
AP111A15500115 Enclosure 24 Page 23 of 31 UNIT 1 Restoring Power To KXB Rev 21 rnrnuuurnuurnucuwu ocurnrnornuurnc
- 7. (Continued)
- d. Check 2KU panelboard aligned to its d. GO TO Step 7.f.
normal power source as follows:
D On 2KU lnv Byp Panel, check INVERTER SUPPLYING LOAD light LIT.
L3 On 2KU Inv Byp Panel, check 2KU MAN BYP SW in NORMAL OPERATION.
_e. GOTOStep7.j.
- f. In Unit 2 MG Set Room, check 2KDCS1 panelboard aligned to its normal power source as follows:
- 1) On SKDCS Alignment Panel 1) Perform the following:
(column CC-59), check SKDCS SELECTOR SWITCH in OFF.
a) IF SKDCS SELECTOR SWITCH in MKA position, THEN GOTO Step 7.f.2).
b) IF SKDCS SELECTOR SWITCH in MKB position, THEN perform the following:
(1) On SKDCS UPS, record status of INVERTER TO LOAD pushbutton LED:
D LIT OR D DARK (2) IF LED is dark, THEN observe Caution prior to Step 7.h and QfQ Step 7.h.
_(3) IFLEDislit,THENGOTO Step 7.j.
- 2) On 2KDCS UPS, check INVERTER 2) Observe Caution prior to Step 7.h TO LOAD pushbutton LED LIT.
and QQ Step 7.h.
MNS API1/N5500115 II LOSS OF VITAL OR AUX CONTROL POWER PAGE NO. I Enclosure 24 Page 24 of 31 238 of 2791 UNIT 1 Restoring Power To KXB Rev. 21 I I
rnrnrnurnouurnwnrnu ournrnrnrn
- 7. (Continued)
_g. ]QStep7.j CAUTION If KXB panelboard is aligned to MKB in subsequent steps, the transformer supplying MKB may become overloaded, depending on actual loads at that moment.
- h. Contact station management to perform the following prior to continuing:
LI Evaluate reducing the number of loads on MKB.
LI Evaluate the potential for transformer overload with KXB aligned to MKB.
LI Evaluate energizing KXB panelboard from another source Step 2.
- i. Perform one of the following based on previous evaluation:
LI station management decides to proceed with placing KXB on MKB, THEN Q TQ Step 7.j.
OR LI if station management desires to align KXB panelboard to another source, THEN RETURN TO Step 2.
- j. On SKX Static Inverter, perform the following:
- 1) Ensure SKX mv Bkr 3 (SKX lnv AC Output) is open.
- 2) Ensure SKX lnv Bkr 2 (DCB to SKX DC Supply) is open.
- k. Ensure KXB DISC SWITCH (Battery Room, column BB58) is open.
MNS LOSS OF VITAL OR AUX CONTROL POWER II PAGE NO. I API1IN5500I1 5 I Enclosure 24 Page 25 of 31 239 of 279 I UNIT 1 Restoring Power To KXB I 21 I I I rnnurnrnwrnnurn onnounrnrnw
- 7. (Continued)
I. Check kirk key in MKB 2C (Inverter
- I. Perform the following:
No. SKX Manual Bypass SW Alternate Supply) INSTALLED.
- 1) Ensure MKA-1, F1C (lnverter No.
SKX Manual Bypass SW Alternate Supply) is open.
- 2) Remove kirk key from MKA-1, Fl C.
- 3) Insert kirk key in MKB 2C.-
- m. Using Kirk key, close MKB 2C (Inverter
- m. RETURN jQ Step 2.
No. SKX Manual Bypass SW Alternate Supply).
- n. On SKX Breaker Alignment Panel, use n. RETURN TO Step 2.
Kirk key to close SKX BAP Bkr 3 (SKX AC Output to KXB).
- o. Perform the following at the SKX Static Inverter Bypass Panel:
- 1) Using Kirk key, close SKX Byp Pnl 1) RETURN TO Step 2.
Bkr 5 (MKB Alt AC Source Supply).
- 2) Close SKX Byp Pnl Bkr 6 (SKX Byp 2) RETURN TQ Step 2.
Pnl AC Output).
- 3) Ensure the MANUAL BYPASS 3) RETURN 1Q Step 2.
SWITCH is selected to ALTERNATE AC SOURCE TO LOAD.
- 4) Check the following indications: 4) Perform the following:
LI SYSTEM OUTPUT VOLTAGE - a) jf System output voltage is less 116 124 VOLTS than 110 Volts, THEN RETURN T.Step2.
Li SYSTEM OUTPUT FREQUENCY 59.7 60.3 HZ
- - b) if System output voltage is greater than 110 Volts, THEN Li SYSTEM OUTPUT CURRENT - notify IAE to investigate LESS THAN 292 AMPS. abnormal indication as time allows.
MNS LOSS OF VITAL OR AUX CONTROL POWER PAGE NO.
AP111A15500115 279 Enclosure 24 Page 26 of 31 UNIT 1 Restoring Power To KXB Rev 21 uwwornWD
- 7. (Continued)
- p. On SKX Static Inverter, ensure ALARM CIRCUIT is OFF.
- q. On KXB Static Inverter, ensure ALARM CIRCUIT is OFF.
- r. Notify Control Room that KXB panelboard is energized.
- s. WHEN time allows, THEN review breaker manipulations made in this enclosure and evaluate restoring breakers to normal as appropriate.
- t. Exit this enclosure.
MNS I LOSS OF VITAL OR AUX CONTROL POWER I PAGE NO. I API1IN5500/15 I Enclosure 24-Page27 of 31 I 241 of 2791 UNIT 1 Restoring Power To KXB I Rev.21 I I
orn NOTE The transformer connected to MKA and MKB can safely carry only three of eight possible loads. Any of the following panelboards may already be aligned to MKAIMKB:
U KRA U KRB U 1KU U KXA U 2KU U 1KDCS1 U 2KDCS1.
- 8. Determine the number of panelboards currently energized from MKAIMKB as follows:
- a. CheckMKA-1A(240/I2OVAC a. QQStep8.c.
Regulated Power Pnlbd No. KRA) -
CLOSED.
- b. Circle KRA in Note prior to Step 8.
- c. Check MKB 1A (240/120 VAC
- c. IP. Step 8.e.
Regulated Power Pnlbd No. KRB) -
CLOSED.
- d. Circle KRB in Note prior to Step 8.
- e. Check if 1KU Inverter is in service as e. Circle iKU in Note prior to Step 8.
follows:
U On 1KU lnv Byp Panel, check INVERTER SUPPLYING LOAD light LIT.
U On 1 KU mv Byp Panel, check 1 KU MAN BYP SW in - NORMAL OPERATI ON.
MNS LOSS OF VITAL OR AUX CONTROL POW AP111A15500115 ER PAGE NO.
Enclosure 24 Page 28 of 31 279 UNIT 1 Restoring Power To KXB ReV.21 DDLILILIULILIULIDDDDLILILILILI LILILIDLILIDLILILILIrnLILI
- 8. (Continued)
- f. Check if KXA Inverter is in service as follows: f. Circle KXA in Note prior to Step 8.
LI On KXA Static Inverter Bypass Panel, check INVERTER SUPPLYING LOAD light LIT.-
LI On KXA Static lriverter Bypass Panel, check the MANUAL BYPASS SWITCH in NORMAL OPERATION.
- g. Check if 2KU Inverter is in service as follows:
- g. Circle 2KU in Note prior to Step 8.
LI On 2KU lnv Byp Panel, check INVERTER SUPPLYING LOAD light LIT.
LI On 2KU lnv Byp Panel, check 2KU MAN BYP SW in NORMAL OPERATION.
MNS LOSS OF VITAL OR AUX CONTROL POWER PAGE NO.
AP/11A15500/15 Enclosure 24 Page 29 of 31 279 UNET 1 Restoring Power To KXB Rev 21 urnurnurnrnornrnrnrn ornwrnrnrn
- 8. (Continued)
- h. In Unit 2 MG Set Room, check if I KDCSI Inverter is in service as follows:
- 1) On SKDCS Alignment Panel 1) Perform the following:
(column CC-59), check SKDCS SELECTOR SWITCH in OFF.
a) IF SKDCS SELECTOR SWITCH in MKB position, THEN GOTO Step 8.h.2).
b) if SKDCS SELECTOR SWITCH in MKA position, THEN perform the following:
(1) On SKDCS UPS, record status of INVERTER TO LOAD pushbutton LED:
El LIT OR El DARK (2) IF LED is dark, THEN circle IKDCSl in Note prior to Step 8.
(3) QTOStep8.i.
- 2) On 1KDCS UPS, check INVERTER 2) Circle lKDCSl in Note prior to TO LOAD pushbutton LED LIT. -
Step 8.
MNS LOSS OF VITAL OR AUX CONTROL POWER APIIIAI5500/15 PAGE NO.
Enclosure 24 Page 30 of 31 244 of 279 UNIT 1 Restoring Power To KXB Rev. 21 ornrnrnrnrnrnrnrnrnu
- 8. (Continued)
- i. In Unit 2 MG Set Room, check if 2KDCS1 Inverter is in service as follows:
- 1) On SKDCS Alignment Panel 1) Perform the following:
(column CC-59), check SKDCS SELECTOR SWITCH in OFF.-
a) IF SKDCS SELECTOR SWITCH in MKA position, THEN GOTO Step 8.i.2).
b) if SKDCS SELECTOR SWITCH in MKB position, THEN perform the following:
(1) On SKDCS UPS, record status of INVERTER TO LOAD pushbutton LED:
ii LIT OR D DARK (2) IF LED is dark, THEN circle 2KDCSI in Note prior to Step 8.
_(3) ]QStep8.j.
- 2) On 2KDCS UPS, check INVERTER 2) Circle 2KDCS1 in Note prior to TO LOAD pushbutton LED LIT. -
Step 8.
- j. Check the total number of panelboards
- j. Observe Caution prior to Step 8.1 and circled in Note prior to Step 8 LESS
]Q. Step 8.1.
THAN OR EQUAL TO TWO.
- k. RETURN IQ Step 7.j.
MNS LOSS OF VITAL OR AUX CONTROL POWER PAGE NO.
API1/A15500115 Enclosure 24 Page 31 of 31 245 of 279 UNIT 1 Restoring Power To KXB Rev. 21 UDDUWWW nwnrnrnrnrnrnrn
- 8. (Continued)
CAUTION If KXB panelboard is aligned to MKB in subsequent steps, the transformer supplying both MKA and MKB may become overloaded, depending on actual loads at that moment.
I. Contact station management to perform the following prior to continuing:
Evaluate reducing the number of loads on MKA and MKB.
Evaluate the potential for transformer overload with KXB aligned to MKAIMKB.
Evaluate energizing KXB panelboard from another source Step 2.
- m. Perform one of the following based on previous evaluation:
IF station management decides to proceed with placing KXB on MKB, THEN RETURN ] Step 7.j.
OR IF station management desires to align KXB panelboard to another source, THEN RETURN ] Step 2.